PHYSICAL SCIENCES

PAPER 2 (CHEMISTRY)

GRADE 12

TERMS & DEFINITIONS

QUESTIONS & ANSWERS

PER TOPIC

2017

This document consists of 114 pages.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 2 FS/2017

CONTENTS

HOW TO USE THIS DOCUMENT ...................................................................................... 3

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS............................................................................................... 4

QUESTIONS .................................................................................................................... 12
ORGANIC MOLECULES: NOMENCLATURE............................................................... 12
ORGANIC MOLECULES: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ................................................... 19
ORGANIC MOLECULES: ORGANIC REACTIONS ..................................................... 23
REACTION RATE AND ENERGY IN CHEMICAL REACTIONS ................................... 29
CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM ........................................................................................... 36
ACIDS AND BASES ..................................................................................................... 42
GALVANIC CELLS ....................................................................................................... 47
ELECTROLYTIC CELLS............................................................................................... 53
FERTILISERS ............................................................................................................... 58

ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ........................................................................................... 63

ORGANIC MOLECULES: NOMENCLATURE............................................................... 63
ORGANIC MOLECULES: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ................................................... 69
ORGANIC MOLECULES: ORGANIC REACTIONS ...................................................... 73
REACTION RATE AND ENERGY IN CHEMICAL REACTIONS ................................... 77
CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM ........................................................................................... 85
ACIDS AND BASES ..................................................................................................... 95
GALVANIC CELLS ..................................................................................................... 104
ELECTROLYTIC CELLS............................................................................................. 108
FERTILISERS ............................................................................................................. 111

BIBLIOGRAPHY ............................................................................................................ 114

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 3 FS/2017

HOW TO USE THIS DOCUMENT

Dear Grade 12 learner

1. This document was compiled as an extra resource to help you to perform well in
Physical Sciences.

2. Firstly you must make sure that you study the terms and definitions provided for each
topic. Theory always forms part of any test or examination and you should ensure
that you obtain full marks for ALL theory questions. Always be prepared to write a
test on terms and definitions as soon as a topic is completed in class. Revise terms
and definitions of topics already completed frequently so that you know them by the
time you are sitting for a test or an examination.

3. Answer all the questions on a certain topic in your homework book as soon as the
topic is completed. DO NOT look at the answers before attempting the questions.
First try it yourself. Compare your answers with the answers at the back of the
document. Mark your work with a pencil and do corrections for your incorrect
answers. If you do not know how to answer a question, the answers are there to
guide you. Acquaint yourself with the way in which a particular type of question
should be answered. Answers supplied are from memoranda used to mark the
questions in previous years.

4. Your teacher can, for example, give you two of the questions in this document as
homework. The following day he/she will just check whether you answered them and
whether you marked your answers. The teacher will only discuss those questions in
which you do not understand the answers supplied in the document. Therefore a lot
of time will be saved.

5. You are probably thinking about the point behind the answers at the back of the
document. It is intended to help you to prepare for your tests and examinations. If
you choose to copy answers into your homework book without trying them out
yourself, you will be the losing party in the end! Not your teacher or anybody else!

6. Your teacher can also decide to give you a test on one of the questions given for
homework. If you just copied the answers without any understanding, surely he/she
will catch you! None of us want to be branded as dishonest, do we?

7. Work through all the questions and answers of a particular topic before you sit for an
examination, even if you answered the questions before.

8. Any additional resource is only of help when used correctly. Ensure that you make
use of all help provided in the correct way to enable you to be successful. All the best
for 2017 and may you perform very well in Physical Sciences.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 4 FS/2017

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

MATTER AND MATERIALS: ORGANIC MOLECULES
Addition reaction A reaction in which a double bond in the starting material is broken and
elements are added to it.
Addition polymer A polymer formed when monomers (usually containing a double bond)
combine through an addition reaction.
Addition polymerisation A reaction in which small molecules join to form very large molecules by
adding on double bonds.
Alcohol An organic compound in which H atoms in an alkane have been substituted
with hydroxyl groups (-OH groups).
General formula: CnH2n + 1OH
Aldehydes Organic compounds having the general structure RCHO where R = H or
alkyl.
General formula: RCHO (R = alkyl group)
Alkane An organic compound containing only C-H and C-C single bonds.
General formula: CnH2n + 2
Alkene A compound of carbon and hydrogen that contains a carbon-carbon double
bond. General formula: CnH2n
Alkyl group A group formed by removing one H atom from an alkane.
Alkyne A compound of carbon and hydrogen that contains a carbon-carbon triple
bond.
Boiling point The temperature at which the vapour pressure of a liquid equals
atmospheric pressure.
Carbonyl group Functional group of ketones (>C=O)
Carboxyl group Functional group of carboxylic acids (-COOH)
Carboxylic acid An organic compound containing a carboxyl group (-COOH group).
General formula: CnH2n + 1COOH (or RCOOH)
Chain isomers Compounds with the same molecular formula, but different types of chains.
Condensation polymer A polymer formed by two monomers with different functional groups that are
linked together in a condensation reaction in which a small molecule,
usually water, is lost.
Condensation Molecules of two monomers with different functional groups undergo
polymerisation condensation reactions with the loss of small molecules, usually water
Condensed structural A formula that shows the way in which atoms are bonded together in the
formula molecule, but DOES NOT SHOW ALL bond lines.
Cracking The chemical process in which longer chain hydrocarbon molecules are
broken down to shorter more useful molecules.
Dehydration Elimination of water from a compound usually such as an alcohol.
Dehydrohalogenation The elimination of hydrogen and a halogen from a haloalkane.
Dipole-dipole force Intermolecular forces found between polar molecules i.e. molecules in
which there is an uneven distribution of charge so that the molecule has a
positive and a negative side.
Elimination reaction A reaction in which elements of the starting material are “lost” and a double
bond is formed.
Esterification The preparation of an ester from the reaction of a carboxylic acid with an
alcohol.
Functional group A bond or an atom or a group of atoms that determine(s) the physical and
chemical properties of a group of organic compounds.
Functional isomers Compounds with the same molecular formula, but different functional
groups.
Haloalkane An organic compound in which one or more H atoms in an alkane have
(Alkyl halide) been replaced with halogen atoms.
General formula: CnH2n + 1X (X = F, Cℓ, Br or I)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 5 FS/2017

Halogenation The reaction of a halogen (Br2, Cℓ2) with a compound.

Homologous series A series of organic compounds that can be described by the same general
formula.

OR
A series of organic compounds in which one member differs from the next
with a CH2 group.
Hydration The addition of water to a compound.
Hydrocarbon Organic compounds that consist of hydrogen and carbon only.
Hydrogenation The addition of hydrogen to an alkene
Hydrogen bond A strong intermolecular force found between molecules in which an H atom
is covalently bonded to wither an N, O or F atom.
Hydrohalogenation The addition of a hydrogen halide to an alkene.
Hydrolysis The reaction of a compound with water.
Intermolecular force Forces between molecules that determine physical properties of
compounds.
IUPAC name A chemical nomenclature (set of rules) created and developed by the
International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) to generate
systematic names for chemical compounds.
London force A weak intermolecular force between non-polar molecules.
Macromolecule A molecule that consists of a large number of atoms.
Melting point The temperature at which the solid and liquid phases of a substance are at
equilibrium.
Molecular formula A chemical formula that indicates the type of atoms and the correct number
of each in a molecule, e.g. CH4.
Monomer Small organic molecules that can be covalently bonded to each other in a
repeating pattern.
Organic chemistry Chemistry of carbon compounds.
Polymer A large molecule composed of smaller monomer units covalently bonded to
each other in a repeating pattern
Polymerisation A chemical reaction in which monomer molecules join to form a polymer
Positional isomer Compounds with the same molecular formula, but different positions of the
side chain, substituents or functional groups on the parent chain.
Primary alcohol One C atom is bonded to the C atom bonded to hydroxyl group.
Example:
H H
H C C O H
H H
Primary haloalkane One C atom is bonded to the C atom bonded to the halogen.
Example:
H H
H C C Br
H H
Saturated compounds Compounds in which there are no multiple bonds between C atoms in their
hydrocarbon chains.
OR
Compounds with only single bonds between C atoms in their hydrocarbon
chains.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 6 FS/2017

Secondary alcohol Two C atoms bonded to the C atom that is bonded to hydroxyl group.
Example:
H H
H C C O H
H
H C H
H

Secondary haloalkane Two C atoms bonded to the C atom bonded to the halogen.
Example:
H H
H C C Br
H
H C H
H

Structural formula A structural formula of a compound shows which atoms are attached to
which within the molecule. Atoms are represented by their chemical
symbols and lines are used to represent ALL the bonds that hold the atoms
together.

Structural isomer Organic molecules with the same molecular formula, but different structural
formulae.
Substituent A group or branch attached to the longest continuous chain of C atoms in
(branch) an organic compound.

Substitution reaction A reaction in which an atom or a group of atoms in a molecule is replaced

by another atom or group of atoms.
Tertiary alcohol Three C atoms bonded to carbon that is bonded to hydroxyl group.
Example:
H
H C H
H
H C C O H
H
H C H
H
Tertiary haloalkane Three C atoms bonded to the C atom bonded to the halogen.
Example:
H
H C H
H
H C C Br
H
H C H
H
Unsaturated Compounds in which there are multiple bonds (double or triple bonds)
compounds between C atoms in their hydrocarbon chains.
Van der Waals forces A combined name used for the different types of intermolecular forces.
Vapour pressure The pressure exerted by a vapour at equilibrium with its liquid in a closed
system.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 7 FS/2017

CHEMICAL CHANGE: QUANTITATIVE ASPECTS OF CHEMICAL CHANGE

Mole One mole of a substance is the amount of substance having the same
number of particles as there are atoms in 12 g carbon-12.
Molar gas volume at The volume of one mole of a gas.
STP (1 mole of any gas occupies 22,4 dm3 at 0 °C (273 K) and 1 atmosphere
(101,3 kPa).
Molar mass The mass of one mole of a substance. Symbol: M Unit: g∙mol-1

Avogadro’s Law Under the same conditions of temperature and pressure, the same number of
moles of all gases occupy the same volume.

Concentration The amount of solute per litre/cubic decimeter of solution.

n
In symbols: c  Unit: mol∙dm-3
V
Empirical formula The simplest positive integer ratio of atoms present in a compound.

Percentage yield Yield is the amount of product obtained from a reaction.

actual mass obtained
percentage yield =  100
calculated mass
Percentage purity mass of pure chemical
percentage purity =  100
total mass of sample
Percentage The percentage of each of the components in a substance.
composition mass contribute d by component
Percentage of component =  100
mass of all components
Limiting reagents The substance that is totally consumed when the chemical reaction is
complete.

CHEMICAL CHANGE: ENERGY AND CHANGE

Heat of reaction (ΔH) The energy absorbed or released in a chemical reaction.
Exothermic reactions Reactions that release energy. (ΔH < 0)

Endothermic Reactions that absorb energy. (ΔH > 0)

reactions
Activation energy The minimum energy needed for a reaction to take place.
Activated complex The unstable transition state from reactants to products.

CHEMICAL CHANGE: RATE OF REACTION

Reaction rate The change in concentration of reactants or products per unit time.
c
Rate = Unit: mol∙dm-3∙s-1
t
Collision theory a model that explains reaction rate as the result of particles colliding with a
certain minimum energy.
Catalyst A substance that increases the rate of a chemical reaction without itself
undergoing a permanent change.
(A catalyst increases the rate of a reaction by providing an alternative path of
lower activation energy. It therefore decreases the net/total activation energy.)

Factors that affect Nature of reacting substances, surface area, concentration (pressure for
reaction rate gases), temperature and the presence of a catalyst.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 8 FS/2017

CHEMICAL CHANGE: CHEMCIAL EQUILIBRIUM

Open system A system which continuously interacts with the environment – it exchanges
matter and energy with its environment.
Closed system A system that only exchanges energy with its surroundings, but it does not
exchange matter with its surroundings.
Reversible reaction A reaction is reversible when products can be converted back to reactants.
Chemical equilibrium Dynamic equilibrium when the rate of the forward reaction equals the rate of
the reverse reaction.
Factors that Pressure (gases only), concentration and temperature.
influence the
equilibrium position
Le Chatelier's When the equilibrium in a closed system is disturbed, the system will re-
principle instate a new equilibrium by favouring the reaction that will oppose the
disturbance.

CHEMICAL CHANGE: ACIDS AND BASES

Acid-base indicator A dye used to distinguish between acidic and basic solutions by means of
the colour changes it undergoes in these solutions.
Amphiprotic A substance that can act as either an acid or a base.
substance/ampholyte
Arrhenius theory An acid is a substance that produces hydrogen ions (H +)/ hydronium ions
(H3O+) when it dissolves in water.
A base is a substance that produces hydroxide ions (OH-) when it dissolves
in water.
Auto-ionisation of A reaction in which water reacts with itself to form ions (hydronium ions and
water hydroxide ions).
Concentrated Contain a large amount (number of moles) of acid/base in proportion to the
acids/bases volume of water.
Conjugate acid-base A pair of compounds or ions that differ by the presence of one H + ion.
pair Example: CO32- and HCO3- OR HCℓ and Cℓ-
Conjugate acid and A conjugate acid has one H+ ion more than its conjugate base.
base Example: HCO3- is the conjugate acid of base CO32- .
CO32- is the conjugate base of acid HCO3- .
Dilute acids/bases Contain a small amount (number of moles) of acid/base in proportion to the
volume of water.
Diprotic acid An acid that can donate two protons.
Example: H2SO4
Dissociation The process in which ionic compounds split into ions.
Endpoint The point in a titration where the indicator changes colour.
Equivalence point The point in a reaction where equivalent amounts of acid and base have
reacted completely.
Hydrolysis The reaction of a salt with water.
OR
The reaction of an ion with water to produce the conjugate acid and a
hydroxide ion or the conjugate base and a hydronium ion.
Ionisation The process in which ions are formed during a chemical reaction.
Ion product of water The product of the ions formed during auto-ionisation of water i.e.
[H3O+][OH–] at 25 °C.
Ionisation constant of The equilibrium value of the ion product [H3O+][OH–] at 25 °C.
water (Kw)
Ka value Ionisation constant for an acid.
Kb value Dissociation or ionisation constant for a base.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 9 FS/2017

Lowry-Brønsted theory An acid is a proton (H+ ion) donor.

A base is a proton (H+ ion) acceptor.
Monoprotic acid An acid that can donate one proton.
Example: HCℓ
Neutralisation The reaction of an acid with a base to form a salt (ionic compound) and
water.
pH The negative of the logarithm of the hydronium ion concentration in
mol·dm-3.
In symbols: pH = -log[H3O+] Unit: None
pH scale A scale from 0 – 14 used as a measure of the acidity and basicity of
solutions where pH = 7 is neutral, pH > 7 is basic and pH < 7 is acidic.
Salt The ionic compound that is the product of a neutralisation reaction.
Standard solution A solution of precisely known concentration.
Strong bases Dissociate completely in water to form a high concentration of OH - ions.
Examples: sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and potassium hydroxide (KOH)
Strong acids Ionise completely in water to form a high concentration of H 3O+ ions.
Examples:
hydrochloric acid (HCℓ), sulphuric acid (H2SO4) and nitric acid (HNO3)
Titration The procedure for determining the amount of acid (or base) in a solution by
determining the volume of base (or acid) of known concentration that will
completely react with it.
Weak acids Ionise incompletely in water to form a low concentration of H 3O+ ions.

Examples: ethanoic acid (CH3COOH) and oxalic acid (COOH)2

Weak bases Dissociate/ionise incompletely in water to form a low concentration of OH -
ions.
Examples:
ammonia (NH3), sodium hydrogen carbonate (NaHCO3), sodium carbonate
(Na2CO3), potassium carbonate (K2CO3), calcium carbonate (CaCO3)

CHEMICAL CHANGE: ELECTROCHEMICAL REACTIONS

Galvanic cell A cell in which chemical energy is converted into electrical energy. A
galvanic (voltaic) cell has self-sustaining electrode reactions.
Electrolytic cell A cell in which electrical energy is converted into chemical energy.
Redox reaction A reaction in which an electron transfer takes place.
Oxidation A loss of electrons./An increase in oxidation number.
Reduction A gain of electrons./A decrease in oxidation number.
Oxidising agent A substance that is reduced/gains electrons/whose oxidation number
decreases.
Reducing agent A substance that is oxidised/loses electrons/whose oxidation number
increases.
Anode The electrode where oxidation takes place.
Cathode The electrode where reduction takes place.
Electrolyte A solution that conducts electricity through the movement of ions.
Electrolysis The chemical process in which electrical energy is converted to
chemical energy OR the use of electrical energy to produce a chemical
change.
Salt bridge The connection between two half-cells needed to ensure electrical neutrality
in the cell.
OR
A component used in a galvanic cell to complete the circuit.
Electrodes An electrical conductor used in a galvanic cell to make contact with a non-
metallic part of the circuit e.g. the electrolyte.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 10 FS/2017

Cell notation A short way to represent a galvanic cell.

When writing cell notation, the following convention should be used:

o The H2|H+ half-cell is treated just like any other half-cell.
o Cell terminals (electrodes) are written on the outside of the cell notation.
o Active electrodes:
reducing agent | oxidised species || oxidising agent | reduced species
o Inert electrodes (usually Pt or C):
Pt | reducing agent | oxidised species || oxidising agent | reduced species | Pt
Example: Pt | Cℓ-(aq) |Cℓ2(g) || F2(g) | F-(aq) | Pt
Overall cell reaction The reaction obtained by combining two half-reactions.
Positive value of the The reaction is spontaneous under standard conditions.
standard emf
Standard conditions Temperature: 25 °C / 298 K
for a galvanic cell Concentration: 1 mol∙dm -3
Pressure (gases only): 101,3 kPa / 1 atmosphere

Standard hydrogen The reference electrode used to compile the Table of Standard Reduction
electrode Potentials. The hydrogen half-cell was given a standard reduction potential
of 0 V.

Half-cell notation: Pt | H2(g) | H+(aq)

Half-reaction: 2H+ + 2e- ⇌ H2
Electroplating The covering of an object with a metal by making it the cathode in an
electrolytic cell.
Bauxite The ore from which aluminium is recovered.
Cryolite An aluminium compound in which aluminium oxide is dissolved to reduce
the cost of the extraction of aluminium. Cryolite has a lower melting point
than aluminium oxide.

CHEMICAL SYSTEMS: FERTILISERS

Non-mineral nutrients C, H and O
in plants Obtained from the atmosphere (CO2) and rain (H2O)
Primary nutrients for Nitrogen (N), phosphorous (P) and potassium (K)
plants
Function:
N: essential for plant growth, green leaves
P: development of roots, stems and seeds
K: resistance against diseases and production of flowers/fruits
NPK fertilisers Fertilisers containing the three primary nutrients for plants. They contain
ammonium nitrate (NH4NO3), ammonium phosphate [(NH4)3PO4] and
potassium chloride (KCℓ).

N : P : K ratio The percentage nitrogen, phosphorous and potassium in a fertiliser.

Fractional distillation Industrial preparation of nitrogen from air.
of liquid air
Steam reforming Preparation of hydrogen from earth gas (methane)
Reaction: CH4 + H2O → 3H2 + CO
Haber process Industrial preparation of ammonia
Reaction: N2 + 3H2 ⇌ 2NH3
Iron catalyst

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 11 FS/2017

Ostwald process Industrial preparation of nitric acid

Reactions:
Catalytic oxidation of ammonia; catalyst:
Pt 4NH3 + 5O2 ⇌ 4NO + 6H2O

2NO + O2 → 2NO2
3NO2 + H2O → 2HNO3 + NO OR 4NO2 + 2H2O + O2 → 4HNO3
Contact process Industrial preparation of sulphuric acid
Reactions:
S + O2 → SO2
2SO2 + O2 → 2SO3 Contact catalyst: vanadium pentoxide (V2O5)
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
(H2S2O7: fuming sulphuric acid OR pyro sulphuric acid OR oleum)
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4
Preparation of ammonia + sulphuric acid → ammonium sulphate
ammonium sulphate
2NH3 + H2SO4 → (NH4)2SO4
Preparation of ammonia + nitric acid → ammonium nitrate
ammonium nitrate
NH3 + HNO3 → NH4NO3

Eutrophication The process by which an ecosystem, e.g. a river or dam, becomes enriched
with inorganic plant nutrients, especially phosphorus and nitrogen, resulting
in excessive plant growth. As plant growth becomes excessive, the amount
of dead and decaying plant material increases rapidly.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 12 FS/2017

QUESTIONS

ORGANIC MOLECULES: NOMENCLATURE

QUESTION 1

Consider the organic compounds represented by the letters A to F in the table below.

A 2,2,4-trimethylhexane B CH3CH2CH2CH2CHO

H H Cℓ Br H H H

H C C C C C H
C C
C H H H H D
H C H H H n

H H O H O

E O C C O C C C F Pentan-2-one

H H H n

1.1 Write down the LETTER that represents the following:

1.1.1 An aldehyde (1)

1.1.2 A condensation polymer (1)

1.1.3 A compound which has a carbonyl group bonded to two carbon atoms as
its functional group (1)

1.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:

1.2.1 Compound C (3)

1.2.2 The monomer of compound D (1)

1.3 Write down the structural formula of:

1.3.1 Compound A (2)

1.3.2 Compound F (2)

1.4 The table contains compounds which are functional isomers.

1.4.1 Define the term functional isomer. (2)

1.4.2 Write down the LETTERS that represent two compounds that are
functional isomers. (1)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 13 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

H H
H C H
A B 2-methylbutanoic acid
H C C C H

H H
H H O H H H CH3 H CH2CH3

C H C C C C C H D H C C C C H

H CH2CH3 H H H CH3 H CH2CH3

H H

E F C C
But-2-ene

H H n

2.1 Write down the:

2.1.1 NAME of the functional group of compound B (1)
2.1.2 Homologous series to which compound C belongs (1)
2.1.3 Type of polymerisation reaction that produces compound F (1)
2.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:
2.2.1 The monomer used to prepare compound F (1)
2.2.2 Compound C (2)
2.2.3 Compound D (2)
2.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of each product formed during the complete
combustion of compound D. (2)
2.4 Write down the structural formula of:
2.4.1 Compound B (2)
2.4.2 A CHAIN ISOMER of compound A (2)
2.5 A laboratory assistant uses bromine water to distinguish between compounds D
and E. She adds bromine water to a sample of each in two different test tubes. She
observes that the one compound decolourises the bromine water immediately, whilst
the other one only reacts after placing the test tube in direct sunlight. Write down the:
2.5.1 Letter (D or E) of the compound that will immediately decolourise the
bromine water (1)
2.5.2 Name of the type of reaction that takes place in the test tube containing
compound D (1)

2.5.3 Structural formula of the organic product formed in the test tube
containing compound E (2)
[18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 14 FS/2017

QUESTION 3

The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

H C H

H H O H H H H H H

A H C C C O H B H C C C C C C C H

H H H H Cℓ H H H

H C H

H
C
C4H8 D CH3CH2COCH3

H H H H H H

E CH3CH(CH3)CH2OH F H C C C C C C H

H H H H H H

Use the information in the table (where applicable) to answer the questions that follow.

3.1 Write down the LETTER that represents a compound that:

(A compound may be used more than once.)

3.1.1 Is a haloalkane (1)

3.1.2 Has a hydroxyl group as functional group (1)

3.1.3 Belongs to the same homologous series as ethanoic acid (1)

3.2 Write down the:

3.2.1 IUPAC name of compound B (3)

3.2.2 IUPAC name of compound E (2)

3.2.3 Structural formula of the functional group of compound D (1)

3.3 Compound C has CHAIN and POSITIONAL isomers.

3.3.1 Define the term positional isomer. (2)

3.3.2 Write down the IUPAC name of each of the TWO positional isomers of
compound C. (4)

3.3.3 Write down the structural formula of a chain isomer of compound C. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 15 FS/2017

3.4 Compound F reacts at high pressure and high temperature to form compounds P
and Q as given below.
H H H H H H
H H
H C C C C C C H P + C C
H H
H H H H H H
Compound F Compound Q
Write down the:
3.4.1 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
3.4.2 IUPAC name of compound Q (1)
3.4.3 Molecular formula of compound P (1)
Compound Q is the monomer of a polymer used to make plastic bags.
3.4.4 Write down the NAME and CONDENSED FORMULA of this polymer. (3)
[23]

QUESTION 4

The letters A to D in the table below represent four organic compounds.

H CH3 H H H H O H

H C C C C C C H H C C C C H
A B
H H H
CH3 H CH2CH3 H
C CH3CH2CHO D Butane

4.1 Write down the:

4.1.1 Letter that represents a ketone (1)
4.1.2 Structural formula of the functional group of compound C (1)
4.1.3 General formula of the homologous series to which compound A belongs (1)
4.1.4 IUPAC name of compound A (3)
4.1.5 IUPAC name of compound B (2)
4.2 Compound D is a gas used in cigarette lighters.
4.2.1 To which homologous series does compound D belong? (1)
4.2.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA and IUPAC NAME of a
structural isomer of compound D. (4)
4.2.3 Is the isomer in QUESTION 4.2.2 a CHAIN, POSITIONAL or
FUNCTIONAL isomer? (1)
4.3 Compound D reacts with bromine (Br2) to form 2-bromobutane.
Write down the name of the:
4.3.1 Homologous series to which 2-bromobutane belongs (1)
4.3.2 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
[16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 16 FS/2017

QUESTION 5

5.1 Consider the organic compounds represented by the letters A to C below.

A Cℓ H H

H C C C H

H H

H H H H H

H C C C C C C H

H H H Cℓ H H

B H H H H C H H

H C C C C O H H C C C H

H H H H H O H

Write down the:

5.1.1 Name of the homologous series to which compound C belongs (1)

5.1.2 IUPAC name of compound A (3)

5.1.3 Structural formula of a tertiary alcohol that is a structural isomer of

compound B (2)

5.2 An alcohol and methanoic acid are heated in the presence of concentrated sulphuric
acid to form an ester.

5.2.1 What is the role of the concentrated sulphuric acid in this reaction? (1)

5.2.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic product formed. (1)

The ester contains 6,67% hydrogen (H), 40% carbon (C) and 53,33% oxygen (O).
The molar mass of the ester is 60 g·mol-1. Use a calculation to determine its:

5.2.3 Empirical formula (5)

5.2.4 Molecular formula (3)

Write down the:

5.2.5 Structural formula of methanoic acid (1)

5.2.6 IUPAC name of the ester (2)

[19]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 17 FS/2017

QUESTION 6

Consider the organic compounds A to F below.

H H
CH3 H
A C C B H C C C C H
CH3 CH3
H CH3

C CH3CH2CH2CH2OH D 2,2-dimethylpropane

H O H H

E H C O C C C H F CH3CHC(CH3)2

H H H

6.1 Write down the LETTER that represents a compound that:

6.1.1 Has a carbonyl group (1)

6.1.2 Is an alcohol (1)

6.1.3 Is a CHAIN ISOMER of CH3(CH2)3CH3 (1)

6.2 Write down the:

6.2.1 IUPAC name of compound B (2)

6.2.2 Structural formula of compound F (2)

6.2.3 IUPAC name of a POSITIONAL isomer of compound A (3)

6.3 Compound E is formed when a carboxylic acid reacts with another

organic compound.

Write down the:

6.3.1 Homologous series to which compound E belongs (1)

6.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst used for the preparation of

compound E (1)

6.3.3 IUPAC name of compound E (2)

[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 18 FS/2017

QUESTION 7

The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

H H

H C C C H
A B Ethyl ethanoate
H
H C H

C 2,3-dibromo-3-methylpentane D Polyethene

H O H H H H O H

E H C C O C H F H C C C C O

H H H H H

7.1 Write down the LETTER that represents the following:

7.1.1 A hydrocarbon (1)

7.1.2 A functional isomer of compound F (1)

7.1.3 A compound which belongs to the same homologous series as

compound B (1)

7.1.4 A plastic (1)

7.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of EACH of the following:

7.2.1 Compound C (3)

7.2.2 The acid used to prepare compound B (2)

7.2.3 The monomer used to make compound D (2)

7.3 Compound A reacts with an unknown reactant, X, to form 2-methylpropane.

Write down the:

7.3.1 NAME of reactant X (1)

7.3.2 Type of reaction that takes place (1)

[13]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 19 FS/2017

ORGANIC MOLECULES: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

QUESTION 1

1.1 Give a reason why alkanes are saturated hydrocarbons. (1)

1.2 Write down the structural formula of:

1.2.1 The functional group of alcohols (1)

1.2.2 A tertiary alcohol that is a structural isomer of butan-1-ol (2)

1.3 Learners investigate factors that influence the boiling points of alkanes and alcohols.
In one of the investigations they determine the boiling points of the first three
alkanes.

1.3.1 Write down an investigative question for this investigation. (2)

1.3.2 Fully explain why the boiling point increases from methane to propane. (3)

1.4 The learners find that the boiling point of propan-1-ol is higher than that of propane.
Explain this observation by referring to the TYPE of INTERMOLECULAR FORCES
present in each of these compounds. (3)
[12]

QUESTION 2

Learners use compounds A to C, shown in the table below, to investigate a factor which
influences the boiling point of organic compounds.

A CH3CH2CH2CH3
B CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3
C CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3

2.1 Which ONE of the compounds (A, B or C) has the highest boiling point? (1)
2.2 For this investigation, write down the:
2.2.1 Independent variable (1)
2.2.2 Dependent variable (1)
2.3 Write down the name of the type of Van der Waals force that occurs between the
molecules of compound B. (1)
2.4 How will the vapour pressure of 2-methylpentane compare to that of compound C?
Write down only HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
The learners now compare the boiling points of compounds D and E, shown in the table below.
D CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2OH
E CH3CH2CH2COOH

2.5 How does the boiling point of compound D compare to that of compound E? Write
down HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. Fully explain the answer. (4)
[9]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 20 FS/2017

QUESTION 3

The table below shows five organic compounds represented by the letters A to E.

A CH4
B CH3CH3
C CH3CH2CH3
D CH3CH2CH2CH3
E CH3CH2OH

3.1 Is compound B SATURATED or UNSATURATED? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

Consider the boiling points of compounds A to E given in random order below and use them,
where applicable, to answer the questions that follow.

0 °C - 162 °C - 42 °C - 89 °C 78 °C

3.2 Write down the boiling point of:

3.2.1 Compound C (1)

3.2.2 Compound E (1)

3.3 Explain the difference in boiling points of compounds C and E by referring to the
TYPE of intermolecular forces present in EACH of these compounds. (3)

3.4 Does vapour pressure INCREASE or DECREASE from compounds A to D? Fully

explain the answer. (4)

3.5 How will the vapour pressure of 2-methylpropane compare to the vapour pressure of
compound D? Write down only HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
[12]

QUESTION 4

Four compounds of comparable molecular mass are used to investigate the effect of functional
groups on vapour pressure. The results obtained are shown in the table below.

VAPOUR PRESSURE
COMPOUND
(kPa at 20 °C)
A Butane 204
B Propan-2-one 24,6
C Propan-1-ol 2
D Ethanoic acid 1,6

4.1 Define the term functional group of an organic compound. (2)

4.2 Which ONE of the compounds (A, B, C or D) in the table has the:

4.2.1 Highest boiling point

(Refer to the vapour pressures in the table to give a reason for the
answer.) (2)

4.2.2 Weakest intermolecular forces (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 21 FS/2017

4.3 Refer to the type of intermolecular forces to explain the difference between the
vapour pressure of compound A and compound B. (3)

4.4 The vapour pressures of compounds C and D are much lower than those of
compounds A and B. Name the type of intermolecular force in A and B that is
responsible for this difference. (1)

4.5 Briefly explain the difference in vapour pressure between compound C and
compound D. (2)

4.6 During a combustion reaction in a closed container of adjustable volume, 8 cm 3 of

compound A (butane) reacts in excess oxygen according to the following balanced
equation:

2C4H10(g) + 13O2(g) → 8CO2(g) + 10H2O(g)

If the initial volume of the oxygen in the container was 60 cm 3, calculate the TOTAL
volume of the gases that are present in the container at the end of the reaction. All
the gases in the container are at the same temperature and pressure. (5)
[16]

QUESTION 5

5.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

5.2 What is the relationship between strength of intermolecular forces and boiling point? (1)

The relationship between strength of intermolecular forces and boiling point is investigated
using four organic compounds from different homologous series. The compounds and their
boiling points are given in the table below.

COMPOUND BOILING POINT (°C)

A Propane -42
B Propan-2-one 56
C Propan-1-ol 97
D Propanoic acid 141

5.3 Refer to the TYPE and the STRENGTH of intermolecular forces to explain the
difference in boiling points between:

5.3.1 Compounds A and B (3)

5.3.2 Compounds C and D (3)

5.4 Is compound B a GAS or a LIQUID at room temperature? (1)

[10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 22 FS/2017

QUESTION 6
The relationship between boiling point and the number of carbon atoms in straight chain
molecules of alkanes, carboxylic acids and alcohols is investigated. Curves P, Q and R are
obtained.
GRAPH OF BOILING POINT VERSUS NUMBER OF C ATOMS

500 Curve R
Curve Q
400
Boiling point (K)

Curve P

300

200

100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of C atoms

6.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)

6.2 For curve P, write down a conclusion that can be drawn from the above results. (2)
6.3 Identify the curve (P, Q or R) that represents each of the following:
6.3.1 Alkanes (1)
6.3.2 Carboxylic acids (1)
6.4 Explain the answer to QUESTION 6.3.2 by referring to the:
 Types of intermolecular forces present in alkanes, carboxylic acids and
alcohols
 Relative strengths of these intermolecular forces
 Energy needed (5)
[11]
QUESTION 7
The boiling points of three isomers are given in the table below.
ISOMERS BOILING POINT (°C)
A 2,2-dimethylpropane 9
B 2-methylbutane 28
C pentane 36
7.1 Define the term structural isomer. (2)
7.2 What type of isomers (POSITIONAL, CHAIN or FUNCTIONAL) are these three
compounds? (1)
7.3 Explain the trend in the boiling points from compound A to compound C. (3)
7.4 Which ONE of the three compounds (A, B or C) has the highest vapour pressure?
Refer to the data in the table to give a reason for the answer. (2)
7.5 Use MOLECULAR FORMULAE and write down a balanced equation for the
complete combustion of compound B. (3)
[11]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 23 FS/2017

ORGANIC MOLECULES: ORGANIC REACTIONS

QUESTION 1

The flow diagram below shows the preparation of an ester using prop-1-ene as a starting
reagent. P, Q, R and S represent different organic reactions.
P Q
Prop-1-ene Propane Haloalkane
Cℓ2
R

Propan-1-ol

Ester

1.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:

1.1.1 Q (1)

1.1.2 R (1)

1.2 For reaction P write down the:

1.2.1 Type of addition reaction (1)

1.2.2 Balanced equation using structural formulae (3)

1.3 Write down the structural formula of the haloalkane formed in reaction Q. (2)

1.4 In reaction S propan-1-ol reacts with ethanoic acid to form the ester.

For this reaction write down the:

1.4.1 Name of the reaction that takes place (1)

1.4.2 FORMULA or NAME of the catalyst needed (1)

1.4.3 Structural formula of the ester formed (2)

1.4.4 IUPAC name of the ester formed (2)

1.5 The propan-1-ol formed in reaction R can be converted to prop-1-ene. Write down
the FORMULA or NAME of the inorganic reagent needed. (1)
[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 24 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

In the flow diagram below, but-1-ene is used as starting material in the preparation of
compound A.
reaction 1
CH3 ― CH2 ― CH = CH2
H2O; H2SO4

reaction 2 HCℓ Compound A

reaction 3
Compound B

2.1 Is but-1-ene a SATURATED or UNSATURATED compound? Give a reason for the

answer. (2)
2.2 Compound A is the major product formed in reaction 1.

Write down the:

2.2.1 Structural formula of compound A (2)
2.2.2 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
2.3 For compound B, write down the:
2.3.1 IUPAC name (2)
2.3.2 Structural formula of the positional isomer (2)
2.4 For reaction 3, write down:

2.4.1 TWO reaction conditions needed (2)

2.4.2 The type of reaction that occurs (1)
2.4.3 A balanced equation, using molecular formulae (3)
[15]

QUESTION 3

Consider the incomplete equations of two reactions below.

X represents the organic product formed in reaction 1, which is a SUBSTITUTION

REACTION. In reaction 2, X reacts with reactant Y as shown.
strong base
Reaction 1: C2H5Br NaBr + X

Concentrated H2SO4
Reaction 2: X + Y C3H6O2 + H2O

3.1 Consider reaction 1. Write down the:

3.1.1 Type of substitution reaction that takes place (1)

3.1.2 TWO reaction conditions (2)

3.1.3 IUPAC name of compound X (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 25 FS/2017

3.2 Consider reaction 2. Write down the:

3.2.1 Type of reaction that takes place (1)

3.2.2 Structural formula of compound Y (2)

3.2.3 IUPAC name of the organic product (2)

[9]

QUESTION 4

4.1 The flow diagram below shows two organic reactions. The letter P represents an
organic compound.

Reaction 1
Alcohol + P Ethyl propanoate

Reaction 2

Alkene

Use the information in the flow diagram to answer the questions that follow.

Write down the:

4.1.1 Type of reaction of which Reaction 1 is an example (1)

4.1.2 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of the functional group of ethyl propanoate (1)

4.1.3 IUPAC name of compound P (1)

Reaction 2 takes place in the presence of an acid catalyst and heat.

Write down the:

4.1.4 Type of reaction of which Reaction 2 is an example (1)

4.1.5 NAME or FORMULA of the acid catalyst (1)
4.1.6 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of the alkene (2)

4.2 The condensed formula of a polymer is shown below.

H H

C C

H H
n
Write down the:
4.2.1 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of the monomer that is used to prepare the
above polymer (2)
4.2.2 Type of polymerisation reaction (ADDITION or CONDENSATION) that is
used to prepare this polymer (1)
[10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 26 FS/2017

QUESTION 5

The flow diagram below shows different organic reactions using CH 2 = CH2 as the starting
reactant. X, Y and Z represent different organic compounds.

Reaction 4 Reaction 1
C2H6 CH2 = CH2 Y

Reaction 2 + HCℓ

Reaction 3
X Z

5.1 During Reaction 1, CH2 = CH2 undergoes polymerisation to form compound Y.

For this reaction, write down the:

5.1.1 Type of polymerisation (1)

5.1.2 NAME of compound Y (1)

5.2 For Reaction 2, write down the:

5.2.1 IUPAC name of compound X (2)

5.2.2 Type of addition reaction of which this is an example (1)

5.3 During Reaction 3, compound X reacts with excess hot water.

Write down the:

5.3.1 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound Z (2)

5.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the INORGANIC product (1)

5.4 Reaction 4 is an addition reaction.

5.4.1 Is C2H6 a SATURATED or an UNSATURATED compound? Give a

reason for the answer. (2)

5.4.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the INORGANIC reactant needed
for this reaction. (1)

5.4.3 Using molecular formulae, write down a balanced equation for the
complete combustion of C2H6. (3)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 27 FS/2017

QUESTION 6

The flow diagram below shows how prop-1-ene can be used to prepare other organic
compounds.

propane

D C alcohol
compound X prop-1-ene (major product)
(major product) HBr B

F
6.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:

6.1.1 A (1)

6.1.2 D (1)

6.1.3 F (1)

6.2 Write down the:

6.2.1 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst needed for reaction A (1)

6.2.2 NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic reagent needed for reaction B (1)

6.2.3 Type of addition reaction represented by reaction C (1)

6.2.4 IUPAC name of compound X (2)

6.3 Use structural formulae to write down a balanced equation for reaction B. (5)

6.4 Both reactions D and E take place in the presence of a strong base.
State TWO conditions that will favour reaction D over reaction E. (2)
[15]

QUESTION 7

Butane (C4H10) is produced in industry by the THERMAL cracking of long-chain hydrocarbon

molecules, as shown in the equation below. X represents an organic compound that is
produced.
C10H22 → X + C4H10

7.1 Write down:

7.1.1 ONE condition required for THERMAL cracking to take place (1)

7.1.2 The molecular formula of compound X (1)

7.1.3 The homologous series to which compound X belongs (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 28 FS/2017

7.2 A mixture of the two gases, compound X and butane, is bubbled through bromine
water, Br2(aq), in a conical flask, as illustrated below. THE REACTION IS CARRIED
OUT IN A DARKENED ROOM.
Syringe
X and C4H10

Br2(aq)

The colour of the bromine water changes from reddish brown to colourless when the
mixture of the two gases is bubbled through it.

Which ONE of the gases (X or BUTANE) decolorises the bromine water? Explain the
answer. (4)

7.3 Study the flow diagram below, which represents various organic reactions, and
answer the questions that follow.

OH
I
CH3CH2CHCH3

Butane chlorination
Compound P III
C4H10

II Compound Q
concentrated (major product)
NaOH

Write down the:

7.3.1 IUPAC name of compound P (2)

7.3.2 Type of reaction labelled I (1)

7.3.3 Structural formula of compound Q (2)

7.3.4 The type of addition reaction represented by reaction III (1)

[13]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 29 FS/2017

REACTION RATE AND ENERGY IN CHEMICAL REACTIONS

QUESTION 1

1.1 Define the term reaction rate in words. (2)

Learners use the reaction between IMPURE POWDERED calcium carbonate and excess
hydrochloric acid to investigate reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
CaCO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → CaCℓ2(aq) + H2O(ℓ) + CO2(g)
They perform four experiments under different conditions of concentration, mass and
temperature as shown in the table below. They use identical apparatus in the four experiments
and measure the volume of gas released in each experiment.

EXPERIMENT
1 2 3 4
Concentration of acid (mol·dm-3) 1 0,5 1 1
Mass of impure calcium carbonate (g) 15 15 15 25
Initial temperature of acid (°C) 30 30 40 40

1.2 The results of experiments 1 and 3 are compared in the investigation.

Write down the:

1.2.1 Independent variable (1)

1.2.2 Dependent variable (1)

1.3 Use the collision theory to explain why the reaction rate in experiment 4 will be
higher than that in experiment 3. (3)

The learners obtain graphs A, B, C and D below from their results.

A
Volume CO2 (cm3)

B
C
D

Time (s)

1.4 Which ONE of the graphs (A, B, C or D) represents experiment 1? Fully explain the
answer by comparing experiment 1 with experiments 2, 3 and 4. (6)

1.5 When the reaction in experiment 4 reaches completion, the volume of gas formed is
4,5 dm3. Assume that the molar gas volume at 40 °C is equal to 25,7 dm3.

Calculate the mass of the impurities present in the calcium carbonate. (5)
[18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 30 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

A group of learners uses the reaction of EXCESS hydrochloric acid (HCℓ) with zinc (Zn) to
investigate factors which influence reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)

They use the same volume of hydrochloric acid and 1,2 g of zinc in each of five experiments.
The reaction conditions and temperature readings before and after completion of the reaction
in each experiment are summarised in the table below.

REACTION CONDITIONS
Time
Experiment Concentration of Temperature (°C) State of division
(s)
HCℓ (mol·dm-3) Before After of the 1,2 g of Zn
1 0,5 20 34 granules 50
2 0,5 20 35 powder 10
3 0,8 20 36 powder 6
4 0,5 35 50 granules 8
5 0,5 20 34 granules 11

2.1 Is the reaction between hydrochloric acid and zinc EXOTHERMIC or

ENDOTHERMIC? Give a reason for the answer by referring to the data in the table. (2)

2.2 Give a reason for the difference in reaction rate observed for Experiments 1 and 2. (1)

2.3 The learners compare the results of Experiments 1 and 3 to draw a conclusion
regarding the effect of concentration on reaction rate. Give a reason why this is not a
fair comparison. (1)

2.4 How does the rate of the reaction in Experiment 5 compare to that in Experiment
1? Write down FASTER THAN, SLOWER THAN or EQUAL TO.

Write down the factor responsible for the difference in the rate of reaction and fully
explain, by referring to the collision theory, how this factor affects reaction rate. (5)

2.5 Calculate the rate at which the hydrochloric acid reacts in Experiment 4 in mol·s-1. (6)
[15]

QUESTION 3

A group of learners uses the reaction of clean magnesium ribbon with dilute hydrochloric acid
to investigate factors that influence reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2(g) ∆H < 0

3.1 Is the above reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Give a reason for the
answer. (2)

3.2 In one of the experiments 5 g magnesium ribbon was added to the hydrochloric acid
solution.

3.2.1 If 30 cm3 dilute hydrochloric acid solution of concentration 1,5 mol∙dm-3 is

USED UP in 1 minute, calculate the average reaction rate in mol∙s -1. (5)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 31 FS/2017

The volume of hydrogen gas produced as a function of time in this experiment is

represented by graph S below. (The graph is NOT drawn to scale.)

Volume (cm3)
0 t1 t2 t3 Time (s)
3.2.2 How does the rate of the reaction change between:
(Write down INCREASES, DECREASES or NO CHANGE.)

(a) t1 and t2
Use the collision theory to explain the answer. (4)

(b) t2 and t3
Give a reason for the answer without referring to the graph. (2)

3.3 In another experiment they add 5 g of magnesium to 30 cm 3 of dilute hydrochloric

acid of concentration 1,5 mol∙dm -3. They obtained graph T below. (The graph is NOT
drawn to scale.)
Volume (cm3)

T
S

Time (s)
Give TWO possible reasons why graph T differs from graph S. (2)
[15]

QUESTION 4

Dilute acids, indicated in the table below, react with EXCESS zinc in each of the three
experiments to produce hydrogen gas. The zinc is completely covered with the acid in each
experiment.

EXPERIMENT DILUTE ACID

1 100 cm of 0,1 mol∙dm-3 H2SO4
3

2 50 cm3 of 0,2 mol∙dm-3 H2SO4

3 100 cm3 of 0,1 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ

The volume of hydrogen gas produced is measured in each experiment.

4.1 Name TWO essential apparatuses needed to determine the rate of hydrogen
production. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 32 FS/2017

The graph below was obtained for Experiment 1.

Volume (cm3)
Experiment 1

0 t1 t2 t3 Time (s)
Use this graph and answer the questions that follow.
4.2 At which time (t1, t2 or t3) is the:
4.2.1 Reaction rate the highest (1)
4.2.2 Mass of zinc present in the flask the smallest (1)
4.3 In which time interval, between t1 and t2 OR between t2 and t3, does the largest
volume of hydrogen gas form per second? (1)
4.4 Redraw the graph for Experiment 1 in the ANSWER BOOK.
On the same set of axes, sketch the graphs that will be obtained for Experiments 2
and 3. Clearly label the three graphs as EXPERIMENT 1, EXPERIMENT 2 and
EXPERIMENT 3. (4)
4.5 The initial mass of zinc used in each experiment is 0,8 g. The balanced equation for
the reaction in Experiment 3 is:
Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)
4.5.1 Calculate the mass of zinc present in the flask after completion of the
reaction in Experiment 3. (5)
4.5.2 How will the mass of zinc present in the flask after completion
of the reaction in Experiment 2 compare to the answer to
QUESTION 5.5.1? Write down only LARGER THAN, SMALLER THAN or
EQUAL TO. (1)
[15]

QUESTION 5

Methanol and hydrochloric acid react according to the following balanced equation:
CH3OH(aq) + HCℓ(aq)  CH3Cℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ)
5.1 State TWO factors that can INCREASE the rate of this reaction. (2)
5.2 Define the term reaction rate. (2)
5.3 The rate of the reaction between methanol and hydrochloric acid is investigated. The
concentration of HCℓ(aq) was measured at different time intervals. The following
results were obtained:

TIME (MINUTES) HCℓ CONCENTRATION (mol∙dm-3)

0 1,90
15 1,45
55 1,10
100 0,85
215 0,60

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 33 FS/2017

5.3.1 Calculate the average reaction rate, in (mol∙dm -3)∙min-1 during the first
15 minutes. (3)
5.3.2 Use the data in the table to draw a graph of concentration versus time on
a graph paper. (3)
5.3.3 From the graph, determine the concentration of HCℓ(aq) at the
40th minute. (1)
5.3.4 Use the collision theory to explain why the reaction rate decreases with
time. Assume that the temperature remains constant. (3)
5.3.5 Calculate the mass of CH3Cℓ(aq) in the flask at the 215th minute. The
volume of the reagents remains 60 cm3 during the reaction. (5)
[19]

QUESTION 6

The reaction between dilute hydrochloric acid and sodium thiosulphate (Na 2S2O3) is used to
investigate one of the factors that influences reaction rate. The balanced equation for the
reaction is:
Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + S(s) + H2O(ℓ) + SO2(g)
The hydrochloric acid solution is added to the sodium thiosulphate solution in a flask. The flask
is placed over a cross drawn on a sheet of white paper, as shown in the diagram below. The
time that it takes for the cross to become invisible is measured to determine the reaction rate.

flask

Na2S2O3(aq) + HCℓ(aq)

white paper

Four experiments, A to D, are conducted during this investigation. The volumes of reactants
used in each of the four experiments and the times of the reactions are summarised in the
table below.

Volume of Volume of Volume of

Experiment Time (s)
Na2S2O3(aq) (cm3) H2O(ℓ) (cm3) HCℓ(aq) (cm3)
A 25 0 5 50,0
B 20 5 5 62,5
C 15 10 5 83,3
D 10 15 5 125,0

6.1 State TWO factors that can influence the rate of the reaction above. (2)
6.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the product that causes the cross to become
invisible. (1)

6.3 Give a reason why water is added to the reaction mixture in experiments B
to D. (1)

6.4 Write down an investigative question for this investigation. (2)

6.5 In which experiment (A, B, C or D) is the reaction rate the highest? (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 34 FS/2017

6.6 Use the collision theory to explain the difference in reaction rate between
experiments B and D. (3)

6.7 The original Na2S2O3 solution was prepared by dissolving 62,50 g Na 2S2O3 crystals
in distilled water in a 250 cm 3 volumetric flask.

Calculate the mass of sulphur, S, that will form in experiment D if Na2S2O3 is the
limiting reactant. (7)
[17]

QUESTION 7

Hydrogen peroxide, H2O2, decomposes to produce water and oxygen according to the
following balanced equation:
2H2O2(ℓ) → 2H2O(ℓ) + O2(g)

7.1 The activation energy (EA) for this reaction is 75 kJ and the heat of reaction (ΔH) is –
196 kJ.

7.1.1 Define the term activation energy. (2)

7.1.2 Redraw the set of axes below in your ANSWER BOOK and then
complete the potential energy diagram for this reaction.

Indicate the value of the potential energy of the following on the

y-axis:
 Activated complex
 Products
(The graph does NOT have to be drawn to scale.)
Potential energy (kJ)

H2O2
0

Course of reaction (3)

When powdered manganese dioxide is added to the reaction mixture, the rate of the
reaction increases.

7.1.3 On the graph drawn for QUESTION 7.1.2, use broken lines to show the
path of the reaction when the manganese dioxide is added. (2)

7.1.4 Use the collision theory to explain how manganese dioxide influences the
rate of decomposition of hydrogen peroxide. (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 35 FS/2017

7.2 Graphs A and B below were obtained for the volume of oxygen produced over time
under different conditions.

60 ● ● ● ●
●
Graph A
● ●
50
Volume of oxygen gas (dm3)

● Graph B
40

●
30 ●

20
●

10

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Time (s)
7.2.1 Calculate the average rate of the reaction (in dm 3∙s-1) between
t = 10 s and t = 40 s for graph A. (3)
7.2.2 Use the information in graph A to calculate the mass of hydrogen
peroxide used in the reaction. Assume that all the hydrogen peroxide
decomposed. Use 24 dm 3·mol-1 as the molar volume of oxygen. (4)
7.2.3 How does the mass of hydrogen peroxide used to obtain graph B
compare to that used to obtain graph A? Choose from GREATER THAN,
SMALLER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
7.3 Three energy distribution curves for the oxygen gas produced under different
conditions are shown in the graph below. The curve with the solid line represents
1 mol of oxygen gas at 90 °C.
Number of molecules

Kinetic energy
Choose the curve (P or Q) that best represents EACH of the following situations:
7.3.1 1 mol of oxygen gas produced at 120 °C (1)
7.3.2 2 moles of oxygen gas produced at 90 °C (1)
[20]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 36 FS/2017

CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM
QUESTION 1

A certain amount of nitrogen dioxide gas (NO 2) is sealed in a gas syringe at 25 °C. When
equilibrium is reached, the volume occupied by the reaction mixture in the gas syringe is
80 cm3. The balanced chemical equation for the reaction taking place is:

2NO2(g) ⇌ N2O4(g) ∆H < 0

dark brown colourless

1.1 Define the term chemical equilibrium. (2)

1.2 At equilibrium the concentration of the NO 2(g) is 0,2 mol·dm-3. The equilibrium
constant for the reaction is 171 at 25 °C.

Calculate the initial number of moles of NO2(g) placed in the gas syringe. (8)

1.3 The diagram below shows the reaction mixture in the gas syringe after equilibrium is
established.

80 cm3

The pressure is now increased by decreasing the volume of the gas syringe at
constant temperature as illustrated in the diagram below.

1.3.1 IMMEDIATELY after increasing the pressure, the colour of the reaction
mixture in the gas syringe appears darker than before. Give a reason for
this observation. (1)

After a while a new equilibrium is established as illustrated below. The colour of the
reaction mixture in the gas syringe now appears lighter than the initial colour.

1.3.2 Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the colour change observed in the
gas syringe. (3)

1.4 The temperature of the reaction mixture in the gas syringe is now increased and a
new equilibrium is established. How will each of the following be affected?

1.4.1 Colour of the reaction mixture

Write down only DARKER, LIGHTER or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)

1.4.2 Value of the equilibrium constant (Kc)

Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
[16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 37 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

Pure hydrogen iodide, sealed in a 2 dm3 container at 721 K, decomposes according to the
following balanced equation:

2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g) ∆H = + 26 kJ∙mol-1

The graph below shows how reaction rate changes with time for this reversible reaction.

Reaction rate

0 5 12 15 17 20
Time (minutes)
2.1 Write down the meaning of the term reversible reaction. (1)

2.2 How does the concentration of the reactant change between the 12 th and the 15th
minute? Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or NO CHANGE. (1)

2.3 The rates of both the forward and the reverse reactions suddenly change at
t = 15 minutes.

2.3.1 Give a reason for the sudden change in reaction rate. (1)

2.3.2 Fully explain how you arrived at the answer to QUESTION 2.3.1. (3)

The equilibrium constant (Kc) for the forward reaction is 0,02 at 721 K.

2.4 At equilibrium it is found that 0,04 mol HI(g) is present in the container. Calculate the
concentration of H2(g) at equilibrium. (6)

2.5 Calculate the equilibrium constant for the reverse reaction. (1)

2.6 The temperature is now increased to 800 K. How will the value of the equilibrium
constant (Kc) for the forward reaction change? Write down only INCREASES,
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 38 FS/2017

QUESTION 3

Initially excess NH4HS(s) is placed in a 5 dm 3 container at 218 °C. The container is sealed and
the reaction is allowed to reach equilibrium according to the following balanced equation:

NH4HS(s) ⇌ NH3(g) + H2S(g) ∆H > 0

3.1 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)

3.2 What effect will each of the following changes have on the amount of NH 3(g) at
equilibrium? Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

3.2.1 More NH4HS(s) is added (1)

3.2.2 The temperature is increased (1)

3.3 The equilibrium constant for this reaction at 218 °C is 1,2 x 10 -4.
Calculate the minimum mass of NH 4HS(s) that must be sealed in the container to
obtain equilibrium. (6)

The pressure in the container is now increased by decreasing the volume of the container at
constant temperature.

3.4 How will this change affect the number of moles of H 2S(g) produced? Fully explain
the answer. (3)
[13]

QUESTION 4

An unknown gas, X2(g), is sealed in a container and allowed to form X3(g) at 300 °C. The
reaction reaches equilibrium according to the following balanced equation:

3X2(g) ⇌ 2X3(g)

4.1 How will the rate of formation of X3(g) compare to the rate of formation of X2(g) at
equilibrium? Write down only HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
The reaction mixture is analysed at regular time intervals. The results obtained are shown in
the table below.

TIME [ X2 ] [ X3 ]
(s) (mol∙dm-3) (mol∙dm-3)
0 0,4 0
2 0,22 0,120
4 0,08 0,213
6 0,06 0,226
8 0,06 0,226
10 0,06 0,226

4.2 Calculate the equilibrium constant, Kc, for this reaction at 300 °C. (4)

4.3 More X3(g) is now added to the container.

4.3.1 How will this change affect the amount of X2(g)? Write down
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)

4.3.2 Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the answer to QUESTION 4.3.1. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 39 FS/2017

The curves on the set of axes below (not drawn to scale) was obtained from the results in the
table on page 10.

Concentration (mol∙dm-3)
t1 Time (s)
4.4 How does the rate of the forward reaction compare to that of the reverse reaction at
t1? Write down only HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)

The reaction is now repeated at a temperature of 400 °C. The curves indicated by the dotted
lines below were obtained at this temperature.
Concentration (mol∙dm-3)

300 °C
400 °C

Time (s)
4.5 Is the forward reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Fully explain how you
arrived at the answer. (4)

The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curve below represents the number of particles against
kinetic energy at 300 °C.
Number of particles

300 °C

Kinetic energy

4.6 Redraw this curve in the ANSWER BOOK. On the same set of axes, sketch the
curve that will be obtained at 400 °C. Clearly label the curves as 300 °C and 400 °C
respectively. (2)
[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 40 FS/2017

QUESTION 5

Initially, 2,2 g of pure CO2(g) is sealed in an empty 5 dm 3 container at 900 °C.

5.1 Calculate the initial concentration of CO2(g). (4)

5.2 Give a reason why equilibrium will not be established. (1)

CaCO3(s) is now added to the 2,2 g CO2(g) in the container and after a while equilibrium is
established at 900 °C according to the following balanced equation:
CaCO3(s) ⇌ CaO(s) + CO2(g)
The equilibrium constant for this reaction at 900 °C is 0,0108.
5.3 Give a reason why this reaction will only reach equilibrium in a SEALED container. (1)
5.4 Calculate the minimum mass of CaCO 3(s) that must be added to the container to
achieve equilibrium. (7)

5.5 How will EACH of the following changes affect the amount of CO 2(g)? Write
down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
5.5.1 More CaCO3(s) is added at 900 °C (1)
5.5.2 The pressure is increased (1)

5.6 It is found that the equilibrium constant (Kc) for this reaction is 2,6 x 10-6 at 727 °C. Is
the reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Fully explain how you arrived at the
answer. (4)
[19]

QUESTION 6

Carbon dioxide reacts with carbon in a closed system to produce carbon monoxide, CO(g),
according to the following balanced equation:
CO2(g) + C(s) ⇌ 2CO(g) ΔH > 0

6.1 What does the double arrow indicate in the equation above? (1)
6.2 Is the above reaction an EXOTHERMIC reaction or an ENDOTHERMIC reaction?
Give a reason for the answer. (2)

Initially an unknown amount of carbon dioxide is exposed to hot carbon at 800 °C in a sealed
2 dm3 container. The equilibrium constant, Kc, for the reaction at this temperature is 14.
At equilibrium it is found that 168,00 g carbon monoxide is present.
6.3 How will the equilibrium concentration of the product compare to that of the
reactants? Choose from LARGER THAN, SMALLER THAN or EQUAL TO.

Give a reason for the answer. (No calculation is required.) (2)

6.4 Calculate the initial amount (in moles) of CO2(g) present. (9)
6.5 State how EACH of the following will affect the yield of CO(g) at equilibrium. Choose
from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
6.5.1 More carbon is added at constant temperature. (1)
6.5.2 The pressure is increased. (1)
6.5.3 The temperature is increased. (1)
[17]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 41 FS/2017

QUESTION 7

Hydrogen gas, H2(g), reacts with sulphur powder, S(s), according to the following balanced
equation:
H2(g) + S(s) ⇌ H2S(g) ∆H < 0

The system reaches equilibrium at 90 °C.

7.1 Define the term chemical equilibrium. (2)

7.2 How will EACH of the following changes affect the number of moles of H2S(g) at
equilibrium? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.

7.2.1 The addition of more sulphur (1)

7.2.2 An increase in temperature

Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the answer. (4)

7.3 The sketch graph below was obtained for the equilibrium mixture.
Reaction rate (mol∙s-1)

t1 Time (s)

A catalyst is added to the equilibrium mixture at time t1.

Redraw the graph above in your ANSWER BOOK. On the same set of axes,
complete the graph showing the effect of the catalyst on the reaction rates. (2)
Initially 0,16 mol H2(g) and excess S(s) are sealed in a 2 dm 3 container and the system is
allowed to reach equilibrium at 90 °C.

An exact amount of Pb(NO3)2 solution is now added to the container so that ALL the H2S(g)
present in the container at EQUILIBRIUM is converted to PbS(s) according to the following
balanced equation: Pb(NO3)2(aq) + H2S(g) → PbS(s) + 2HNO3(aq)

The mass of the PbS precipitate is 2,39 g.

7.4 Calculate the equilibrium constant Kc for the reaction H2(g) + S(s) ⇌ H2S(g) at
90 °C. (9)
[18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 42 FS/2017

ACIDS AND BASES

QUESTION 1

1.1 Nitric acid (HNO3), an important acid used in industry, is a strong acid.
1.1.1 Give a reason why nitric acid is classified as a strong acid. (1)
1.1.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the conjugate base of nitric acid. (1)
-3
1.1.3 Calculate the pH of a 0,3 mol∙dm nitric acid solution. (3)
1.2 A laboratory technician wants to determine the percentage purity of magnesium
oxide. He dissolves a 4,5 g sample of the magnesium oxide in 100 cm3 hydrochloric
acid of concentration 2 mol∙dm-3.
1.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of hydrochloric acid added to the
magnesium oxide. (3)
He then uses the apparatus below to titrate the EXCESS hydrochloric acid in the
above solution against a sodium hydroxide solution.

Retort stand Q

Sodium hydroxide solution

Erlenmeyer flask
Hydrochloric acid

1.2.2 Write down the name of apparatus Q in the above diagram. (1)

1.2.3 The following indicators are available for the titration:

INDICATOR pH RANGE
A 3,1 – 4,4
B 6,0 – 7,6
C 8,3 – 10,0
Which ONE of the above indicators (A, B or C) is most suitable to
indicate the exact endpoint in this titration? Give a reason for the answer. (3)
1.2.4 During the titration, the technician uses distilled water to wash any sodium
hydroxide spilled against the sides of the Erlenmeyer flask into the
solution. Give a reason why the addition of distilled water to the
Erlenmeyer flask will not influence the results. (1)
1.2.5 At the endpoint of the titration he finds that 21 cm3 of a 0,2 mol dm-3
sodium hydroxide solution has neutralised the EXCESS hydrochloric acid.
Calculate the number of moles of hydrochloric acid in excess. (3)
1.2.6 The balanced equation for the reaction between hydrochloric acid and
magnesium oxide is: MgO(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2O(ℓ)
Calculate the percentage purity of the magnesium oxide. Assume that only
the magnesium oxide in the 4,5 g sample reacted with the acid. (5)
[21]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 43 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

2.1 Sulphuric acid is a diprotic acid.

2.1.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

2.1.2 Give a reason why sulphuric acid is referred to as a diprotic acid. (1)

2.2 The hydrogen carbonate ion can act as both an acid and a base. It reacts with water
according to the following balanced equation:

HCO 3 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H2CO3(aq) + OH-(aq)

2.2.1 Write down ONE word for the underlined phrase. (1)

2.2.2 HCO 3 (aq) acts as base in the above reaction. Write down the formula of
the conjugate acid of HCO 3 (aq). (1)

2.3 A learner accidentally spills some sulphuric acid of concentration 6 mol∙dm -3 from a
flask on the laboratory bench. Her teacher tells her to neutralise the spilled acid by
sprinkling sodium hydrogen carbonate powder onto it. The reaction that takes place
is: (Assume that the H2SO4 ionises completely.)
H2SO4(aq) + 2NaHCO3(s) → Na2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ) + 2CO2(g)
The fizzing, due to the formation of carbon dioxide, stops after the learner has added
27 g sodium hydrogen carbonate to the spilled acid.

2.3.1 Calculate the volume of sulphuric acid that spilled. Assume that all the
sodium hydrogen carbonate reacts with all the acid. (6)

The learner now dilutes some of the 6 mol∙dm-3 sulphuric acid solution in the flask to
0,1 mol∙dm-3.

2.3.2 Calculate the volume of the 6 mol∙dm-3 sulphuric acid solution needed to
prepare 1 dm3 of the dilute acid. (2)

During a titration 25 cm 3 of the 0,1 mol∙dm -3 sulphuric acid solution is added to an

Erlenmeyer flask and titrated with a 0,1 mol∙dm-3 sodium hydroxide solution.

2.3.3 The learner uses bromothymol blue as indicator. What is the purpose of
this indicator? (1)

2.3.4 Calculate the pH of the solution in the flask after the addition of 30 cm3 of
sodium hydroxide. The endpoint of the titration is not yet reached at this
point. (8)
[22]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 44 FS/2017

QUESTION 3

Anhydrous oxalic acid is an example of an acid that can donate two protons and thus ionises in
two steps as represented by the equations below:

I: (COOH)2(aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + H(COO) 2 (aq)

II: H(COO) 2 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + (COO) 22  (aq)

3.1 Write down:

3.1.1 ONE word for the underlined phrase in the above sentence (1)

3.1.2 The FORMULA of each of the TWO bases in reaction II (2)

3.1.3 The FORMULA of the substance that acts as ampholyte in reactions I

and II. Give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.2 Give a reason why oxalic acid is a weak acid. (1)

3.3 A standard solution of (COOH)2 of concentration 0,20 mol∙dm-3 is prepared by

dissolving a certain amount of (COOH)2 in water in a 250 cm3 volumetric flask.

Calculate the mass of (COOH)2 needed to prepare the standard solution. (4)

3.4 During a titration 25 cm 3 of the standard solution of (COOH)2 prepared in QUESTION

7.3 is neutralised by a sodium hydroxide solution from a burette.
The balanced equation for the reaction is:
(COOH)2(aq) + 2NaOH(aq) (COONa)2(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)

The diagrams below show the burette readings before the titration commenced and
at the endpoint respectively.
Before the titration At the endpoint

cm3 cm3

2 38

Level of Level of
NaOH(aq) NaOH(aq)
3 39

3.4.1 Use the burette readings and calculate the concentration of the sodium
hydroxide solution. (5)

3.4.2 Write down a balanced equation that explains why the solution has a pH
greater than 7 at the endpoint. (3)
[18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 45 FS/2017

QUESTION 4

4.1 Ammonium chloride crystals, NH4Cℓ(s), dissolve in water to form ammonium and
chloride ions. The ammonium ions react with water according to the balanced
equation below:
NH 4 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ NH3(aq) + H3O+(aq)

4.1.1 Write down the name of the process described by the underlined
sentence. (1)

4.1.2 Is ammonium chloride ACIDIC or BASIC in aqueous solution? Give a

reason for the answer. (2)
4.2 A certain fertiliser consists of 92% ammonium chloride. A sample of mass x g of this
fertiliser is dissolved in 100 cm 3 of a 0,10 mol∙dm -3 sodium hydroxide solution,
NaOH(aq). The NaOH is in excess. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
NH4Cℓ(s) + NaOH(aq)  NH3(g) + H2O(ℓ) + NaCℓ(aq)
4.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of sodium hydroxide in which the sample
is dissolved. (3)

During a titration, 25 cm 3 of the excess sodium hydroxide solution is titrated with a

0,11 mol∙dm-3 hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq). At the endpoint it is found that
14,55 cm3 of the hydrochloric acid was used to neutralise the sodium hydroxide
solution according to the following balanced equation:

HCℓ(aq) + NaOH(aq)  NaCℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ)

4.2.2 Calculate the mass x (in grams) of the fertiliser sample used. (8)
4.3 Calculate the pH of a 0,5 moldm-3 sodium hydroxide solution at 25 °C. (4)
[18]

QUESTION 5

5.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

5.2 Carbonated water is an aqueous solution of carbonic acid, H 2CO3. H2CO3(aq)
ionises in two steps when it dissolves in water.

5.2.1 Write down the FORMULA of the conjugate base of H2CO3(aq). (1)
5.2.2 Write down a balanced equation for the first step in the ionisation of
carbonic acid. (3)
5.2.3 The pH of a carbonic acid solution at 25 °C is 3,4. Calculate the
hydroxide ion concentration in the solution. (5)
5.3 X is a monoprotic acid.

5.3.1 State the meaning of the term monoprotic. (1)

5.3.2 A sample of acid X is titrated with a standard sodium hydroxide solution
using a suitable indicator. At the endpoint it is found that 25 cm3 of acid X
is neutralised by 27,5 cm3 of the sodium hydroxide solution of
concentration 0,1 mol∙dm-3. Calculate the concentration of acid X. (5)
5.3.3 The concentration of H3O+ ions in the sample of acid X is
2,4 x 10-4 mol∙dm-3. Is acid X a WEAK or a STRONG acid? Explain the
answer by referring to the answer in QUESTION 5.3.2. (3)
[20]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 46 FS/2017

QUESTION 6

6.1 Hydrogen carbonate ions react with water according to the following balanced
equation:
HCO 3 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H2CO3(aq) + OH  (aq)

6.1.1 Define an acid according to the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

6.1.2 Write down the FORMULAE of the two acids in the equation above. (2)

6.1.3 Write down the formula of a substance in the reaction above that can act
as an ampholyte. (1)

6.2 During an experiment 0,50 dm 3 of a 0,10 mol∙dm -3 HCℓ solution is added to 0,80 dm3
of a NaHCO3 solution of concentration 0,25 mol∙dm-3. The balanced equation for the
reaction is:
NaHCO3(aq) + HCℓ(aq) → NaCℓ(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ)

Calculate the:

6.2.1 Concentration of the hydroxide ions in the solution on completion of the

reaction (8)

6.2.2 pH of the solution on completion of the reaction (4)

[17]

QUESTION 7

7.1 A learner dissolves ammonium chloride (NH 4Cℓ) crystals in water and measures the
pH of the solution.

7.1.1 Define the term hydrolysis of a salt. (2)

7.1.2 Will the pH of the solution be GREATER THAN, SMALLER THAN or

EQUAL TO 7? Write a relevant equation to support your answer. (3)

7.2 A sulphuric acid solution is prepared by dissolving 7,35 g of H 2SO4(ℓ) in 500 cm3 of
water.

7.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of H2SO4 present in this solution. (2)

Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) pellets are added to the 500 cm 3 H2SO4 solution.
The balanced equation for the reaction is:

H2SO4(aq) + 2NaOH(s) → Na2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)

After completion of the reaction, the pH of the solution was found to be 1,3. Assume
complete ionisation of H2SO4.

7.2.2 Calculate the mass of NaOH added to the H 2SO4 solution. Assume that
the volume of the solution does not change. (9)
[16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 47 FS/2017

GALVANIC CELLS
QUESTION 1

A standard electrochemical cell is set up using a standard hydrogen half-cell and a standard
X|X2+ half-cell as shown below. A voltmeter connected across the cell, initially registers 0,31 V.

V
+

Hydrogen gas _
Q

Platinum
1 mol·dm-3 H+(aq) X2 (aq)

1.1 Besides concentration write down TWO conditions needed for the hydrogen half-cell
to function under standard conditions. (2)

1.2 Give TWO reasons, besides being a solid, why platinum is suitable to be used as
electrode in the above cell. (2)

1.3 Write down the:

1.3.1 NAME of component Q (1)

1.3.2 Standard reduction potential of the X|X2+ half-cell (1)

1.3.3 Half-reaction that takes place at the cathode of this cell (2)

1.4 The hydrogen half-cell is now replaced by a M|M2+ half-cell. The cell notation of this
cell is:
M(s) | M2+(aq) || X2+(aq) | X(s)

The initial reading on the voltmeter is now 2,05 V.

1.4.1 Identify metal M. Show how you arrived at the answer. (5)

1.4.2 Is the cell reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? (1)

1.5 The reading on the voltmeter becomes zero after using this cell for several hours.
Give a reason for this reading by referring to the cell reaction. (1)
[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 48 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

A learner conducts two experiments to investigate the reaction between copper (Cu) and a
silver nitrate solution, AgNO3(aq).

EXPERIMENT 1

The learner adds a small amount of copper (Cu) powder to a test tube containing silver nitrate
solution, AgNO3(aq). The solution changes from colourless to blue after a while.

Before addition of Cu(s) After addition of Cu(s)

Colourless AgNO3(aq) Blue Cu(NO3)2(aq)

2.1 Define the term oxidising agent. (2)

2.2 Explain why the solution turns blue by referring to the relative strength of oxidising
agents. (4)

EXPERIMENT 2

The learner now sets up a galvanic cell as shown below. The cell functions under standard
conditions.

A B
Cu(s) Ag(s)

Cu2+(aq) Ag+(aq)

2.3 Write down the energy conversion that takes place in this cell. (1)

2.4 In which direction (A or B) will ANIONS move in the salt bridge? (1)

2.5 Calculate the emf of the above cell under standard conditions. (4)

2.6 Write down the balanced equation for the net cell reaction that takes place in this
cell. (3)

2.7 How will the addition of 100 cm 3 of a 1 mol  dm-3 silver nitrate solution to the silver
half-cell influence the initial emf of this cell? Write down only INCREASES,
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
[16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 49 FS/2017

QUESTION 3

Learners set up an electrochemical cell, shown in the simplified diagram below, using
magnesium and lead as electrodes. Nitrate solutions are used as electrolytes in both half-cells.

String dipped in
KNO3(aq)
+
Electrode P Electrode Q

Electrolyte Electrolyte

Half-cell A Half-cell B

3.1 What type of reaction (NEUTRALISATION, REDOX or PRECIPITATION) takes place

in this cell? (1)

3.2 Which electrode, P or Q, is magnesium? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.3 Write down the:

3.3.1 Standard conditions under which this cell functions (2)

3.3.2 Cell notation for this cell (3)

3.3.3 NAME or FORMULA of the oxidising agent in the cell (1)

3.4 Calculate the initial emf of the cell above under standard conditions. (4)

3.5 How will the voltmeter reading change if the:

(Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.)

3.5.1 Size of electrode P is increased (1)

3.5.2 Initial concentration of the electrolyte in half-cell B is increased (1)

[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 50 FS/2017

QUESTION 4

Learners are given the following two unknown half-cells:

Half-cell 1: Q2+ (aq) | Q(s)

Half-cell 2: Pt | R2(g) | R-(aq)

During an investigation to identify the two half-cells, the learners connect each half-cell
alternately to a Cd2+(aq) | Cd(s) half-cell under standard conditions. For each
combination of two half-cells, they write down the net cell reaction and measure the cell
potential. The results obtained for the two half-cell combinations are given in the table below.

COMBINATION NET CELL REACTION CELL POTENTIAL

2+ 2+
I Q (aq) + Cd(s) → Cd (aq) + Q(s) 0,13 V
2+ -
II R2(g) + Cd(s) → Cd (aq) + 2R (aq) 1,76 V

4.1 Write down THREE conditions needed for these cells to function as standard cells. (3)
4.2 For Combination I, identify:
4.2.1 The anode of the cell (1)
4.2.2 Q by using a calculation (5)
4.3 For Combination II, write down the:
4.3.1 Oxidation half-reaction (2)
4.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the metal used in the cathode compartment (1)
4.4 Arrange the following species in order of INCREASING oxidising ability:
Q2+ ; R2 ; Cd2+
Explain fully how you arrived at the answer. A calculation is NOT required. (4)
[16]

QUESTION 5

An electrochemical cell consisting of half-cells A and B is assembled under standard

conditions as shown below.

Half-cell A Pt, Cℓ2 (101,3 kPa) | Cℓ- (1 mol∙dm-3)

Half-cell B Mg2+ (1 mol∙dm-3) | Mg(s)

5.1 At which half-cell, A or B, are electrons released into the external circuit? (1)
5.2 Write down the:
5.2.1 Reduction half-reaction that takes place in this cell (2)
5.2.2 NAME or FORMULA of the substance whose oxidation number
DECREASES (1)
5.3 Calculate the initial cell potential of this cell when it is in operation. (4)
5.4 Write down an observation that will be made in half-cell B as the cell operates. Give
a reason for the answer. (2)
[10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 51 FS/2017

QUESTION 6

Magnesium (Mg) reacts with a dilute hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq), according to the
following balanced equation:

Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)

6.1 Give a reason why the reaction above is a redox reaction. (1)

6.2 Write down the FORMULA of the oxidising agent in the reaction above. (1)

It is found that silver does not react with the hydrochloric acid solution.

6.3 Refer to the relative strengths of reducing agents to explain this observation. (3)

The reaction of magnesium with hydrochloric acid is used in an electrochemical cell, as shown
in the diagram below. The cell functions under standard conditions.

hydrogen gas Q

Mg

platinum
1 mol·dm-3 H+(aq) Mg 2 (aq)

half-cell A half-cell B

6.4 What is the function of platinum in the cell above? (1)

6.5 Write down the:

6.5.1 Energy conversion that takes place in this cell (1)

6.5.2 Function of Q (1)
6.5.3 Half-reaction that takes place at the cathode (2)
6.5.4 Cell notation of this cell (3)

6.6 Calculate the initial emf of this cell. (4)

6.7 How will the addition of concentrated acid to half-cell A influence the answer to
QUESTION 6.6? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE
SAME. (1)
[18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 52 FS/2017

QUESTION 7

7.1 A nickel (Ni) rod is placed in a beaker containing a silver nitrate solution, AgNO 3(aq)
and a reaction takes place.

Nickel (Ni) rod

AgNO3(aq)

Write down the:

7.1.1 NAME or FORMULA of the electrolyte (1)

7.1.2 Oxidation half-reaction that takes place (2)

7.1.3 Balanced equation for the net (overall) redox reaction that takes place (3)

7.2 A galvanic cell is now set up using a nickel half-cell and a silver half-cell.

Ag Ni

Ag+(aq) Ni2+(aq)

7.2.1 Which electrode (Ni or Ag) must be connected to the negative terminal of
the voltmeter? Give a reason for the answer. (2)

7.2.2 Write down the cell notation for the galvanic cell above. (3)

7.2.3 Calculate the initial reading on the voltmeter if the cell functions under
standard conditions. (4)

7.2.4 How will the voltmeter reading in QUESTION 7.2.3 be affected if the
concentration of the silver ions is increased? Choose from INCREASES,
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
[16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 53 FS/2017

ELECTROLYTIC CELLS
QUESTION 1

The simplified diagrams below represent two electrochemical cells, A and B.

A concentrated copper(II) chloride solution is used as electrolyte in both cells.

ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL A ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL B

P Q R T
Carbon Carbon

Copper Copper

Concentrated CuCℓ2(aq) Concentrated CuCℓ2(aq)

1.1 Are A and B ELECTROLYTIC or GALVANIC cells? (1)

1.2 Which of the electrodes (P, Q, R or T) will show a mass increase? Write down a half-
reaction to motivate the answer. (4)

1.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the product formed at:

1.3.1 Electrode P (1)

1.3.2 Electrode R (1)

1.4 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 1.3.2 by referring to the relative strengths of
the reducing agents involved. (3)
[10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 54 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

The apparatus below is used to demonstrate the electrolysis of a concentrated sodium chloride
solution. Both electrodes are made of carbon. A few drops of universal indicator are added to
the electrolyte. The equation for the net cell reaction is:
2NaCℓ(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ) → Cℓ2(g) + H2(g) + 2NaOH(aq)

Power
source

Electrode Y Electrode X

NaCℓ(aq) and universal

indicator

Initially the solution has a green colour. Universal indicator becomes red in acidic solutions and
purple in alkaline solutions.

2.1 Define the term electrolyte. (2)

When the power source is switched on, the colour of the electrolyte around electrode Y
changes from green to purple.

2.2 Write down the:

2.2.1 Half-reaction that takes place at electrode Y (2)

2.2.2 NAME or FORMULA of the gas released at electrode X (1)

2.3 Refer to the Table of Standard Reduction Potentials to explain why hydrogen gas,
and not sodium, is formed at the cathode of this cell. (2)
[7]

QUESTION 3

The diagram below shows a simplified electrolytic cell that can be used to electroplate a plastic
ring with nickel. Prior to electroplating the ring is covered with a graphite layer.
Battery

Plastic ring coated Nickel electrode

with graphite
NiSO4(aq)

3.1 Define the term electrolyte. (2)

3.2 Give ONE reason why the plastic ring must be coated with graphite prior to
electroplating. (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 55 FS/2017

3.3 Write down the:

3.3.1 Half-reaction that occurs at the plastic ring (2)

3.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the reducing agent in the cell.

Give a reason for the answer. (2)

3.4 Which electrode, the RING or NICKEL, is the cathode? Give a reason for the
answer. (2)

The nickel electrode is now replaced with a carbon rod.

3.5 How will the concentration of the electrolyte change during electroplating? Write
down only INCREASES, DECREASES or NO CHANGE. Give a reason for the
answer. (2)
[11]

QUESTION 4

The simplified diagram below represents an electrochemical cell used for the purification of
copper.
DC source

Electrode A
Electrode B
(impure copper)
Electrolyte

4.1 Define the term electrolysis. (2)

4.2 Give a reason why a direct-current (DC) source is used in this experiment. (1)

4.3 Write down the half-reaction which takes place at electrode A. (2)

4.4 Due to small amounts of zinc impurities in the impure copper, the electrolyte
becomes contaminated with Zn2+ ions.

Refer to the attached Table of Standard Reduction Potentials to explain why the
Zn2+ ions will not influence the purity of the copper obtained during this process. (3)

4.5 After the purification of the impure copper was completed, it was found that
2,85 x 10-2 moles of copper were formed.

The initial mass of electrode B was 2,0 g. Calculate the percentage of copper that
was initially present in electrode B. (4)
[12]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 56 FS/2017

QUESTION 5

The electrochemical cell below is set up to demonstrate the purification of copper.

B A

Copper(II) chloride
solution

5.1 Write down the type of electrochemical cell illustrated above. (1)

The graphs below show the change in mass of the electrodes whilst the cell is in operation.

P
Mass (g)

Time (min.)

5.2 Define a reducing agent in terms of electron transfer. (2)

5.3 Which graph represents the change in mass of electrode A? (1)

5.4 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at electrode A. (2)

5.5 Electrodes A and B are now replaced by graphite electrodes. It is observed that
chlorine gas (Cℓ2) is released at one of the electrodes.

At which electrode (A or B) is chlorine gas formed? Fully explain how it is formed. (3)
[9]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 57 FS/2017

QUESTION 6
The diagram below shows an electrochemical cell used to purify copper. A solution that
conducts electricity is used in the cell.

A B

6.1 Write down:

6.1.1 ONE word for the underlined phrase above the diagram (1)
6.1.2 The type of electrochemical cell illustrated above (1)
6.2 In which direction (from A to B or from B to A) will electrons flow in the external
circuit? (1)
6.3 Which electrode (A or B) is the:
6.3.1 Cathode (1)
6.3.2 Impure copper (1)
6.4 How will the mass of electrode A change as the reaction proceeds? Choose from
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. Give a reason for the answer. (2)
[7]

QUESTION 7
In the electrochemical cell below, carbon electrodes are used during the electrolysis of a
concentrated sodium chloride solution.
Gas X Gas Y

Electrode P Electrode Q
Concentrated NaCℓ(aq)

The balanced equation for the net (overall) cell reaction is:
2H2O(ℓ) + 2Cℓ ─(aq) → Cℓ2(g) + H2(g) + 2OH─(aq)
7.1 Is the reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? (1)
7.2 Is electrode P the ANODE or the CATHODE? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
7.3 Write down the:
7.3.1 NAME or FORMULA of gas X (1)
7.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of gas Y (1)
7.3.3 Reduction half-reaction (2)
7.4 Is the solution in the cell ACIDIC or ALKALINE (BASIC) after completion of the
reaction? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
[9]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 58 FS/2017

FERTILISERS
QUESTION 1

1.1 The flow diagram below shows the processes involved in the industrial preparation of
fertiliser Q.
Haber Ostwald
Reactants Product A Main product B
process process

Fertiliser Q

Write down the:

1.1.1 NAMES or FORMULAE of the reactants used in the Haber process (2)
1.1.2 Balanced equation for the formation of fertiliser Q (3)

1.2 The diagram below shows a bag of NPK fertiliser.

3–1–5
(36)
20 kg

Calculate the mass of nitrogen in the bag. (4)

[9]

QUESTION 2

Reactions A, B, C and D in the flow diagram below represent the manufacturing of Fertiliser X.

SO2(g)

A B C D
SO3(g) H2S2O7(ℓ) H2SO4(ℓ) Fertiliser X

O2(g)

2.1 Write down the name of the industrial preparation of sulphuric acid. (1)
2.2 Write down the:
2.2.1 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst used in reaction A (1)
2.2.2 Balanced equation for reaction C (3)
2.3 Ammonia is one of the reactants used in reaction D to make Fertiliser X.
Write down:
2.3.1 A balanced equation for reaction D (3)
2.3.2 The NAME of Fertiliser X (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 59 FS/2017

2.4 Two 50 kg bags, containing fertilisers P and Q respectively, are labelled as follows:
Fertiliser P: 5 : 2 : 3 (25)
Fertiliser Q: 1 : 3 : 4 (20)
2.4.1 What do the numbers (25) and (20) on the labels represent? (1)
2.4.2 Using calculations, determine which fertiliser (P or Q) contains the
greater mass of potassium. (4)
[14]

QUESTION 3

The industrial process for the preparation of sulphuric acid involves a series of stages.

The second stage in this process involves the conversion of sulphur dioxide into sulphur
trioxide in a converter as illustrated below. In the converter the gases are passed over
vanadium pentoxide (V2O5) placed in layers as shown below.

Sulphur dioxide V2O5

and air layer 1
V2O5
layer 2
V2O5
layer 3
Converter
V2O5
layer 4

Gas outlet
3.1 Write down the:
3.1.1 Balanced equation for the reaction taking place in the converter (3)
3.1.2 Function of the vanadium pentoxide (1)
The table below shows data obtained during the second stage.

PERCENTAGE OF
VANADIUM TEMPERATURE OF TEMPERATURE OF
REACTANT
PENTOXIDE GAS BEFORE THE GAS AFTER THE
CONVERTED TO
LAYER REACTION (°C) REACTION (°C)
PRODUCT
1 450 600 66
2 450 518 85
3 450 475 93
4 450 460 99,5

3.2 Is the reaction in the second stage EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Refer to the
data in the table to give a reason for the answer. (2)
3.3 After the conversion at each layer the gases are cooled down to 450 °C. Fully
explain why the gases must be cooled to this temperature. (3)
3.4 During the third stage sulphur trioxide is dissolved in sulphuric acid rather than in
water to produce oleum.
3.4.1 Write down the FORMULA of oleum. (1)
3.4.2 Give a reason why sulphur trioxide is not dissolved in water. (1)
3.5 Sulphuric acid reacts with ammonia to form a fertiliser. Write down a balanced
equation for this reaction. (3)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 60 FS/2017

QUESTION 4

Ammonia is an important fertiliser. Large amounts are prepared from hydrogen and nitrogen in
industry.

4.1 For the industrial preparation of ammonia, write down:

4.1.1 The name of the process used (1)
4.1.2 A balanced equation for the reaction that occurs (3)
4.1.3 The source of nitrogen (1)

4.2 The yield of ammonia changes with temperature and pressure during its industrial
preparation. The graphs below show how the percentage of ammonia in the reaction
mixture that leaves the reaction vessel varies under different conditions.

GRAPHS OF THE PERCENTAGE OF AMMONIA IN THE

REACTION MIXTURE VERSUS PRESSURE

300 °C
Percentage

400 °C

500 °C

Pressure (atmosphere)

4.2.1 Use the appropriate graph to estimate the percentage of ammonia

present in the reaction mixture at 240 atmosphere and 400 °C. (1)
4.2.2 State TWO advantages of using high pressure in the preparation of
ammonia. (2)
4.2.3 The advantage of using a low temperature is the large percentage of
ammonia formed. What is the disadvantage of using a low temperature? (1)

4.3 Ammonia is also used in the preparation of other fertilisers such as ammonium
nitrate. Calculate the mass of nitrogen in a 50 kg bag of pure ammonium nitrate
fertiliser. (3)
[12]

QUESTION 5

Ammonium nitrate is an important fertiliser. It is produced by reacting nitric acid with ammonia.
Both nitric acid and ammonia are prepared on a large scale in industry.
5.1 Write down the name of the industrial preparation of nitric acid. (1)
5.2 The catalytic oxidation of ammonia is one of the steps in the process named in
QUESTION 5.1. Write down the NAMES or FORMULAE of the TWO products
formed in this step. (2)
5.3 Write down a balanced equation for the preparation of ammonium nitrate. (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 61 FS/2017

5.4 Calculate the mass, in kilogram, of ammonium nitrate that can be made from
6,8 x 104 kg of ammonia and excess nitric acid.
(One mole of ammonia produces one mole of ammonium nitrate.) (3)

5.5 Ammonium nitrate is often mixed with potassium chloride and ammonium phosphate.
Give a reason why it is mixed with these compounds. (1)
[10]

QUESTION 6

A chemical company produces ammonium sulphate, (NH 4)2SO4, starting from the raw
materials P, Q and R, as shown in the flow diagram below.

P Q R

SO2(g)

nitrogen hydrogen
SO3(g)

reaction 1
process 1
oleum

compound X compound Y

(NH4)2SO4

6.1 Write down the NAME of raw material:

6.1.1 P (1)
6.1.2 Q (1)
6.1.3 R (1)
6.2 Write down the:
6.2.1 NAME of process 1 (1)
6.2.2 NAME of compound X (1)
6.2.3 FORMULA of compound Y (1)
6.2.4 Balanced equation for reaction 1 (3)
6.3 The company compares the nitrogen content of ammonium sulphate with that of
ammonium nitrate, NH4NO3.
6.3.1 Determine, by performing the necessary calculations, which ONE of the
two fertilisers has the higher percentage of nitrogen per mass. (4)
6.3.2 Write down the name of the process that should be included in the flow
diagram above if the company wants to prepare ammonium nitrate instead
of ammonium sulphate. (1)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 62 FS/2017

QUESTION 7

7.1 The flow diagram below shows the processes involved in the industrial preparation of
fertiliser Q.

Process Y
N2(g) + H2(g) Gas P SO2(g) + O2(g)
V2O5

H2SO4(ℓ)

Process X Compound B

H2O(ℓ)

Compound A Compound C

Fertiliser Q

Write down the:

7.1.1 Name of process X (1)

7.1.2 Name of process Y (1)

7.1.3 NAME or FORMULA of gas P (1)

7.1.4 Balanced equation for the formation of compound B (3)

7.1.5 Balanced equation for the formation of fertiliser Q (4)

7.2 The diagram below shows a bag of NPK fertiliser of which the NPK ratio is unknown.
It is found that the mass of nitrogen in the bag is 4,11 kg and the mass of
phosphorus is 0,51 kg.

x – y – z (36)

20 kg

Calculate the NPK ratio of the fertiliser. (4)

[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 63 FS/2017

ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS

ORGANIC MOLECULES: NOMENCLATURE

QUESTION 1

2.1
2.1.1 B (1)
2.1.2 E (1)

2.1.3 F (1)

2.2
2.2.1 2-bromo-3-chloro-4-methylpentane
Marking criteria:
 Correct stem i.e. pentane. 
 All substituents correctly identified. 
 Substituents correctly numbered, in alphabetical order, hyphens and commas correctly
used.  (3)

2.2.2 Ethene  (1)

H
2.3 Marking criteria:
2.3.1
H C H  Six saturated C atoms in longest
chain i.e. hexane. .
 Three methyl substituents on 2nd C
H H H H H and 4th C atom. 

H C C C C C C H

H H H H

H C H H C H

H H (2)

H  H
2.3.2 H H Marking criteria:
O  Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C C H  Only functional group correct: 

H H H H (2)

2.4
2.4.1 Compounds with the same molecular formula  but DIFFERENT functional goups.  (2)

2.4.2 B&F (1)

[14]

QUESTION 2

2.1
2.1.1 Carboxyl group  (1)

2.1.2 Ketones  (1)

2.1.3 Addition  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 64 FS/2017

2.2
2.2.1 Ethene  (1)

2.2.2 4-methylhexan-3-one  (2)

2.2.3 4-ethyl-2,2-dimethylhexane  (2)

2.3 Carbon dioxide / CO2 

Water / H2O  (2)

2.4
2.4.1 H
H C H

H H O

H C C C C O H 

H H H (2)

2.4.2 H H H H H

H C C C C H OR H C C C C
H H H H H H H H (2)

2.5
2.5.1 E (1)

2.5.2 Substitution / halogenation / bromination  (1)

2.5.3 H Br Br H


H C C C C H

H H H H (2)
[18]

QUESTION 3

3.1
3.1.1 B (1)

3.1.2 E (1)

3.1.3 A (1)
3.2
3.2.1 4-chloro-2,5-dimethylheptane
Marking criteria:
 Correct stem i.e. heptane. 
 All substituents (chloro and dimethyl) correctly identified. Substituents correctly
numbered, in alphabetical order, hyphens and commas correctly used. 
(3)

3.2.2 2-methylpropan-1-ol  (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 65 FS/2017

3.2.3 O

C C C
(1)

3.3
3.3.1 Compounds with the same molecular formula but different POSITIONS of the
functional group / side chain / substituents on parent chain.  (2)

3.3.2 But-1-ene  AND But-2-ene  (4)

KKH
3.3.3 H Marking criteria:
 Whole structure correct: 
H C H H  Only functional group correct: 
 
H C C C H

H H (2)

3.4
3.4.1 Cracking / elimination  (1)

3.4.2 Ethene  (1)

3.4.3 C4H10  (1)

3.4.4 Polyethene  
H H
C C
H H n (3)
[23]

QUESTION 4

4.1
4.1.1 B (1)

4.1.2 O

C H  (1)

4.1.3 CnH2n-2  (1)

4.1.4 4-ethyl-5-methylhept-2-yne Marking criteria:

OR  4-ethyl 
4-ethyl-5-methyl-2-heptyne  5-methyl 
 hept-2-yne / 2-heptyne  (3)

4.1.5 Butan-2-one / 2-butanone / butanone

Marking criteria:
 Functional group 
 Whole name correct  (2)

4.2
4.2.1 Alkanes  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 66 FS/2017

4.2.2 2-methylpropane  OR methylpropane 

H
Marking criteria structural formula:
H C H  Three carbons in longest chain. 
H H  Methyl group on second carbon. 

H C C C H 
H H H (4)

4.2.3 Chain  (1)

4.3
4.3.1 Haloalkanes / Alkyl halides  (1)

4.3.2 Substitution / halogenation / bromonation  (1)

[16]

QUESTION 5

5.1
5.1.1 Ketones  (1)

5.1.2 3,5-dichloro-4-methyloctane  Marking criteria

• 3,5-dichloro 
• -4-methyl 
• octane  (3)

5.1.3 H Marking criteria

 Functional group (-OH) on second C
H C H atom. 
H H  Whole structure correct 

H C C C H
H O H
H (2)

5.2
5.2.1 Acts as catalyst. / Increases the rate of reaction. / Act as dehydrating agent.  (1)

5.2.2 Water / H2O (1)

5.2.3

(5)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 67 FS/2017

5.2.4

(3)

5.2.5 O

H C H (1)

5.2.6 Methyl methanoate  (2)

[19]

QUESTION 6

6.1
6.1.1 E (1)

6.1.2 C (1)

6.1.3 D (1)

6.2
6.2.1 Pent-2-yne OR 2-pentyne (2)

6.2.2 H H Marking criteria:

  Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C H  Only functional group correct: 

H H H
H C H
H (2)

6.2.3 2-methylbut-1-ene OR 3-methylbut-1-ene

Marking criteria:
 Correct stem i.e. but-1-ene/1-butene. 
 Only one type of substituent, methyl, correctly identified. 
 Entire name correct.  (3)

6.3
6.3.1 Esters  (1)

6.3.2 Sulphuric acid / H2SO4  (1)

6.3.3 Methyl propanoate  (2)

[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 68 FS/2017

QUESTION 7

7.1
7.1.1 A OR D  (1)

7.1.2 B (1)

7.1.3 E (1)

7.1.4 D (1)

7.2
7.2.1 H Marking criteria:
 Five C atoms in longest chain. 
H C H  Two Br and one methyl substituents. 
H H H H  Whole structure correct. 

H C C C C C H

H H Br Br H (3)

7.2.2 Marking criteria:

H O
 Whole structure correct: 

H C C O H   Only functional group correct: 

H
(2)

7.2.3 H H Marking criteria:

 Whole structure correct: 
  Only functional group correct: 
C C 

H H (2)

7.3
7.3.1 Hydrogen gas  (1)

7.3.2 Addition / Hydrogenation  (1)

[13]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 69 FS/2017

ORGANIC MOLECULES: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

QUESTION 1

1.1  Alkanes have ONLY single bonds. 

OR
 Alkanes have single bonds between C atoms.
OR
 Alkanes have no double OR triple bonds OR multiple bonds. (1)
1.2
1.2.1
─C─O─H
(1)

1.2.2 H Marking criteria:

 - OH group on second C atom of longest
H C H chain. 
 Tertiary group consisting of four C atoms
H H with methyl group on 2nd C atom. 

H C C C H 

H H
O

H (2)
1.3
1.3.1 Criteria for investigative question:
The dependent and independent variables are stated. 
Ask a question about the relationship between the independent and dependent

variables.
Examples:
 How does an increase in chain length influence boiling point?
 What is the relationship between chain length and boiling point? (2)

1.3.2  Structure:
The chain length increases. 
 Intermolecular forces:
Increase in strength of intermolecular. 
 Energy:
More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces. 
OR
 Structure:
From propane to methane the chain length decreases. 
 Intermolecular forces:
Decrease in strength of intermolecular. 
 Energy:
Less energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces.  (3)
1.4  Between propane molecules are London forces. 
 Between propan-1-ol molecules are London forces, dipole-dipole forces and
hydrogen bonds. 
 Hydrogen bonds are stronger than London forces.  (3)
[12]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 70 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

2.1 C (1)
2.2
2.2.1 Chain length  (1)
2.2.2 Boiling point  (1)

2.3 London forces  (1)

2.4 Higher than  (1)
2.5 Lower than 
 Both compounds D and E have hydrogen bonding between molecules. 
 Compound D has one site for hydrogen bonding whilst compound E has two sites
for hydrogen bonding OR can form dimers. 
 More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces in compound E.  (4)
[9]

QUESTION 3

3.1 Saturated/
ANY ONE:
 B has ONLY single bonds. 
 B has single bonds between C atoms.
 B has no double OR triple bonds OR multiple bonds. (2)

3.2
3.2.1 - 42 (°C)  (1)

3.2.2 78 (°C)  (1)

3.3  Between molecules of C/propane are London forces / induced dipole forces. 
 Between molecules of E/ethanol are (London forces / induced dipole forces and)
hydrogen bonds. 
 Hydrogen bonds / Forces between alcohol molecules are stronger.  (3)

3.4 Decrease 

From A to D:
 Chain length increases. 
 Strength of intermolecular forces increases. 
 More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces.  (4)

3.5 Higher than  (1)

[12]

QUESTION 4

4.1 A bond OR an atom OR a group of atoms  that determine(s) the (physical and
chemical) properties of a group of organic compounds.  (2)

4.2
4.2.1 D / ethanoic acid 
Lowest vapour pressure.  (2)

4.2.2 A / butane  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 71 FS/2017

4.3  Between molecules of A / butane are London forces. 

 Between molecules of B / propan-2-one / ketones are dipole-dipole forces  in
addition to London forces.
 Intermolecular forces in A are weaker than those in B.  (3)

4.4 London forces / induced dipole forces / dipole-dipole forces. 

OR
A and B do not have hydrogen bonding. / C and D have hydrogen bonding. (1)

4.5 OPTION 1
 D has more sites for hydrogen bonding than C. / D forms dimers. 
 D has stronger intermolecular forces.  (2)

4.6 OPTION 1 V(O2 reacted):

V(CO2) = 4V(C4H10) V(H2O) = 5V(C4H10) 13
= (4)(8)  = (5)(8)  V(O2) = V(C4H10)
2
= 32 cm3 = 40 cm3
13
=( )(8)  = 52 cm3
2
V(O2 excess):
V(O2) = 60 – 52 = 8 cm3

Vtot = 32 + 40 + 8 = 80 cm3 
OPTION 2
C4H10 O2 CO2 H2O
Initial V (cm3)
8 60 0 0
3
Change in V (cm )
8 52  32  40 
Final V (cm3)
0 8 32 40

Total volume = 8 + 32 + 40 = 80 cm 3  (5)

[16]

QUESTION 5

5.1 Temperature at which the vapour pressure equals atmospheric pressure.  (2)
5.2 The stronger the intermolecular forces, the higher the boiling point. / The boiling point
is proportional to the strength of intermolecular forces. 
NOTE: NOT DIRECTLY proportional! (1)
5.3
5.3.1  Between molecules of A / propane are London forces. 
 Between molecules of B / propan-2-one are dipole-dipole forces  in addition to
London forces.
 Intermolecular forces in A are weaker than those in B.  (3)
5.3.2  Both C and D: hydrogen bonding 
 D has two / more sites for hydrogen bonding. / D forms dimers. 
 D has stronger intermolecular forces than C.  (3)
5.4 Liquid  (1)
[10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 72 FS/2017

QUESTION 6

6.1 Temperature at which the vapour pressure equals atmospheric pressure.  (2)

6.2 Criteria for conclusion:

Dependent and independent variables correctly identified. 
Relationship between the independent and dependent variables correctly

stated.

Examples:
 Boiling point increases with increase in chain length.
 Boiling point decreases with decrease in chain length.
 Boiling point is proportional to chain length.
NOTE: Boiling point is NOT DIRECTLY proportional to chain length. (2)

6.3
6.3.1 P (1)

6.3.2 R (1)

6.4  Between alkane molecules are London forces. 

 In addition to London forces and dipole-dipole forces each alcohol molecule has
one site for hydrogen bonding. 
 In addition to London forces and dipole-dipole forces each carboxylic acid
molecule has two sites for hydrogen bonding. 
 Intermolecular forces in carboxylic acids are stronger than intermolecular forces
in alkanes and alcohols. 
 More energy is needed to overcome intermolecular forces in carboxylic acids
than in the other two compounds.  (5)
[11]

QUESTION 7

7.1 Compounds with the same molecular formula  but different structural formulae. (2)

7.2 Chain  (1)

7.3 From A to C:
 Structure:
Less branched / less compact / larger surface area (over which intermolecular
forces act).
 Intermolecular forces:
Stronger intermolecular forces. 
 Energy:
More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces.  (3)

7.4 A
Lowest boiling point.  (2)

7.5 C5H12 + 8O2   5CO2 + 6H2O  Bal  (3)

[11]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 73 FS/2017

ORGANIC MOLECULES: ORGANIC REACTIONS

QUESTION 1

1.1
1.1.1 Substitution / chlorination / halogenation  (1)

1.1.2 Substitution / hydrolysis  (1)

1.2
1.2.1 Hydrogenation  (1)

1.2.2 H  H H H H


H C C C + H H H C C C H

H H H H H H
(3)

1.3 Marking criteria:

Cℓ H H
 Whole structure correct: 
H C C C H  Only functional group correct: 

H H H (2)

1.4
1.4.1 Esterification  (1)

1.4.2 Concentrated H2SO4 / sulphuric acid  (1)

1.4.3  Marking criteria:

H H H O H  Whole structure correct: 
 Only functional group correct: 
H C C C O C C H 

H H H H
(2)

1.4.4 Propyl  ethanoate  (2)

1.5 Sulphuric acid / H2SO4  (1)

[15]

QUESTION 2

2.2 Unsaturated 
Contains a double bond / multiple bond between C atoms.  (2)

2.2
2.2.1 H H H H

H C C C C H 

H H O H

H (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 74 FS/2017

2.2.2 Addition / hydration  (1)

2.3
2.3.1 2-chlorobutane  (2)

2.3.2 H H H H (1)

H C C C C H 

Cl H H H

2.4
2.4.1 H2O OR dilute NaOH / KOH  (1)
Mild heat 

2.4.2 Substitution / hydrolysis  (1)

2.4.3 C4H9Cℓ + NaOH  → C4H10O + NaCℓ  bal. 

OR
C4H9Cℓ + H2O  → C4H10O + HCℓ  bal.  (3)
[15]

QUESTION 3

3.1
3.1.1 Hydrolysis  (1)

3.1.2 (Mild) heat 

Dilute (strong) base/aqueous base  (2)

3.1.3 Ethanol  (1)

3.2
3.2.1 Esterification  (1)

3.2.2 Marking criteria:

O
  Functional group correct: 
  Whole structure correct: 
H C O H
(2)

3.2.3 Ethyl methanoate  (2)

[9]

QUESTION 4

4.1
4.1.1 Esterification / Condensation  (1)
4.1.2 O

C O C 
(1)
4.1.3 Propanoic acid  (1)

4.1.4 Dehydration / elimination  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 75 FS/2017

4.1.5 (Concentrated) H2SO4 / sulphuric acid / H3PO4 / phosphoric acid  (1)

4.1.6 H  H Marking criteria:

 Only functional group correct: 
C C   Whole structure correct: 

H H (2)

4.2
4.2.1 H  H Marking criteria:
 Functional group correct: 
C C   Whole structure correct: 

H H (2)

4.2.2 Addition  (1)

[10]

QUESTION 5

5.1
5.1.1 Addition  (1)

5.1.2 Polyethene  (1)

5.2
5.2.1 Chloroethane  (2)

5.2.2 Hydrohalogenation/hydrochlorination  (1)

5.3
5.3.1 O
H 

H C C O H

H (2)

5.3.2 HCℓ / hydrogen chloride  (1)

5.4
5.4.1 Saturated 
There are no double / multiple bonds between C atoms.  (2)

5.4.2 H2 / hydrogen gas (1)

5.4.3 2C2H6 + 7O2  → 4CO2 + 6H2O  Bal.  (3)

[14]

QUESTION 6

6.1
6.1.1 Addition / Hydrogenation  (1)

6.1.2 Elimination / Dehydrohalogenation / Dehydrobromination  (1)

6.1.3 Substitution / Halogenation / Bromination  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 76 FS/2017

6.2
6.2.1 Pt / platinum  (1)

6.2.2 H2SO4 / sulphuric acid  (1)

6.2.3 Hydration  (1)

6.2.4 2-bromopropane  (2)

6.3 H H H H H H

H C C C H H C C C H + H2O 

H O H H Marking guidelines
 Whole structure of alkene correct: 
H Only functional group correct: 
(5)

6.4 Higher temperature 

Concentrated base  (2)
[15]

QUESTION 7

7.1
7.1.1 High temperature / heat / high energy / high pressure  (1)

7.1.2 C6H12  (1)

7.1.3 Alkenes  (1)

7.2 X / C6H12 / Alkene 

OPTION 1
 X has a double bond. / X is unsaturated. 
 X can undergo addition. 
 X will react without light / heat. 
OPTION 2
 Butane is an alkane OR butane is saturated. 
 Butane can only undergo substitution. 
 Butane will only react in the presence of light or heat.  (4)

7.3
7.3.1 2-chlorobutane  (2)

7.3.2 Substitution / Hydrolysis  (1)

7.3.3 H H H H Marking criteria:

 Whole structure correct 
  Only functional group correct: 
H C C C C H

H H

7.3.4 Hydration  (1)

[13]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 77 FS/2017

REACTION RATE AND ENERGY IN CHEMICAL REACTIONS

QUESTION 1

1.1 Change in concentration of products / reactants  per unit time.  (2)

1.2
1.2.1 Temperature  (1)

1.2.2 Rate of reaction / Volume of gas formed per unit time  (1)

1.3  Larger mass / amount / surface area. 

 More effective collisions per unit time. / More particles collide with sufficient
kinetic energy & correct orientation per unit time.  (3)

1.4 Marking criteria

Compare The reaction in exp. 1 is faster than in exp. 2 due to the higher

Exp.1 with acid concentration.
Exp. 2: Therefore the gradient of the graph representing exp. 1 is
greater / steeper than that of exp. 2. 

Compare The reaction in exp. 3 is faster than that in exp. 1 due to the

Exp. 1 with higher temperature.
Exp 3 & 4: The reaction in exp. 4 is faster than that in exp. 1 due to the
higher temperature / larger surface area.
OR 
Graph A represents exp. 4 due to the greater mass of CaCO3 -
greater yield of CO2 at a faster rate.
Therefore the gradient of the graphs of exp. 3 & 4 are

greater/steeper than that of exp. 1.
Final answer C  (6)

1.5 Marking criteria:

 Divide volume by: 25,7 
 Use ratio: n(CO2) = n(CaCO3) = 1:1 
m
 Substitute 100 in n  .
M
 Subtraction. 
 Final answer: 7,00 g to 7,5 g 
V
n(CO2) =
Vm
4,5
= 
25,7
= 0,18 mol
n(CaCO3) = n(CO2) = 0,18 mol 
m
n(CaCO3) =
M
m
0,18 = m(CaCO3) = 18 g
100
m(CaCO3) not reacted: 25 – 18  = 7,00 g  (5)
[18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 78 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

2.1 Exothermic 
Temperature increases during reaction. / Ti ˂ Tf  (2)

2.2 Larger surface area in experiment 2.  (1)

2.3 More than one independent variable. 

OR Different concentrations and state of division. (1)

2.4 Faster than 

A catalyst is used in experiment 5. 
 A catalyst provides an alternative pathway of lower activation energy. 
 More molecules have sufficient kinetic energy. 
 More effective collisions per unit time.  (5)

2.5 m 1,2
n(Zn) = =  = 0,018 mol
M 65
n(HCℓ)reacted = 2n(Zn) = 2(0,018) = 0,037 mol 
n 0,037
Rate = = = 4,63 x 10-3 mol∙s-1 
t 8 (6)
[15]

QUESTION 3

3.1 Exothermic 
∆H < 0 / Energy is released.  (2)

3.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2

3.2.1 n(HCℓ) = cV c
= (1,5)  (30 x 10-3)  Ave rate  
t
= 0,045 mol (0  1,5) 
n 
Ave rate   (60  0) 
t
= 0,025 mol∙dm-3∙s-1
(0  45 ) 

( 60  0)   average rate = (0,025)(30 x 10-3) 
= 7,5 x 10-4 mol∙s-1  = 7,5 x 10-4 (mol∙s-1)  (5)

3.2.2(a) Increases 
 The reaction is exothermic, resulting in an increase in temperature. 
 More molecules have sufficient kinetic energy. 
 More effective collisions per unit time.  (4)

3.2.2(b) Decreases 
Concentration of acid decreases. 
OR The surface area of magnesium decreases. (2)

3.3 ANY TWO

 Higher temperature 
 Larger surface area/state of division/contact area of Mg. / Use Mg powder. 
 Addition of a catalyst. (2)
[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 79 FS/2017

QUESTION 4

4.1 Time: Stop watch 

Volume: Gas syringe / burette  (2)

4.2
4.2.1 t1  (1)

4.2.2 t3  (1)

4.3 Between t1 and t2  (1)

4.4
Exp. 2 
Volume (cm3)

Exp. 1



 Exp. 3

Time (s)
Marking criteria
Exp. Initial gradient higher than that of Exp.1. 
2 Curve reaches same constant volume as for Exp. 1 (but earlier). 
Exp. Initial gradient lower than that of Exp.1. 
3 Curve reaches a smaller constant volume as for Exp. 1 (later stage). 
(4)

4.5.1 Marking criteria

 n(HCℓ) = (0,1)(100 x 10-3)
 Use mole ratio: n(Zn) = ½n(HCℓ)
m
 Substitute 65 into n = .
M
 n(Znfinal) = n(Zninitial) – n(Znused)
m(Znfinal) = m(Zninitial) – m(Znused)
 Final answer: 0,33 g – 0,48 g
OPTION 1 OPTION 2
n(HCℓ) = cV n(HCℓ) = cV
= (0,1)(100 x 10-3)  = (0,1)(100 x 10-3) 
= 0,01 mol = 0,01 mol
n(Zn reacted): n(Zn reacted) = ½n(HCℓ)
n(Zn) = ½n(HCℓ) = ½(0,01) 
= ½(0,01)  = 5 x 10-3 mol
= 5 x 10-3 mol m
m(Zn reacted) = (5 x 10-3)(65)  n(Zn)i =
M
= 0,325 g 0,8
m(Znf) = 0,8 – 0,325  = 
= 0,48 g  (0,475 g) 65
= 1,23 x 10-2 mol
n(Zn)f = 1,23 x 10-2 – 5 x 10-3 
= 7,3 x 10-3 mol
m(Zn) = nM = (7,3 x 10-3)(65) = 0,47 g  (5)

4.5.2 Smaller than  (1)

[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 80 FS/2017

QUESTION 5

5.1 ANY TWO:

Increase temperature. 
Increase concentration of acid. 
Add a catalyst.  (2)

5.2 Change in concentration of products / reactants  per unit time.  (2)

5.3
5.3.1

(3)
5.3.2

(3)

5.3.3 1,15 to 1,25 mol∙dm-3  (1)

5.3.4  Concentration of reactants decreases. 

 Less particles per unit volume. 
 Less effective collisions per unit time.  (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 81 FS/2017

5.3.5

(5)
[19]

QUESTION 6

6.1 ANY TWO:

Temperature of reaction mixture 
Addition of a catalyst 
Concentration of reactants (2)

6.2 Sulphur / S  (1)

6.3 Water is used to dilute/change the concentration of the Na2S2O3(aq)  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 82 FS/2017

6.4 Criteria for investigative question:

The dependent and independent variables are stated correctly. 
Asks a question about the relationship between dependent and independent

variables.

Dependent variable: reaction rate

Independent variable: concentration
Examples:
 What is the relationship between concentration and reaction rate?
 How does the reaction rate change with change in concentration? (2)

6.5 A (1)

6.6 Experiment B:
 The concentration of Na2S2O3(aq) is higher. / More Na2S2O3 particles per unit
volume. 
 More particles with correct orientation. 
 More effective collisions per unit time.  (3)

6.7 OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3

m m
c  n  250 cm3 ..... 62,5 g
MV M
62,5 62,5 10
  10 cm3 .......  x 62,5
(158 )(0,25 ) 158 250
 m(Na2S2O3in D)
 1,58 mol  dm 3  0,396 mol
= 2,5 g
m
n n(Na 2S 2O3 in D) =
c M
V 2,5
0,396 = 
 158 
0,25 = 0,0158 mol
 1,58 mol  dm 3

n(Na2S2O3 in D) = cV
= (1,58)(0,01) 
= 0,0158 mol

n(S) = (Na2S2O3) 
= 0,0158
m
n
M
m
0,0158 
32 
m  0,51 g 
(7)
[17]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 83 FS/2017

QUESTION 7

7.1
7.1.1 The minimum energy needed for a reaction to take place.  (2)

7.1.2
75
Potential energy (kJ)

-196

Course of reaction
Marking criteria:
Shape of curve for exothermic reaction as shown. 
Energy of activated complex shown as 75 kJ in line with the peak. 
Energy of products shown as − 196 kJ below the zero. 
IF: Wrong shape, e.g. straight line. 0
3 (3)

7.1.3 Marking criteria

 Dotted line (---) on graph in QUESTION 7.1.2 showing lower energy for activated
complex. 
 Dotted curve starts at/above energy of reactants and ends at/above energy of
products on the inside of the original curve.  (2)

7.1.4  A catalyst provides an alternative pathway of lower activation energy. 

 More molecules have sufficient kinetic energy. 
 More effective collisions per unit time.  (3)

7.2
7.2.1 V
Ave rate =
t
52  16
=
40  10 
= 1,2 (dm3∙s-1)  (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 84 FS/2017

7.2.2 Marking criteria:

 V(O2) = 60 dm3 AND divide volume by 24. 
 Use ratio: n(H2O2) = 2n(O2) = 1:2 
m
 Use 34 g∙mol-1 in n  or in ratio calculation. 
M
 Final answer: 170 g 
OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3
V 24 dm3 : 1 mol V
n(O2) = 60 dm3 : 2,5 mol  n(O2) =
VM VM
60 60
=  n(H2O2) = 2n(O2) = 
24 = 2(2,5)  24
= 2,5 mol = 5 mol = 2,5 mol

n(H2O2) = 2n(O2) 34 g : 1 mol m

= 2(2,5)  n(O2) =
x : 5 mol M
= 5 mol x = 170 g  m
 2,5 =
32
m
n(H2O2) =  m = 80 g
M
m 
5 = 2(34) g H2O2 .......32 g O2
34 x g H2O2 ................ 80 g O2
m = 170 g 
m(H2O2) = 170 g  (4)

7.2.3 Equal to  (1)

7.3
7.3.1 Q (1)

7.3.2 P (1)
[20]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 85 FS/2017

CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM
QUESTION 1

1.1 The stage in a chemical reaction when the rate of forward reaction equals the rate of
reverse reaction. 
OR
The stage in a chemical reaction when the concentrations of reactants and products
remain constant. (2)

1.2 CALCULATIONS USING NUMBER OF MOLES

 Correct Kc expression (formulae in square brackets). 
 Substitution of concentrations into KC expression. 
 Substitution of KC value. 
 3
Equilibrium concentration of both NO2 & N2O4 multiplied by 0,08 dm . 
 Change in n(N2O4) = equilibrium n(N2O4) – initial n(N2O4) 
 USING ratio: NO2 : N2O4 = 2 : 1 
 Initial n(NO2)= equilibrium n(NO2) + change n(NO2). 
 Final answer: 1,11 (mol) 
OPTION 1
[N O ]
K c  2 42 
[NO 2 ]
[N2 O 4 ]
171  = 
[NO 2 ] 2
 [N2O4] = 171 x (0,2)2
= 6,84 mol∙dm-3

NO2 N2O4
Initial quantity (mol) 1,11  0
Change (mol) subtract  1,094 0,55  ratio 
Quantity at equilibrium (mol)/ 0,016 0,55
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm )-3
0,2 6,84 x 0,08 

OPTION 2
[N O ]
K c  2 42 
[NO 2 ]
[N O ]
171  = 2 42 
(0,2)
 [N2O4] = 171 x (0,2)2
= 6,84 mol∙dm-3
Equilibrium moles:
n(N2O4) = (6,84)(0,080)
= 0,55 mol
 x 0,08 dm3
n(NO2) = (0,2)(0,080)
= 0,016 mol
n(N2O4 formed) = 0,55 – 0 = 0,55 mol 
Ratio:
n(NO2 reacted) = 2n(N2O4 formed) = 2(0,55) = 1,094 mol 
Initial n(NO2) = 0,016 + 1,094  = 1,11 (mol)  (8)

1.3
1.3.1 Concentration (of the gases) increases. / Molecules become more condensed or
move closer to each other.  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 86 FS/2017

1.3.2  Increase in pressure favours the reaction that leads to smaller number of moles
of gas. 
 Forward reaction is favoured. 
 Number of moles/amount of N2O4 / colourless gas increases.
OR Number of moles/amount of NO2 / brown gas decreases.  (3)
1.4
1.4.1 Darker  (1)
1.4.2 Decreases  (1)
[16]
QUESTION 2
2.1 A reaction is reversible when products can be converted back to reactants.  (1)
2.2 No change  (1)
2.3
2.3.1 Temperature decreases  (1)
2.3.2  Decrease in temperature decreases the rate of both forward and reverse
reactions. 
 Decrease in temperature favours the exothermic reaction. 
 The rate of the reverse (exothermic) reaction is faster or the reverse reaction is
favoured.  (3)
2.4

(6)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 87 FS/2017

2.5 1
Kc = = 50 
0,02 (1)

2.6 Increases  (1)

[14]

QUESTION 3

3.1 When the equilibrium (in a closed system) is disturbed, the system will re-instate a
new equilibrium  by favouring the reaction that will cancel the disturbance.  (2)

3.2
3.2.1 Remains the same  (1)

3.2.2 Increases  (1)

3.3 OPTION 1 Marking criteria:

Kc = [NH3][H2S]   Kc expression.
 1,2 x 10-4  = [NH3][H2S]  Substitution of 1,2 x 10-4 .
 [NH3] = [H2S]  x volume (5 dm3)
= 0,011 mol∙dm-3  Use mole ratio: 1:1
n(NH3) = cV  Substitution 51 g∙mol-1
= (0,011)(5)   Final answer: 2,81 g
= 0,06 mol (0,06 mol)
n(NH4HS) = n(NH3) = 0,06 mol 
m(NH4HS) = nM
= (0,06)(51) 
= 2,81 g 
OPTION 2
NH4HS NH3 H2S
Initial quantity (mol) 0 0
Change (mol) x x x
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) - x x
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm -3) x x Divide by
- 5
5 5

Kc = [NH3][H2S] 
x x
 1,2 x 10-4 = ( )( )
5 5
 x = 0,0547 mol
m(NH4HS) = nM
= (0,0547)  (51) 
= 2,79 g  (6)

3.4 Decreases 
 Increase in pressure favours the reaction that leads to the smaller number of
moles of gas.  (3)
 The reverse reaction is favoured.  [13]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 88 FS/2017

QUESTION 4

4.1 Equal to  (1)

4.2 [X3 ]2
Kc = 
[X 2 ]3
(0,226)2 
=
(0,06)3 
= 236,46  (4)

4.3 (1)
4.3.1 Increases 

4.3.2  The increase in [X3] is opposed. / Change is opposed. 

 The reverse reaction is favoured. / X3 is used. / [X3] decreases.  (2)

4.4 Higher than  (1)

4.5 Exothermic 
 The concentration of the product / X3(g) is lower. / The concentration of the
reactant / X2(g) is higher. 
 The increase in temperature favoured the reverse reaction. 
 According to Le Chatelier's principle an increase in temperature favours the
endothermic reaction. 
OR
 [X3] decreases and [X2] increases. 
 Kc decreases if temperature increases. 
 Decrease in temperature favoured the forward reaction.  (4)

4.6
Number of particles

300 °C

400 °C

Kinetic energy
Marking criteria
Peak of curve at 400 °C lower than at 300 °C and shifted to the right. 
Curve at 400 °C has larger area at the higher Ek. 
(2)
[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 89 FS/2017

QUESTION 5

5.1

(4)

5.2 For equilibrium, a forward and a reverse reaction are needed. 

OR Without CaO(s), the reverse reaction is not possible.
OR If only CO2 is present, the reverse reaction cannot take place. (1)

5.3 CO2 is a gas and will escape if the container is not sealed.  (1)

5.4 OPTION 1 (POSITIVE MARKING FROM Q6.1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 90 FS/2017

OPTION 2 (POSITIVE MARKING FROM Q6.1)

(7)

5.5
5.5.1 Remains the same  (1)

5.5.2 Decreases  (1)

5.6 Endothermic 

 Kc decreases with decrease in temperature. 

 Therefore the product of the concentration of products decreases./The reverse
reaction is favoured. 
 A decrease in temperature favours the exothermic reaction. 
OR
 Kc increases with increase in temperature. 
 Increase in temperature favours the forward reaction. 
 Increase in temperature favours the endothermic reaction.  (4)
[19]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 91 FS/2017

QUESTION 6

6.1 Reversible reaction  (1)

6.2 Endothermic 
ΔH is positive. / ΔH > 0  (2)
6.3 Larger than 
Kc > 1  (2)
6.4
OPTION 1
m
n
M
168

28 
 6 mol
CO2 CO
Initial quantity (mol) x 0
Change (mol) 3 6 ratio 
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) x–3 6
x3 Divide by 2 
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm -3) 3
2

[CO] 2
Kc  
[CO2 ]
(3 ) 2
14  = 
x3
2
 x = 4,29 mol 

OPTION 2
m n
n c
M V
168 6
  Divide by 2 
28  2
 6 mol  3 mol  dm 3
CO2 CO
-3
Initial concentration (mol∙dm ) x
0
-3
Change (mol∙dm ) 1,5 3 ratio 
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm ) -3
x  1,5  3

[CO] 2
Kc  
[CO2 ]
[3] 2
14  = 
x  1,5
 x = 2,14 mol∙dm-3
n(CO2) = cV = (2,14)(2) = 4,29 mol 

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 92 FS/2017

OPTION 3
m
n
M
168

28 
 6 mol

CO2 CO
Initial quantity (mol) 4,28 0
Change (mol) 3 6 ratio 
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) 1,28  6
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm -3) 0,64 3 x2
[CO] 2
Kc  
[CO2 ]
[3 ] 2
14  = 
[CO2 ]
 [CO2] = 0,64 mol∙dm-3 (9)

6.5
6.5.1 Remains the same  (1)

6.5.2 Decreases  (1)

6.5.3 Increases  (1)

[17]

QUESTION 7

7.1 The stage in a chemical reaction when the rate of forward reaction equals the rate of
reverse reaction. 
OR
The stage in a chemical reaction when the concentrations / quantities of reactants
and products remain constant. (2)

7.2
7.2.1 Remains the same  (1)

7.2.2 Decreases 
 When the temperature is increased the reaction that will oppose this increase /
decrease the temperature will be favoured. 
OR
The forward reaction is exothermic.
 An increase in temperature favours the endothermic reaction. 
 The reverse reaction is favoured.  (4)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 93 FS/2017

7.3 Marking criteria:

 Vertical parallel lines show a sudden increase in rate of both forward and reverse
reactions. 
 Horisontal parallel lines showing a constant higher rate for both forward and
reverse catalysed reactions after time t1. 
Reaction rate (mol∙s-1)

t1 Time (s)
. (2)

7.4 CALCULATIONS USING NUMBER OF MOLES

m
 Use M(PbS) = 239 g∙mol-1 in n or in ratio calculation. 
M
 Use ratio: n(H2S)equil = n(PbS) 
 n(H2S)formed = n(H2S)equilibrium 
 USING ratio: H2 : H2S = 1 : 1 
 n(H2)equilibrium = n(H2)initial – n(H2)formed 
 Divide equilibrium n(H2S) & n(H2) by 2 dm3. 
 Correct Kc expression 
 Substitution of concentrations into Kc expression. 
 Final answer: 0,07 

OPTION 1
m
n(PbS) =
M
2,39
=
239 
= 0,01 mol
n(H2S)equilibrium = n(PbS)  = 0,01 mol

H2 H2S
Initial quantity (mol) 0,16 0
ratio 
Change (mol) 0,01 0,01 
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) 0,15  0,01
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm -3) 0,075 0,005 divide by 2 

[H2 S]
Kc  
[H2 ]
0,005
 
0,075
= 0,067  0,07 

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 94 FS/2017

OPTION 2
m
n(PbS) =
M
2,39
=
239 
= 0,01 mol
n(H2S)reacted = n(PbS)  = 0,01 mol
= n(H2S)equilibrium

n(H2S)formed = n(H2S)equilibrium – n(H2S)initial

= 0,01 – 0 
= 0,01 mol

n(H2)reacted = n(H2S)formed  = 0,01 mol

n(H2)equilibrium = n(H2)initial - n(H2)reacted

= 0,16 - 0,01 
= 0,15 mol
n n
c(H2) = c(H2S) =
V V
0,15 0,01
= =
2  2
= 0,075 mol∙dm-3 = 0,005 mol∙dm-3
[H S]
Kc  2 
[H2 ]
0,005
 
0,075
= 0,067  0,07  (9)
[18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 95 FS/2017

ACIDS AND BASES

QUESTION 1

1.1
1.1.1 Ionises / dissociates completely in water.  (1)
1.1.2 NO 3 / Nitrate ion  (1)

1.1.3 pH = - log[H3O+] / - log[H+]  = -log(0,3)  = 0,52  (3)

1.2
1.2.1 n
c 
V
n
2= 
0,1
 n(HCℓ) = 0,2 mol  (3)
1.2.2 Burette  (1)
1.2.3 B
Titration of strong acid and strong base.  (3)
1.2.4 The number of moles of acid in the flask remains constant.  (1)

1.2.5 n n
c   0,2 =   n = 4,2 x 10-3 mol 
V 0,021
n(HCℓ)excess = n(NaOH) = 4,2 x 10-3 mol (3)
1.2.6 POSITIVE MARKING FROM QUESTION 1.2.1 AND 1.2.5.
Marking criteria:
 n(HCℓ reacted) = initial (from Q1.2.1) – excess (from Q1.2.5). 
 Use mol ratio of acid: base = 2 : 1. 
m
 Substitute 40 into n = 
M
m(MgO )reacted
  100 
4,5
 Final answer: 87,11 % 
OPTION 1 OPTION 2
n(HCℓ reacted): n(HCℓ reacted):
0,2 – 4,2 x 10-3  = 0,196 mol 0,2 – 4,2 x 10-3  = 0,196 mol
m
n(MgO reacted): n(HCℓ reacted) =
M
½n(HCℓ) = ½(0,196) m
= 9,8 x 10-2 mol  0,196 =
36,5
m
n(MgO reacted) =  m(HCℓ reacted) = 7,154 g
M 40 g MgO  .............. 73 g HCℓ 
m
 0,098 = x g MgO ................... 7,154 g
40   x = 3,92 g
m = 3,92 g 3,92
3,92 % purity = 
% purity =  4,5  100
4,5  100 = 87,11% 
= 87,11%  (5)
[21]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 96 FS/2017

QUESTION 2

2.1
2.1.1 An acid is a proton (H+ ion) donor.  (1)

2.1.2 It ionises to form 2 protons for each H2SO4 molecule. / It ionises to form 2 moles of
H+ ions. 
OR
It donates 2 H+ ions per H2SO4 molecule. (1)

2.2
2.2.1 Amphiprotic substance / Ampholyte  (1)

2.2.2 H2CO3  (1)

2.3
2.3.1

(6)

2.3.2

(2)

2.3.3 Shows end point of titration. / Shows when neutralisation occurs.  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 97 FS/2017

2.3.4

(8)
[22]

QUESTION 3

3.1
3.1.1 Diprotic  (1)
3.1.2 H2O 
2
(COO) 2  (2)
3.1.3 HC 2O 4 /H(COO) 2 
It acts as base (in reaction I) and as acid (in reaction II).  (2)
3.2 Ionises / dissociates incompletely / partially.  (1)

3.3 OPTION 1 OPTION 2 Marking guidelines:

m n  Any formula of:
c  c 
MV V m n m
c /c /n
m n MV V M
 0,2  0,2 = 
0,25 90  0,25
n = 0,05 mol  Substitution of V as 0,25 dm 3.
 m  4,5 g 
m
n=  Substitution of 90 g∙mol-1.
M
m
0,05 =  Final answer: 4,5 g
90 
m = 4,5 g  (4)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 98 FS/2017

3.4
3.4.1 OPTION 1 Marking guidelines:
c a Va n a  Formula
 
c b Vb nb  Substitution of 0,2 x 25.
0,2  25  1  Use Vb = 36 cm3.
   Use mol ratio 1:2.
c b  36  2
 Final answer: 0,28 mol∙dm-3
 cb = 0,28 mol∙dm-3 

OPTION 2 Marking guidelines:

n((COOH)2) = cV   Any ONE of formulae.
= (0,2)(0,025)   Substitution of 0,2 x 0,025.
= 0,005 mol  Use mol ratio 1:2.
n(NaOH) =2(0,005)   Use Vb = 0,036 dm3.
= 0,01 mol  Final answer:
n 0,28 mol∙dm-3
c
V
0,01
=
0036 
= 0,28 mol∙dm-3  (5)

3.4.2 2
(COO) 2 (aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)  ⇌ (COOH)2(aq) + 2OH-(aq)  Bal.  (3)
[18]
QUESTION 4

4.1
4.1.1 Hydrolysis  (1)

4.1.2 Acidic 
Forms H3O+ ions during hydrolysis. 
OR
Salt of strong acid and weak base. (2)

4.2
4.2.1 n = cV 
= (0,1)(0,1) 
= 0,01 mol  (3)

4.2.2 POSITIVE MARKING FROM QUESTION 7.2.1.

Marking criteria
 Substitute volume and concentration to calculate n(HCℓ) 
 Use mole ratio: n(NaOH) = n(HCℓ) = 1:1 
 n(NaOH) x 4 OR V(HCℓ) x 4 OR n(HCℓ) x 4 
 Subtraction: n(NaOHinitial) - n(NaOHexcess) 
 Use mole ratio: n(NaOH) = n(NH4Cℓ) = 1:1 
m
 Substitute 53,5 g·mol-1 in n = .
M
 Percentage calculation 
 Final answer: 0,11 g - 0,21 g 

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 99 FS/2017

OPTION 1
n(HCℓ) = caVa = (0,11)(14,55 x 10-3)  = 1,6 x 10-3 mol

n(NaOH) = n(HCℓ) = 1,6 x 10-3 mol 

n(NaOH excess) in 100 cm 3 = 1,6 x 10-3 x 4 

= 6,4 x 10-3 mol

n(NaOH reacted) = 0,01 - 6,4 x 10-3 

= 3,6 x 10-3 mol

n(NH4Cℓ) = n(NaOH) = 3,6 x 10-3 mol  (0,003598 mol)

m(NH4Cℓ) = nM x m
= (3,6 x 10-3)(53,5) n(NH4Cℓ) = 0,92  n(NH4Cℓ) =
53,5 53,5 
= 0,193 g 
m
 3,6 x 10-3 =
x 53,5
92% : 0,193 g  3,6 x 10-3 = 0,92
100% : x 53,5 n(NH4Cℓ) = 0,192 g

0,193  100  x = 0,21 g  m(fertiliser):

x =  0,192  100
92 m= 
= 0,21 g  92
= 0,21 g 
OPTION 2 OPTION 3
V(HCℓ) to neutralise 100 cm3 NaOH: n(HCℓ) to neutralise 100 cm3 NaOH:
V(HCℓ) = 14,55 x 4  n(HCℓ) = cV
= 58,2 cm3 = (0,11)(0,01455 x 4) 
= 0,006402 mol (6,4 x 10-3 mol)
n(HCℓ) = cV
= (0,11)(0,0582)  n(NaOHexcess):
= 0,006402 mol n(NaOH) = n(HCℓ) = 6,4 x 10-3 mol 

n(NaOH) = n(HCℓ) n(NaOHreacted):

= 0,006402 mol  n(NaOH) = 0,01 - 0,006402 
= 0,003598 mol
n(NaOHreacted):
n(NaOH) = 0,01 - 0,006402  n(NH4Cℓ) = n(NaOH)
= 0,003598 mol = 0,003598 mol 

n(NH4Cℓ) = n(NaOH) m(NH4Cℓ) = nM

= 0,003598 mol  = (0,003598)(53,5) 
= 0,192 g
m(NH4Cℓ) = nM
= (0,003598)(53,5)  92% : 0,192 g
= 0,192 g 100
100% : 0,192 x  = 0,21 g 
92
92% : 0,192 g
0,192  100
100% : = 0,21 g 
92 (8)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 100 FS/2017

4.3 OPTION 1 OPTION 2

[OH-] = [NaOH] = 0,5 mol∙dm-3 pOH = -log[OH-] 
= -log(0,5) 
Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 0,301
1 x 10-14 = [H3O+]0,5 
[H3O+] = 2 x 10-14 mol∙dm-3 pH + pOH = 14
pH = 14 – 0,301 
pH = -log[H+]  = 13,7  (13,699)
= -log(2 x 10-14) 
= 13,7  (4)
[18]

QUESTION 5

5.1 It is a proton donor.  (2)

5.2
5.2.1 CO 32 (aq)  (1)

5.2.2 H2CO3 + H2O  ⇌ HCO 3 (aq) + H3O+(aq)  Bal.  (3)

5.2.3

(5)

5.3
5.3.1 An acid that donates ONE proton / H+ ion / H3O+ ion. 
OR
An acid of which ONE mol ionises to form ONE mol of protons / H + ions / H3O+ ions. (1)

5.3.2

(5)

5.3.3 Weak 

The [H+] OR [H3O+] is lower than the concentration of acid X. 

Therefore the acid is incompletely ionised.  (3)
[20]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 101 FS/2017

QUESTION 6

6.1
6.1.1 An acid is a proton/ H+ donor. 
NOTE: NOT H3O+ (2)

6.1.2 H2O 
H2CO3  (2)

6.1.3 H2O  OR HCO 3 (1)

6.2
6.2.1 n(HCℓ) = cV 
= (0,1)(0,5) 
= 0,05 mol

n(NaHCO3) = cV
= (0,25) (0,8) 
= 0,2 mol
n(NaHCO3)reacted = n(HCℓ)
= 0,05 mol 
n(NaHCO3)excess = 0,2 – 0,05 
= 0,15 mol
n(OH-) = n(NaHCO3) 
= 0,15 mol
n
c(OH ) 
V
0,15 

1,3
 0,12 mol  dm 3  (8)

6.2.2 POSITIVE MARKING FROM QUESTION 6.2.1

OPTION 1 OPTION 2
Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 1 x 10-14 pOH = -log[OH—] 
-14 +
1 x 10 = [H3O ](0,12)  = -log(0,12) 
[H3O+] = 8,33 x 10-14 mol∙dm-3 = 0,92

pH = - log [H3O+]  pH + pOH = 14

= - log(8,33 x 10-14)  pH + 0,92 = 14 
= 13,08  pH = 13,08  (4)
[17]

QUESTION 7

7.1
7.1.1 Hydrolysis is the reaction of a salt with water.  (2)

7.1.2 Smaller than (7) 


 NH 4 + H2O  → NH3 + H3O+  (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 102 FS/2017

7.2
7.2.1 Marking guidelines:
 Substitution of 98 g∙mol -1. 
 Final answer: 0,08 mol 
OPTION 1 OPTION 2
m 98 g : 1 mol
n 7,35 :0,08 mol 
M
7,35 OPTION 3
=
98 m
= 0,08 mol  (0,075 mol) c
MV
7,35
=
98  0,5
= 0,15 mol∙dm-3

n = cV
= 0,15 x 0,5
= 0,08 mol  (2)

7.2.2 POSITIVE MARKING FROM QUESTION 7.2.1.

OPTION 1 Marking guidelines:
pH = −log[H3O+]   Formula: pH = −log[H3O+] 
 Substitution of 1,3 
1,3  = −log[H3O+]  Use [H2SO4] : [H3O+] = 1 : 2 
[H3O+] = 0,05 mol∙dm-3
n
 Formula: c  
[H2SO4] = ½[H3O+] V
= ½ x 0,05   Multiply by 0,5 dm3 
= 0,025 mol∙dm-3  Subtract ninitial – nexcess 
 Use n(NaOH) : n(H2SO4) = 2:1 
n(H2SO4)excess = cV   Substitution of 40 g∙mol -1 
= 0,025 x 0,5   Final answer: m = 5 g 
Range: 4,8 – 5,6 g
= 0,0125 mol
Q7.2.1
n(H2SO4)react = 0,075 – 0,0125 
= 0,0625 mol

n(NaOH) = 2n(H2SO4)
= 2 x 0,0625 
= 0,125 mol

m
n(NaOH)  1 mol : 40 g 
M 0,125 mol : 5 g 
m
 0,125  OR
40 
m=5g

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 103 FS/2017

OPTION 2 Marking guidelines:

n n
[H2SO4]in =   Formula: c  
V V
Q7.2.1 0,075  Divide by 0,5 dm3 
=  Use [H3O+] : [H2SO4] = 2:1 
0,5 
= 0,15 mol∙dm-3  Formula: pH = −log[H3O+] 
 Substitution of 1,3 
[H3O+]initially = 2[H2SO4]  Subtract [H3O+]initial – [H3O+]excess 
= 2 x 0,15   Use n(NaOH) : n(H2SO4) = 2:1 
OR
= 0,3 mol∙dm-3
Use [H2SO4] : [NaOH] = 1 : 2 
 Substitution of 40 g∙mol-1 
pH = −log[H3O+]   Final answer: m = 5 g 
1,3  = -log[H3O+] Range: 4,8 – 5,6 g
[H3O+] = 0,05 mol∙dm-3

[H3O+]react = 0,3 – 0,05 

= 0,25 mol∙dm-3

[H2SO4]react = ½[H3O+]
= ½ x 0,25
= 0,125 mol∙dm-3 (0,14)

OR

n(H2SO4)react = cV [H2SO4] : [NaOH]

= (0,125)(0,5)
1 : 2
= 0,0625 mol
0,125 : 0,25 
n(NaOH) = 2n(H2SO4) m = cMV
= 2 x 0,0625 
= 0,125 mol = 0,25 x 40 x 0,5
=5g
m
n(NaOH) 
M
m
0,125 
40
m = 5 g  (9)
[16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 104 FS/2017

GALVANIC CELLS
QUESTION 1

1.1  Pressure: 1 atmosphere (atm) / 101,3 kPa / 1,013 x 105 Pa 

 Temperature: 25 °C / 298 K  (2)

1.2  Platinum is inert / does not react with the H+ ions OR acid. 
 Platinum is a conductor (of electricity).  (2)

1.3
1.3.1 Salt bridge  (1)

1.3.2 -0,31 V  (1)

1.3.3 2H+ + 2e- → H2  (2)

1.4
1.4.1 POSITIVE MARKING FROM QUESTION 1.3.2.
  
Ecell  Ereduction  Eoxidation 

2,05  = -0,31 – E M / M2 

E M / M2  = -2,36 (V) 

M is magnesium/ Mg.  (5)

1.4.2 Exothermic  (1)

1.5 The cell reaction reaches equilibrium.  (1)

[15]

QUESTION 2

2.1 A substance that is being reduced. 

OR
A substance that gains/accepts electrons.
OR
A substance whose oxidation number decreases. (2)
2.2 Ag+ is a stronger oxidising agent  than Cu2+  and will oxidise Cu  to (blue)
Cu2+ ions. 
OR
Cu2+ is a weaker oxidising agent  than Ag+  and Cu will be oxidised  to
Cu2+ ions.  (4)
2.3 Chemical energy to electrical energy  (1)

2.4 A (1)
2.5

(4)
2.6 Cu + 2Ag+(aq) → Cu2+ (aq) + 2Ag(s)  Balancing  (3)

2.7 Remains the same  (1)

[16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 105 FS/2017

QUESTION 3

3.1 Redox reaction  (1)

3.2 P
Negative electrode. / Mg is a stronger reducing agent/is oxidized/release electrons.
 (2)

3.3
3.3.1 (Temperature): 25 °C/298 K 
(Concentration): 1 mol∙dm-3  (2)

3.3.2 Mg(s) | Mg2+(aq) || Pb2+(aq) | Pb(s) 
OR
Mg | Mg2+|| Pb2+| Pb (3)

3.3.3 Pb2+ / Pb(NO3)2 / lead(II) ions  (1)

  
3.4 Ecell  Ereduction  Eoxidation
= -0,13  – (-2,36) 
= 2,23 V  (4)

3.5
3.5.1 Remains the same  (1)

3.5.2 Increases  (1)

[15]

QUESTION 4

4.1 Temperature: 25 °C / 298 K 

Pressure: 101,3 kPa / 1,013 x 105 Pa / 1 atm / 100 kPa 

Concentration: 1 mol∙dm-3  (3)

4.2
4.2.1 Cd(s) / Cadmium / Cd∣Cd2+ / Cd2+∣Cd  (1)

  
4.2.2 E cell  E cathode  E anode 

0,13 = E cathode – (-0,40) 

E cathode = - 0,27 V 
Q is Ni / nickel  (5)

4.3
4.3.1 Cd(s) → Cd2+(aq) + 2e-  (2)

4.3.2 Pt / Platinum  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 106 FS/2017

4.4 OPTION 1

Compare Q2+ Q2+ is reduced / Cd is oxidised and therefore Q2+ is a stronger


& Cd2+ oxidising agent than Cd2+.
Compare R2 & R2 is reduced / Cd is oxidised and therefore R2 is a stronger

Cd2+ oxidising agent than Cd2+. 
Compare R2 & The cell potential of combination II is higher than that of
Q2+ combination I, therefore R2 is a stronger oxidising agent than 
Q2+.
Final answer Cd2+; Q2+;R2 OR Cd2+ ; Ni2+ ; Cℓ2 

OPTION 2
 The reduction potential of Cℓ | Cℓ2 = 1,36 V  because the cell potential of
combination II is 1,76 V and the reduction potential of Cd | Cd2+ is 0,4 V.
OR
R2 is Cℓ2 because the cell potential of combination II is 1,76 V and the reduction
potential of Cd∣Cd2+ is 0,4 V.
 Cd∣Cd2+ has the lowest reduction potential (-0,4 V) and therefore Cd2+ is the
weakest oxidising agent. 
 Cℓ-∣Cℓ2 has the highest reduction potential and therefore Cℓ 2 is the strongest
oxidising agent. 
 Final answer: Cd2+; Q2+;R2  OR Cd2+ ; Ni2+ ; Cℓ2 (4)
[16]

QUESTION 5

5.1 B (1)

5.2
5.2.1 Cℓ2(g) + 2e- → 2Cℓ-(aq)  (2)

5.2.2 Cℓ2 / chlorine  (1)

5.3

(4)

5.4  The Mg electrode becomes smaller. / The mass of the Mg electrode decreases. /
The Mg electrode being corroded. 
 Magnesium is oxidised. / Mg → Mg2+ + 2e-  (2)
[10]

QUESTION 6

6.1 Electrons are transferred. 

OR
The oxidation number of Mg / H changes.
OR
Mg is oxidised / H+ is reduced. (1)

6.2 H+ ions / HCℓ / H+(aq) / HCℓ(aq)  (1)

6.3 Ag is a weaker reducing agent  than H2 and will not be oxidised to Ag+ 
OR
H2 is a stronger reducing agent  than Ag and will be oxidised  to H+. (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 107 FS/2017

6.4 Electrode / Conductor of electrons in hydrogen half-cell  (1)

6.5
6.5.1 Chemical energy to electrical energy  (1)

6.5.2 Provides path for movement of ions./Completes the circuit./Ensures electrical

neutrality in cell.  (1)

6.5.3 2H++ 2e- → H2  (2)

  
6.5.4 Mg(s) | Mg2+(aq) || H+(aq) | H2(g) | Pt

OR
Mg(s) | Mg2+(1 mol∙dm-3) || H+(1 mol∙dm-3) | H2(g) | Pt (3)

  
6.6 Ecell  Ereduction  Eoxidation
= 0,00  – (-2,36) 
= 2,36 V  (4)

6.7 Increases  (1)

[18]

QUESTION 7

7.1
7.1.1 AgNO3 / Silver nitrate  (1)

7.1.2 Ni → Ni2+ + 2e-  (2)

7.1.3 Ni + 2Ag+  → Ni2+ + 2Ag  Bal 

OR
Ni + 2 AgNO3 → Ni(NO3)2 + 2Ag (3)

7.2
7.2.1 Ni 
Ni is a stronger reducing agent. / Ni is the anode. / Ni loses electrons. / Ni is
oxidised.  (2)
  
7.2.2 Ni (s) | Ni2+ (aq) || Ag+(aq) | Ag(s)

OR
Ni (s) | Ni2+ (1 mol∙dm-3) || Ag+(1 mol∙dm-3) | Ag(s) (3)

  
7.2.3 E cell  Ereduction  E oxidation
= 0,80  – (-0,27) 
= 1,07 V  (4)

7.2.4 Increases  (1)

[16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 108 FS/2017

ELECTROLYTIC CELLS
QUESTION 1

1.1 Electrolytic  (1)

1.2 Q& T

Cu2+ + 2e → Cu  (4)

1.3
1.3.1 Cℓ2 / chlorine gas  (1)

1.3.2 Cu2+ ions / copper(II) ions / CuCℓ2 / copper(II) chloride  (1)

1.4 Cu is a stronger reducing agent  than Cℓ- ions  and Cu will be oxidised  to Cu2+.
OR
Cℓ- ions is a weaker reducing agent  than Cu  and Cu will be oxidised  to Cu2+. (3)
[10]

QUESTION 2

2.1 A solution that conducts electricity through the movement of ions.  (2)

2.2
2.2.1 2H2O + 2e- → H2 + 2OH-  (2)

2.2.2 Chlorine gas / Cℓ2  (1)

2.3 H2O is a stronger oxidising agent  than Na+ and will be reduced  to H2. (2)
[7]

QUESTION 3

3.1 A solution that conducts electricity through the movement of ions.  (2)

3.2 Plastic is a non-conductor of electricity. / Graphite is a conductor.  (1)

3.3
3.3.1 Ni2+(aq) + 2e-  Ni(s)  (2)

3.3.2 Ni / nickel 
Ni is oxidised. 
OR Ni loses electrons.
OR Ni is the anode.
OR Ni is the positive electrode. (2)

3.4 Ring 
Reduction takes place at the cathode. 
OR
Negative electrode. (2)

3.5 Decreases 
Ni2+ ions from the electrolyte will be reduced (to Ni). 
OR
Ni2+ changes to Ni (2)
[11]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 109 FS/2017

QUESTION 4

4.1 ANY ONE:

 The chemical process in which electrical energy is converted to
chemical energy. 
 The use of electrical energy to produce a chemical change.
 The process during which an electric current passes through a solution / molten
ionic compound. (2)

4.2 ANY ONE:

 To keep the polarity of the electrodes constant. 
 To prevent the anode and cathode from swopping.
 DC provides a one way flow of electrons ensuring that the same chemical
reaction occurs all the time at the same electrodes. (1)

4.3 Cu2+ (aq) + 2e-  Cu(s)  (2)

4.4  Cu2+ is a stronger oxidising agent  than Zn2+. 

 Cu2+ will be reduced to Cu. 

OR
 Zn is a stronger reducing agent than Cu.
 Cu2+ will be reduced to Cu. (3)

QUESTION 5

5.1 Electrolytic cell  (1)

5.2 The substance/species which loses electrons.  (2)

5.3 P (1)

5.4 Cu(s) → Cu2+(aq) + 2e-  (2)

5.5 A
Cℓ- ions move to the positive electrode / anode where they are oxidised to Cℓ 2 .  (3)
[12]
QUESTION 6

6.1
6.1.1 Electrolyte  (1)

6.1.2 Electrolytic cell  (1)

6.2 A to B  (1)

6.3
6.3.1 B (1)

6.3.2 A (1)

6.4 Decreases 

Copper (Cu) is oxidised to Cu2+ / Oxidation takes place at A.  (2)

[7]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 110 FS/2017

QUESTION 7

7.1 Endothermic  (1)

7.2 Anode 

Connected to the positive terminal of the battery.  (2)

7.3
7.3.1 Chlorine gas / Cℓ2  (1)

7.3.2 Hydrogen gas /H2  (1)

7.3.3 2H2O(ℓ) + 2e-  H2(g) + 2OH-(aq)  (2)

7.4 Basic / alkaline 

OH− ions form / NaOH forms  (2)
[9]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 111 FS/2017

FERTILISERS
QUESTION 1

1.1
1.1.1 Nitrogen / N2 
Hydrogen / H2  (2)

1.1.2 NH3 + HNO3  → NH4NO3  Bal.  (3)

1.2 Marking criteria:

3
 Use ratio: 
9
 x 20 kg 
 x 36 / 36 % 
 Final answer: 2,4 kg 
OPTION 1: OPTION 2: OPTION 3:
3 m(nutrients): m(N):
% N =  (x 36)  36 
9  (x 20) = 7,2 kg 3  36  
= 12 % 100  ( 20 ) ( )  2,4 kg
12  9 100
m(N) : ( 20 kg ) 3
100  m(N)   x 7,2
= 2,4 kg  9
= 2,4 kg  (4)
[9]

QUESTION 2

2.1 Contact process  (1)

2.2
2.2.1 Vanadium pentoxide / Vanadium(V) oxide / V2O5  (1)
2.2.2 H2S2O7(ℓ) + H2O(ℓ)  → 2H2SO4(ℓ)  Bal.  (3)
2.3
2.3.1 H2SO4 + 2NH3  → (NH4)2SO4  Bal.  (3)
2.3.2 Ammonium sulphate  (1)
2.4
2.4.1 Total percentage of fertiliser  (1)

2.4.2

(4)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 112 FS/2017

QUESTION 3

3.1
3.1.1 2SO2(g) + O2(g)  → 2SO3(g)  Bal.  (3)

3.1.2 Catalyst 

OR
Increase the reaction rate (1)

3.2 Exothermic 
The temperature increases (2)

3.3  An exothermic reaction is favoured by a decrease in temperature. 

 The forward reaction is favoured. 
 Higher yield (of SO3). 
OR
 An endothermic reaction is favoured by an increase in temperature. 
 The reverse reaction is favoured. 
 Lower yield (of SO3).  (3)

3.4
3.4.1 H2S2O7  (1)

3.4.2 A mist will form (which is difficult to collect). 

OR
The reaction is too exothermic. (1)

3.5 H2SO4 + 2NH3 → (NH4)2SO4  Bal.  (3)

[14]

QUESTION 4

4.1
4.1.1 Haber process  (1)

4.1.2 N2 + 3H2 ⇌ 2NH3  bal  (3)

4.1.3 Air  (1)

4.2
4.2.1 40%  (1)

4.2.2  High yield 

 High rate due to higher concentration.  (2)

4.2.3 Low reaction rate  (1)

OPTION 1 OPTION 2
28 28
% N in NH4NO3 =   100 m(N in NH4NO3) =  x 50 
80 80
= 35% = 17,5 kg 
m(N) in 50 kg:
35
 50  = 17,5 kg 
100 (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 113 FS/2017

QUESTION 5

5.1 Ostwald process  (1)

5.2 NO / nitrogen monoxide 
Water / H2O  (2)

5.3 NH3 + HNO3  → NH4NO3  bal  (3)

5.4

(3)

5.5 To make a NPK fertiliser . / To make fertilisers which contain all three primary
nutrients.  (1)
[10]

QUESTION 6

6.1
6.1.1 Air  (1)

6.1.2 Natural gas / methane / oil / coal  (1)

6.1.3 Sulphur / iron pyrite / iron sulphide 

(1)

6.2
6.2.1 Haber process  (1)

6.2.2 Ammonia  (1)

6.2.3 H2SO4  (1)

6.2.4 SO3+ H2SO4 → H2S2O7  Bal.  (3)

6.3
6.3.1 28
%N[NH4NO3] =  x 100 = 35%
80 
28
%N[(NH4)2SO4] =  x 100 = 21,21%
132

Ammonium nitrate (has the highest percentage of nitrogen).  (4)

6.3.2 Ostwald process  (1)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 114 FS/2017

QUESTION 7

7.1
7.1.1 Haber process  (1)

7.1.2 Contact process / Catalytic oxidation of SO2  (1)

7.1.3 Sulphur trioxide / SO3  (1)

7.1.4 SO3 + H2SO4   H2S2O7  Bal.  (3)

7.1.5 H2SO4  + 2NH3   (NH4)2SO4  Bal.  (4)

7.2 Marking guidelines:

 Calculate the mass of fertiliser.
 Add %N and %P OR mass N and mass P.
 Subtraction: 100 – (%N + %P)
OR m(fertiliser) – [m(N) + m(P)]
OR %fertiliser – [%N + %P]
 Final answer: 8:1:5

OPTION 1 OPTION 2
36 36
m(fertiliser) = x 20 m(fertiliser) = x 20 
100 100
= 7,2 kg = 7,2 kg

4,11 m(K) = 7,2 –  (4,11 + 0,51) 

%N = x 100 = 2,58 kg
7,2
= 57,08%
4,11 : 0,51 : 2,58
0,51
%P = x 100 8 : 1 : 5
7,2
= 7,08%
%K = 100 –  (57,08 + 7,08) 
= 35,84%

57,08 : 7,08 : 35,84

8 : 1 : 5

OPTION 3
4,11
%N = x 100 = 20,55%
20
0,51 
%P = x 100 = 2,55%
20
%K = 36 – (20,55 + 2,55)  = 12,9%

20,55 : 2,55 : 12,9

8 : 1 : 5 (4)
[14]

BIBLIOGRAPHY
Department of Basic Education, National Senior Certificate Physical Sciences Question Papers,
2014 – 2016, Pretoria

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

 PHYSICAL SCIENCES PAPER 2 (CHEMISTRY)

GRADE 12

TERMS & DEFINITIONS, QUESTIONS & ANSWERS

PER TOPIC

2019
CONTENTS

HOW TO USE THIS DOCUMENT ...................................................................................................... 2

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................ 3
QUESTIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 10
ORGANIC MOLECULES: NOMENCLATURE .............................................................................. 10
ORGANIC MOLECULES: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES .................................................................. 19
ORGANIC MOLECULES: ORGANIC REACTIONS .................................................................... 26
REACTION RATE AND ENERGY IN CHEMICAL REACTIONS .................................................. 34
CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM ............................................................................................................ 45
ACIDS AND BASES ...................................................................................................................... 52
GALVANIC CELLS ........................................................................................................................ 59
ELECTROLYTIC CELLS ............................................................................................................... 66
FERTILISERS ................................................................................................................................ 71

ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ............................................................................................................ 78

ORGANIC MOLECULES: NOMENCLATURE .............................................................................. 78
ORGANIC MOLECULES: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES .................................................................. 84
ORGANIC MOLECULES: ORGANIC REACTIONS ..................................................................... 89
REACTION RATE AND ENERGY IN CHEMICAL REACTIONS .................................................. 94
CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM .......................................................................................................... 102
ACIDS AND BASES .................................................................................................................... 110
GALVANIC CELLS ...................................................................................................................... 117
ELECTROLYTIC CELLS ............................................................................................................. 120
FERTILISERS .............................................................................................................................. 122

BIBLIOGRAPHY.............................................................................................................................. 126

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 10 FS/2019

QUESTIONS

ORGANIC MOLECULES: NOMENCLATURE

QUESTION 1
Consider the organic compounds represented by the letters A to F in the table below.

A 2,2,4-trimethylhexane B CH3CH2CH2CH2CHO

H H Cℓ Br H H H

H C C C C C H
C C
C H H H H D
H C H H H n

H H O H O

E O C C O C C C F Pentan-2-one

H H H n

1.1 Write down the LETTER that represents the following:

1.1.1 An aldehyde (1)

1.1.2 A condensation polymer (1)

1.1.3 A compound which has a carbonyl group bonded to two carbon atoms as
its functional group (1)

1.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:

1.2.1 Compound C (3)

1.2.2 The monomer of compound D (1)

1.3 Write down the structural formula of:

1.3.1 Compound A (2)

1.3.2 Compound F (2)

1.4 The table contains compounds which are functional isomers.

1.4.1 Define the term functional isomer. (2)

1.4.2 Write down the LETTERS that represent two compounds that are
functional isomers. (1)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 11 FS/2019

QUESTION 2

The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.

H H
H C H
A B 2-methylbutanoic acid
H C C C H

H H
H H O H H H CH3 H CH2CH3

C H C C C C C H D H C C C C H

H CH3 H CH2CH3
H CH2CH3 H H
H H

E F C C
But-2-ene

H H n

2.1 Write down the:

2.1.1 NAME of the functional group of compound B (1)
2.1.2 Homologous series to which compound C belongs (1)
2.1.3 Type of polymerisation reaction that produces compound F (1)
2.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:
2.2.1 The monomer used to prepare compound F (1)
2.2.2 Compound C (2)
2.2.3 Compound D (2)
2.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of each product formed during the complete
combustion of compound D. (2)
2.4 Write down the structural formula of:
2.4.1 Compound B (2)
2.4.2 A CHAIN ISOMER of compound A (2)
2.5 A laboratory assistant uses bromine water to distinguish between compounds D and
E. She adds bromine water to a sample of each in two different test tubes. She
observes that the one compound decolourises the bromine water immediately, whilst
the other one only reacts after placing the test tube in direct sunlight. Write down the:
2.5.1 Letter (D or E) of the compound that will immediately decolourise the
bromine water (1)
2.5.2 Name of the type of reaction that takes place in the test tube containing
compound D (1)
2.5.3 Structural formula of the organic product formed in the test tube containing
compound E (2)
[18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 12 FS/2019

QUESTION 3
The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.
H

H C H

H H O H H H H H H

A H C C C O H B H C C C C C C C H

H H H H Cℓ H H H

H C H

H
C C4H8 D CH3CH2COCH3
H H H H H H

E CH3CH(CH3)CH2OH F H C C C C C C H

H H H H H H
Use the information in the table (where applicable) to answer the questions that follow.
3.1 Write down the LETTER that represents a compound that:
(A compound may be used more than once.)
3.1.1 Is a haloalkane (1)
3.1.2 Has a hydroxyl group as functional group (1)
3.1.3 Belongs to the same homologous series as ethanoic acid (1)
3.2 Write down the:
3.2.1 IUPAC name of compound B (3)
3.2.2 IUPAC name of compound E (2)
3.2.3 Structural formula of the functional group of compound D (1)
3.3 Compound C has CHAIN and POSITIONAL isomers.
3.3.1 Define the term positional isomer. (2)
3.3.2 Write down the IUPAC name of each of the TWO positional isomers of
compound C. (4)
3.3.3 Write down the structural formula of a chain isomer of compound C. (2)
3.4 Compound F reacts at high pressure and high temperature to form compounds P and
Q as given below.
H H H H H H
H H
H C C C C C C H P + C C
H H
H H H H H H
Compound F Compound Q
Write down the:
3.4.1 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
3.4.2 IUPAC name of compound Q (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 13 FS/2019

3.4.3 Molecular formula of compound P (1)

Compound Q is the monomer of a polymer used to make plastic bags.
3.4.4 Write down the NAME and CONDENSED FORMULA of this polymer. (3)
[23]
QUESTION 4
The letters A to D in the table below represent four organic compounds.

H CH3 H H H H O H

H C C C C H
A H C C C C C C H B
H H H
CH3 H CH2CH3 H
C CH3CH2CHO D Butane
4.1 Write down the:
4.1.1 Letter that represents a ketone (1)
4.1.2 Structural formula of the functional group of compound C (1)
4.1.3 General formula of the homologous series to which compound A belongs (1)
4.1.4 IUPAC name of compound A (3)
4.1.5 IUPAC name of compound B (2)
4.2 Compound D is a gas used in cigarette lighters.
4.2.1 To which homologous series does compound D belong? (1)
4.2.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA and IUPAC NAME of a
structural isomer of compound D. (4)
4.2.3 Is the isomer in QUESTION 4.2.2 a CHAIN, POSITIONAL or
FUNCTIONAL isomer? (1)
4.3 Compound D reacts with bromine (Br2) to form 2-bromobutane. Write down the:
4.3.1 Name of the homologous series to which 2-bromobutane belongs (1)
4.3.2 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
[16]
QUESTION 5
5.1 Consider the organic compounds represented by the letters A to C below.
A Cℓ H H

H C C C H

H H

H H H H H

H C C C C C C H

H H H Cℓ H H
B H H H H C H H

H C C C C O H H C C C H

H H H H H O H
Write down the:
5.1.1 Name of the homologous series to which compound C belongs (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 14 FS/2019

5.1.2 IUPAC name of compound A (3)

5.1.3 Structural formula of a tertiary alcohol that is a structural isomer of
compound B (2)
5.2 An alcohol and methanoic acid are heated in the presence of concentrated sulphuric
acid to form an ester.
5.2.1 What is the role of the concentrated sulphuric acid in this reaction? (1)
5.2.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic product formed. (1)
The ester contains 6,67% hydrogen (H), 40% carbon (C) and 53,33% oxygen (O).
The molar mass of the ester is 60 g·mol-1. Use a calculation to determine its:
5.2.3 Empirical formula (5)
5.2.4 Molecular formula (3)
Write down the:
5.2.5 Structural formula of methanoic acid (1)
5.2.6 IUPAC name of the ester (2)
[19]
QUESTION 6
Consider the organic compounds A to F below.
H H
CH3 H
A C C B H C C C C H
CH3 CH3
H CH3
C CH3CH2CH2CH2OH D 2,2-dimethylpropane

H O H H

E H C O C C C H F CH3CHC(CH3)2

H H H

6.1 Write down the LETTER that represents a compound that:

4

6.1.1 Has a carbonyl group (1)

6.1.2 Is an alcohol (1)
6.1.3 Is a CHAIN ISOMER of CH3(CH2)3CH3 (1)
6.2 Write down the:
6.2.1 IUPAC name of compound B (2)
6.2.2 Structural formula of compound F (2)
6.2.3 IUPAC name of a POSITIONAL isomer of compound A (3)
6.3 Compound E is formed when a carboxylic acid reacts with another
organic compound.

Write down the:

6.3.1 Homologous series to which compound E belongs (1)
6.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst used for the preparation of compound
E (1)
6.3.3 IUPAC name of compound E (2)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 15 FS/2019

QUESTION 7
The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.
H H

H C C C H
A B Ethyl ethanoate
H
H C H

H
C 2,3-dibromo-3-methylpentane D Polyethene

H O H H H H O H

E H C C O C H F H C C C C O

H H H H H
7.1 Write down the LETTER that represents the following:
7.1.1 A hydrocarbon (1)
7.1.2 A functional isomer of compound F (1)
7.1.3 A compound which belongs to the same homologous series as compound
B (1)
7.1.4 A plastic (1)
7.2 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of EACH of the following:
7.2.1 Compound C (3)
7.2.2 The acid used to prepare compound B (2)
7.2.3 The monomer used to make compound D (2)
7.3 Compound A reacts with an unknown reactant, X, to form 2-methylpropane.
Write down the:
7.3.1 NAME of reactant X (1)
7.3.2 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
[13]
QUESTION 8
8.1 Define the term functional group of organic compounds. (2)
8.2 Write down the:
8.2.1 Structural formula of the functional group of aldehydes (1)
8.2.2 Name of the functional group of carboxylic acids (1)
8.3 The IUPAC name of an organic compound is 2,4-dimethylhexan-3-one. For this
compound, write down the:
8.3.1 Homologous series to which it belongs (1)
8.3.2 Structural formula (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 16 FS/2019

8.4 Write down the IUPAC names of the following compounds:

8.4.1

(3)
8.4.2

(2)
[13]
QUESTION 9
The letters A to F in the table below represent six organic compounds.
H CH3 CH3

H C C C CH2
A CH3CH2CH2CHO B

H CH3

C C4H8O D C3H8O

H H H H
O
H C C C C H
E
CH3CH2CH2 C O CH2CH2CH3
F
H O H H

H
9.1 Write down the letter that represents EACH of the following:
9.1.1 A hydrocarbon (1)
9.1.2 An alcohol (1)
9.1.3 An ester (1)
9.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:
9.2.1 Compound A (1)
9.2.2 Compound B (3)
9.3 Compound C is a functional isomer of compound A. Write down the structural
formula of compound C. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 17 FS/2019

9.4 Compound D is used as one of the reactants to prepare compound F. Write down
the:
9.4.1 Type of reaction which takes place to prepare compound F (1)
9.4.2 IUPAC name of compound D (2)
9.4.3 Structural formula of the other organic reactant used (2)
9.4.4 IUPAC name of compound F (2)
[16]
QUESTION 10
10.1 Study the structural formula below. For this compound, write down the:

10.1.1 Homologous series to which it

belongs (1)
10.1.2 IUPAC name (2)
10.1.3 IUPAC name of the organic acid
used in its preparation (1)
10.1.4 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of its straight chain (unbranched) functional
isomer (2)
10.2 Write down the structural formula of 4-methylpentan-2-one. (3)
10.3 Consider the structural formula below. For this compound, write down the:

10.3.1 General formula of the homologous

series to which it belongs (1)
10.3.2 IUPAC name (3)

[13]
QUESTION 11
The letters A to E in the table below represent six organic compounds.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 18 FS/2019

11.1 Write down the LETTER that represents EACH of the following:
11.1.1 A tertiary alcohol (1)
11.1.2 An aldehyde (1)
11.1.3 A ketone (1)
11.1.4 A functional isomer of compound B (1)
11.2 Write down the IUPAC name of:
11.2.1 Compound B (1)
11.2.2 Compound E (4)
11.3 Define positional isomers. (2)
11.4 Write down the STRUCTURAL FORMULA of:
11.4.1 A positional isomer of compound C (2)
11.4.2 Compound D (2)
11.4.3 The organic acid that will react with compound C to form butyl (2)
propanoate [17]
QUESTION 12
Next to each letter, A to F, in the table below is the molecular formula of an organic compound.

12.1 Choose a molecular formula above that represents an organic compound below.
Write down only the letter (A to F) next to the question numbers.
12.1.1 A haloalkane (1)
12.1.2 An alcohol (1)
12.1.3 An unsaturated hydrocarbon (1)
12.1.4 An aldehyde (1)
12.1.5 A product of thermal cracking of compound C (1)
12.2 If compound F is a carboxylic acid, write down the following:
12.2.1 The structural formula of a FUNCTIONAL isomer of F (2)
12.2.2 The IUPAC name of a FUNCTIONAL isomer of F (2)
12.3 Compound B is a monomer used to make a polymer. Write down the:
12.3.1 Definition of a polymer (2)
12.3.2 IUPAC name of the polymer (1)
12.3.3 Balanced equation for the polymerisation reaction (3)
12.4 Compound A is used as a reactant in the production of compound D. Name the type
of reaction that takes place. (1)
12.5 State TWO changes that can be made to the reaction conditions in QUESTION 12.4 (2)
to obtain compound B, instead of D, as product. [18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 19 FS/2019

QUESTION 13
A test tube containing a straight chain organic acid X, ethanol and a catalyst is heated in a
water bath, as illustrated below.

Organic compound Y is produced according to the following equation:

X + C2H5OH ⟶ Y + H2O

13.1 Give a reason why the test tube is heated in a water bath instead of directly over the
flame. (1)

13.2 Write down the:

13.3.1 Type of reaction that takes place here (1)
13.3.2 FORMULA of the catalyst needed (1)
13.3.3 Homologous series to which compound Y belongs (1)
The molecular mass of compound Y is 144 g∙mol-1 and its empirical formula is C4H8O.

13.3 Determine the molecular formula of compound Y. (2)

13.4 Write down the IUPAC name of compound Y. (2)
13.5 Write down the structural formula of the organic acid X. (2)
[10]

ORGANIC MOLECULES: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

QUESTION 1

1.1 Give a reason why alkanes are saturated hydrocarbons. (1)

1.2 Write down the structural formula of:
1.2.1 The functional group of alcohols (1)
1.2.2 A tertiary alcohol that is a structural isomer of butan-1-ol (2)
1.3 Learners investigate factors that influence the boiling points of alkanes and alcohols.
In one of the investigations they determine the boiling points of the first three alkanes.
1.3.1 Write down an investigative question for this investigation. (2)
1.3.2 Fully explain why the boiling point increases from methane to propane. (3)
1.4 The learners find that the boiling point of propan-1-ol is higher than that of propane.
Explain this observation by referring to the TYPE of INTERMOLECULAR FORCES
present in each of these compounds. (3)
[12]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 20 FS/2019

QUESTION 2
Learners use compounds A to C, shown in the table below, to investigate a factor which
influences the boiling point of organic compounds.
A CH3CH2CH2CH3
B CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3
C CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH3
2.1 Which ONE of the compounds (A, B or C) has the highest boiling point? (1)
2.2 For this investigation, write down the:
2.2.1 Independent variable (1)
2.2.2 Dependent variable (1)
2.3 Write down the name of the type of Van der Waals force that occurs between the
molecules of compound B. (1)
2.4 How will the vapour pressure of 2-methylpentane compare to that of compound C?
Write down only HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
The learners now compare the boiling points of compounds D and E, shown in the table below.
D CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2OH
E CH3CH2CH2COOH
2.5 How does the boiling point of compound D compare to that of compound E? Write
down HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. Fully explain the answer. (4)
[9]
QUESTION 3
The table below shows five organic compounds represented by the letters A to E.
A CH4
B CH3CH3
C CH3CH2CH3
D CH3CH2CH2CH3
E CH3CH2OH
3.1 Is compound B SATURATED or UNSATURATED? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
Consider the boiling points of compounds A to E given in random order below and use them,
where applicable, to answer the questions that follow.
0 °C - 162 °C - 42 °C - 89 °C 78 °C
3.2 Write down the boiling point of:
3.2.1 Compound C (1)
3.2.2 Compound E (1)
3.3 Explain the difference in boiling points of compounds C and E by referring to the TYPE
of intermolecular forces present in EACH of these compounds. (3)
3.4 Does vapour pressure INCREASE or DECREASE from compounds A to D? Fully
explain the answer. (4)
3.5 How will the vapour pressure of 2-methylpropane compare to the vapour pressure of
compound D? Write down only HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
[12]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 21 FS/2019

QUESTION 4
Four compounds of comparable molecular mass are used to investigate the effect of functional
groups on vapour pressure. The results obtained are shown in the table below.
VAPOUR PRESSURE
COMPOUND
(kPa at 20 °C)
A Butane 204
B Propan-2-one 24,6
C Propan-1-ol 2
D Ethanoic acid 1,6
4.1 Define the term functional group of an organic compound. (2)
4.2 Which ONE of the compounds (A, B, C or D) in the table has the:
4.2.1 Highest boiling point
(Refer to the vapour pressures in the table to give a reason for the answer.) (2)
4.2.2 Weakest intermolecular forces (1)
4.3 Refer to the type of intermolecular forces to explain the difference between the vapour
pressure of compound A and compound B. (3)
4.4 The vapour pressures of compounds C and D are much lower than those of
compounds A and B. Name the type of intermolecular force in A and B that is
responsible for this difference. (1)
4.5 Briefly explain the difference in vapour pressure between compound C and compound
D. (2)
3
4.6 During a combustion reaction in a closed container of adjustable volume, 8 cm of
compound A (butane) reacts in excess oxygen according to the following balanced
equation: 2C4H10(g) + 13O2(g) → 8CO2(g) + 10H2O(g)
If the initial volume of the oxygen in the container was 60 cm 3, calculate the TOTAL
volume of the gases that are present in the container at the end of the reaction. All the
gases in the container are at the same temperature and pressure. (5)
[16]
QUESTION 5
5.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)
5.2 What is the relationship between strength of intermolecular forces and boiling point? (1)
The relationship between strength of intermolecular forces and boiling point is investigated using
four organic compounds from different homologous series. The compounds and their boiling
points are given in the table below.
COMPOUND BOILING POINT (°C)
A Propane - 42
B Propan-2-one 56
C Propan-1-ol 97
D Propanoic acid 141
5.3 Refer to the TYPE and the STRENGTH of intermolecular forces to explain the
difference in boiling points between:
5.3.1 Compounds A and B (3)
5.3.2 Compounds C and D (3)
5.4 Is compound B a GAS or a LIQUID at room temperature? (1)
[10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 22 FS/2019

QUESTION 6
The relationship between boiling point and the number of carbon atoms in straight chain
molecules of alkanes, carboxylic acids and alcohols is investigated. Curves P, Q and R are
obtained.
GRAPH OF BOILING POINT VERSUS NUMBER OF C ATOMS

500 Curve R
Curve Q
400
Boiling point (K)

Curve P

300

200

100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of C atoms
6.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)
6.2 For curve P, write down a conclusion that can be drawn from the above results. (2)
6.3 Identify the curve (P, Q or R) that represents each of the following:
6.3.1 Alkanes (1)
6.3.2 Carboxylic acids (1)
6.4 Explain the answer to QUESTION 6.3.2 by referring to the:
 Types of intermolecular forces present in alkanes, carboxylic acids and alcohols
 Relative strengths of these intermolecular forces
 Energy needed (5)
[11]
QUESTION 7
The boiling points of three isomers are given in the table below.
ISOMERS BOILING POINT (°C)
A 2,2-dimethylpropane 9
B 2-methylbutane 28
C pentane 36
7.1 Define the term structural isomer. (2)
7.2 What type of isomers (POSITIONAL, CHAIN or FUNCTIONAL) are these three
compounds? (1)
7.3 Explain the trend in the boiling points from compound A to compound C. (3)
7.4 Which ONE of the three compounds (A, B or C) has the highest vapour pressure?
Refer to the data in the table to give a reason for the answer. (2)
7.5 Use MOLECULAR FORMULAE and write down a balanced equation for the complete
combustion of compound B. (3)
[11]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 23 FS/2019

QUESTION 8
The boiling points of some organic compounds are given in the table below.
Y represents an unknown boiling point.
COMPOUND BOILING POINT (°C)
A Methanol 64,7
B Ethanol 78,3
C Propan-1-ol 97,2
D Butan-1-ol 117,7
E Butan-2-ol 99,5
F 2-methylpropan-1-ol Y
G 2-methylpropan-2-ol 82,5
8.1 For the compounds listed above, write down the:
8.1.1 Structural formula of compound F (3)
8.1.2 LETTER that represents a POSITIONAL isomer of compound E (1)
8.1.3 LETTER that represents a CHAIN isomer of compound E (1)
8.2 The boiling points increase from compound A to compound D.
8.2.1 Give a reason for this increase in terms of the molecular structure. (1)
8.2.2 Name the intermolecular force in these compounds responsible for this
increase. (1)
8.3 Consider the boiling points given below.
85 °C 108 °C 122 °C
8.3.1 From these boiling points, choose the boiling point represented by Y in the
table above. (1)
8.2.2 Fully explain how you arrived at the answer to QUESTION 8.3.1. (4)
8.4 Hydrogen bonding is responsible for the relatively high boiling points of compounds A
to G in comparison with hydrocarbons of similar molecular size.
Draw TWO structural formulae of compound A. Use a dotted line to show the hydrogen
bonding between the two structural formulae. (2)
8.5 Compound B reacts with propanoic acid in the presence of concentrated sulphuric
acid. Write down the:
8.5.1 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
8.5.2 Structural formula of the organic product formed (2)
[17]
QUESTION 9
Learners investigate factors which influence the boiling points of alcohols.
They use equal volumes of each of the alcohols and heat them separately in a water bath. The
temperature at which each boils is measured. The results obtained are shown in the table below.
ALCOHOLS BOILING POINTS OF ALCOHOLS (°C)
Butan-1-ol 117,7
Pentan-1-ol 138,5
Hexan-1-ol 157,0
9.1 Define the term boiling point. (2)
9.2 What property of alcohols requires them to be heated in a water bath? (1)
9.3 The boiling points of the alcohols are compared with each other.
9.3.1 What structural requirements must the alcohols meet to make it a fair
comparison? (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 24 FS/2019

9.3.2 Fully explain the trend in the boiling points. (3)

9.4 How will the boiling point of hexan-1-ol be affected if the volume of hexan-1-ol used is
doubled? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
9.5 In another investigation the learners compare the boiling points of hexan-1-ol and
hexanal.
9.5.1 Write down the independent variable for this comparison. (1)
9.5.2 They find that the boiling point of hexan-1-ol is higher than that of hexanal.
Fully explain this observation. (4)
[14]
QUESTION 10
The vapour pressure versus temperature graph below was obtained for four straight chain
(unbranched) alkanes (P, Q, R and S). FROM P TO S, EACH COMPOUND DIFFERS FROM
THE PREVIOUS COMPOUND BY A –CH2 GROUP.
The vapour pressures are measured in mmHg. Atmospheric pressure is 760 mmHg.

10.1 Give a reason why alkanes are said to be SATURATED. (1)

10.2 Define vapour pressure. (2)
10.3 Use the information in the graph above to answer the following questions.
10.3.1 What is the effect of an increase in temperature on vapour pressure?
Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or NO EFFECT. (1)
10.3.2 Which compound has a boiling point of approximately 68 °C? Give a
reason for the answer. (2)
10.3.3 Which compound has the longest chain length? Fully explain the answer. (4)
10.4 Compound P has FIVE carbon atoms.
10.4.1 Draw the structural formula of a chain isomer of P. Write down the IUPAC
name of this isomer. (3)
10.4.2 How will the vapour pressure of this isomer compare with that of compound
P? Choose from HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 25 FS/2019

QUESTION 11
Study the vapour pressure versus temperature graphs for three organic compounds, X, Y and
Z, below which belong to different homologous series. Atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa.

11.1 Write down the vapour pressure of compound Y at 90 °C. (1)

11.2 The graphs can be used to determine the boiling points of the three compounds.
11.2.1 Define boiling point. (2)
11.2.2 Determine the boiling point of compound X. (1)
11.3 The homologous series to which the three compounds of similar molecular masses
belong, were identified in random order as: alcohol; carboxylic acid; ketone
11.3.1 Which compound (X, Y or Z) is the carboxylic acid? (1)
11.3.2 Explain the answer to QUESTION 11.3.1 by referring to the type of
intermolecular forces in compounds of each of the homologous series
above. (4)
11.3.3 Compound X has three carbon atoms per molecule. Write down the IUPAC (1)
name of compound X. [10]
QUESTION 12
The boiling points of straight-chain alkanes and straight-chain alcohols are compared in the
table.

12.1 Explain the increase in boiling points of the alkanes, as indicated in the table. (3)
12.2 Explain the difference between the boiling points of an alkane and an alcohol, each (4)
having THREE carbon atoms per molecule, by referring to the TYPE of intermolecular
forces.
12.3 Does the vapour pressure of the alcohols INCREASE or DECREASE with an increase
in the number of carbon atoms? (1)
12.4 How will the boiling point of 2-methylpropane compare to that of its chain isomer?
Write down HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. Give a reason for the (2)
answer by referring to the structural differences between the two compounds. [10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 26 FS/2019

QUESTION 13
The boiling points of different organic compounds are given below.

13.1 Define boiling point. (2)

13.2 Write down the:
13.2.1 Name of the FUNCTIONAL GROUP of these compounds (1)
13.2.2 IUPAC name of compound C (1)
13.2.1 Structural formula of the FUNCTIONAL isomer of compound B (2)
13.3 Which ONE of the compounds, A or B or C, has the highest vapour pressure? Refer
to the data in the table to give a reason for the answer. (2)
13.4 The boiling point of compound B is now compared with of compound X.

13.4.1 Besides the conditions used to determine boiling points, give a reason why
this is a fair comparison. (1)
13.4.2 Is compound X a PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY alcohol? Give
a reason for the answer. (2)
13.4.3 Fully explain the difference between the boiling points by referring to the (4)
types of intermolecular forces present in each of these compounds. [15]

ORGANIC MOLECULES: ORGANIC REACTIONS

QUESTION 1
The flow diagram below shows the preparation of an ester using prop-1-ene as a starting
reagent. P, Q, R and S represent different organic reactions.
P Q
Prop-1-ene Propane Haloalkane
Cℓ2
R

Propan-1-ol

Ester
1.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:
1.1.1 Q (1)
1.1.2 R (1)
1.2 For reaction P write down the:
1.2.1 Type of addition reaction (1)
1.2.2 Balanced equation using structural formulae (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 27 FS/2019

1.3 Write down the structural formula of the haloalkane formed in reaction Q. (2)
1.4 In reaction S propan-1-ol reacts with ethanoic acid to form the ester.
For this reaction write down the:
1.4.1 Name of the reaction that takes place (1)
1.4.2 FORMULA or NAME of the catalyst needed (1)
1.4.3 Structural formula of the ester formed (2)
1.4.4 IUPAC name of the ester formed (2)
1.5 The propan-1-ol formed in reaction R can be converted to prop-1-ene. Write down the
FORMULA or NAME of the inorganic reagent needed. (1)
[15]
QUESTION 2
In the flow diagram below, but-1-ene is used as starting material in the preparation of compound
A.
reaction 1
CH3 ― CH2 ― CH = CH2
H2O; H2SO4

reaction 2 HCℓ Compound A

reaction 3
Compound B

2.1 Is but-1-ene a SATURATED or UNSATURATED compound? Give a reason for the

answer. (2)
2.2 Compound A is the major product formed in reaction 1.
Write down the:
2.2.1 Structural formula of compound A (2)
2.2.2 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
2.3 For compound B, write down the:
2.3.1 IUPAC name (2)
2.3.2 Structural formula of the positional isomer (2)
2.4 For reaction 3, write down:
2.4.1 TWO reaction conditions needed (2)
2.4.2 The type of reaction that occurs (1)
2.4.3 A balanced equation, using molecular formulae (3)
[15]
QUESTION 3
Consider the incomplete equations of two reactions below. X represents the organic product
formed in reaction 1, which is a SUBSTITUTION REACTION. In reaction 2, X reacts with
reactant Y as shown.
strong base
Reaction 1: C2H5Br NaBr + X

Concentrated H2SO4
Reaction 2: X + Y C3H6O2 + H2O
3.1 Consider reaction 1. Write down the:
3.1.1 Type of substitution reaction that takes place (1)
3.1.2 TWO reaction conditions (2)
3.1.3 IUPAC name of compound X (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 28 FS/2019

3.2 Consider reaction 2. Write down the:

3.2.1 Type of reaction that takes place (1)
3.2.2 Structural formula of compound Y (2)
3.2.3 IUPAC name of the organic product (2)
[9]
QUESTION 4
4.1 The flow diagram below shows two organic reactions. The letter P represents an
organic compound.
Reaction 1
Alcohol + P Ethyl propanoate

Reaction 2

Alkene

Use the information in the flow diagram to answer the questions that follow. Write down
the:
4.1.1 Type of reaction of which Reaction 1 is an example (1)
4.1.2 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of the functional group of ethyl propanoate (1)
4.1.3 IUPAC name of compound P (1)
Reaction 2 takes place in the presence of an acid catalyst and heat.
Write down the:
4.1.4 Type of reaction of which Reaction 2 is an example (1)
4.1.5 NAME or FORMULA of the acid catalyst (1)
4.1.6 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of the alkene (2)
4.2 The condensed formula of a polymer is shown below.

H H

C C

H H
n
Write down the:
4.2.1 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of the monomer that is used to prepare the
above polymer (2)
4.2.2 Type of polymerisation reaction (ADDITION or CONDENSATION) that is (1)
used to prepare this polymer [10]
QUESTION 5
The flow diagram below shows different organic reactions using CH 2 = CH2 as the starting
reactant. X, Y and Z represent different organic compounds.
Reaction 4 Reaction 1
C2H6 CH2 = CH2 Y

Reaction 2 + HCℓ
Reaction 3
X Z

5.1 During Reaction 1, CH2 = CH2 undergoes polymerisation to form compound Y.

For this reaction, write down the:
5.1.1 Type of polymerisation (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 29 FS/2019

5.1.2 NAME of compound Y (1)

5.2 For Reaction 2, write down the:
5.2.1 IUPAC name of compound X (2)
5.2.2 Type of addition reaction of which this is an example (1)
5.3 During Reaction 3, compound X reacts with excess hot water. Write down the:
5.3.1 STRUCTURAL FORMULA of compound Z (2)
5.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the INORGANIC product (1)
5.4 Reaction 4 is an addition reaction.
5.4.1 Is C2H6 a SATURATED or an UNSATURATED compound? Give a reason
for the answer. (2)
5.4.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the INORGANIC reactant needed
for this reaction. (1)
5.4.3 Using molecular formulae, write down a balanced equation for the
complete combustion of C2H6. (3)
[14]
QUESTION 6
The flow diagram below shows how prop-1-ene can be used to prepare other organic
compounds.
propane

D C alcohol
compound X prop-1-ene
(major product) (major product)
HBr B
E

F
6.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:
6.1.1 A (1)
6.1.2 D (1)
6.1.3 F (1)
6.2 Write down the:
6.2.1 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst needed for reaction A (1)
6.2.2 NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic reagent needed for reaction B (1)
6.2.3 Type of addition reaction represented by reaction C (1)
6.2.4 IUPAC name of compound X (2)
6.3 Use structural formulae to write down a balanced equation for reaction B. (5)
6.4 Both reactions D and E take place in the presence of a strong base.
State TWO conditions that will favour reaction D over reaction E. (2)
[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 30 FS/2019

QUESTION 7
Butane (C4H10) is produced in industry by the THERMAL cracking of long-chain hydrocarbon
molecules, as shown in the equation below. X represents an organic compound that is
produced.
C10H22 → X + C4H10
7.1 Write down:
7.1.1 ONE condition required for THERMAL cracking to take place (1)
7.1.2 The molecular formula of compound X (1)
7.1.3 The homologous series to which compound X belongs (1)
7.2 A mixture of the two gases, compound X and butane, is bubbled through bromine
water, Br2(aq), in a conical flask, as illustrated below. THE REACTION IS CARRIED
OUT IN A DARKENED ROOM.
Syringe
X and C4H10

Br2(aq)

The colour of the bromine water changes from reddish brown to colourless when the
mixture of the two gases is bubbled through it.
Which ONE of the gases (X or BUTANE) decolorises the bromine water? Explain the
answer. (4)
7.3 Study the flow diagram below, which represents various organic reactions, and answer
the questions that follow.
OH
I
CH3CH2CHCH3

Butane chlorination
Compound P III
C4H10

II Compound Q
concentrated (major product)
NaOH
Write down the:
7.3.1 IUPAC name of compound P (2)
7.3.2 Type of reaction labelled I (1)
7.3.3 Structural formula of compound Q (2)
7.3.4 The type of addition reaction represented by reaction III (1)
[13]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 31 FS/2019

QUESTION 8
The flow diagram below shows how an alkene can be used to prepare other organic
compounds. The letters A to G represent different organic reactions.

8.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:

8.1.1 A (1)
8.1.2 B (1)
8.1.3 E (1)
8.2 Write down the IUPAC name of compound X. (2)
8.3 For reaction D, write down:
8.3.1 The type of elimination reaction (1)
8.3.2 TWO reaction conditions (2)
8.4 Write down the:
8.4.1 FORMULA of an inorganic reactant needed for reaction F (1)
8.4.2 Balanced equation, using structural formulae, for reaction G (4)
[13]
QUESTION 9
9.1 Consider the reactions represented in the flow diagram below.
Br

CH3 C CH3

CH3
reaction 2
reaction 1

concentrated Compound B reaction 3

Alcohol A C4H8Br2
H2SO4 (An alkene)
Write down the:
9.1.1 Type of reaction represented by reaction 1 (1)
9.1.2 NAME or FORMULA of the inorganic reactant needed for reaction 1 (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 32 FS/2019

9.1.3 Type of alcohol (PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY) of which

alcohol A is an example (1)
9.1.4 Type of reaction represented by reaction 2 (1)
9.1.5 IUPAC name of compound B (2)
9.1.6 Type of addition reaction represented by reaction 3 (1)
9.1.7 Balanced equation for reaction 3 using structural formulae (4)
9.2 A wide range of synthetic polymers are produced by combining large numbers of
similar small organic molecules bonded to each other in a repeating pattern.
Polymer C below is an example of such a polymer.
H H

C C

H H n
Polymer C
Write down:
9.2.1 ONE word for the underlined phrase (1)
9.2.2 The homologous series to which the 'small organic molecules' used to
produce polymer C belong (1)
9.2.3 The type of polymerisation which takes place to produce polymer C (1)
[14]
QUESTION 10
The flow diagram below shows how an alcohol (compound P) can be used to prepare other
organic compounds. The letters A to E represent different organic reactions. X, Y and Z are
organic compounds.

10.1 Is compound P a PRIMARY, SECONDARY or TERTIARY alcohol? Give a reason for

the answer.
10.2 Write down the type of:
10.2.1 Elimination reaction represented by A (1)
10.2.2 Addition reaction represented by B (1)
10.2.3 Elimination reaction represented by D (1)
10.3 Sodium hydroxide is used as one of the reactants in reaction C.
10.3.1 What type of reaction takes place here? (1)
10.3.2 State the TWO reaction conditions for this reaction. (2)
Terms, definitions, questions and answers
Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 33 FS/2019

10.3.3 Write down the IUPAC name of compound X. (2)

10.4 Write down the FORMULA of an inorganic reactant needed for reaction D. (1)
10.5 Using STRUCTURAL FORMULAE, write down a balanced equation for reaction E. (3)
10.6 Write down the IUPAC name of compound Z. (1)
[15]
QUESTION 11
Consider the incomplete equations for reactions I to IV below. P, Q, R and S are organic
compounds.

11.1 Define a cracking reaction. (2)

11.2 Write down the reaction number (I, II, III or IV) that represents EACH of the
following:
11.2.1 A cracking reaction (1)
11.2.2 An addition reaction (1)
11.2.3 A substitution reaction (1)
11.3 Write down:
11.3.1 ONE reaction condition for reaction I (1)
11.3.2 The compound (P, Q, R or S) that represents an unsaturated hydrocarbon (1)
11.3.3 The IUPAC name of compound P (1)
11.3.4 The molecular formula of compound R (2)
11.3.5 The structural formula of compound Q (2)
11.3.6 The structural formula of compound S (2)
[14]
QUESTION 12
Propan-1-ol can undergo a number of organic reactions, as indicated by the letters A to D in the
diagram below.

12.1 Write down the type of reaction represented by:

12.1.1 A (1)
12.1.2 B (1)
12.1.3 C (1)
Terms, definitions, questions and answers
Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 34 FS/2019

12.1.4 D (1)
12.2 For reaction C, write down the:
12.2.1 Function of H2SO4 (1)
12.2.2 IUPAC name of the organic product (2)
12.2.3 Structural formula of the other organic reactant (2)
12.3 Use STRUCTURAL FORMULAE for all organic reactants and products to write a
balanced equation for reaction A. (5)
[14]
QUESTION 13
13.1 Three reactions of organic compounds from the same homologous series are shown
below.

13.1.1 Define a homologous series. (2)

13.1.2 Name the type of reaction represented by I. (1)
13.1.3 Write down the formula of the inorganic compound P. (1)
13.1.4 Give the structural formula of a POSITIONAL isomer of 2-bromobutane. (2)
13.1.5 Using molecular formulae, write down a balanced equation for reaction II. (3)
Reaction III is an example of a cracking reaction.
13.1.6 Define a cracking reaction. (2)
13.1.7 Give the structural formula of organic compound Q. (2)
13.2 Study the flow diagram below.

13.2.1 Write down the IUPAC name of compound R. (2)

13.2.2 Compound R reacts in the presence of concentrated phosphoric acid to
form an alkene. Write down the structural formula of the MAJOR (2)
PRODUCT in this reaction. [17]

REACTION RATE AND ENERGY IN CHEMICAL REACTIONS

QUESTION 1
1.1 Define the term reaction rate in words. (2)
Learners use the reaction between IMPURE POWDERED calcium carbonate and excess
hydrochloric acid to investigate reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
CaCO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → CaCℓ2(aq) + H2O(ℓ) + CO2(g)
They perform four experiments under different conditions of concentration, mass and
temperature as shown in the table below. They use identical apparatus in the four experiments
and measure the volume of gas released in each experiment.
EXPERIMENT
1 2 3 4
-3
Concentration of acid (mol·dm ) 1 0,5 1 1
Mass of impure calcium carbonate (g) 15 15 15 25
Initial temperature of acid (°C) 30 30 40 40

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 35 FS/2019

1.2 The results of experiments 1 and 3 are compared in the investigation. Write down the:
1.2.1 Independent variable (1)
1.2.2 Dependent variable (1)
1.3 Use the collision theory to explain why the reaction rate in experiment 4 will be higher
than that in experiment 3. (3)
The learners obtain graphs A, B, C and D below from their results.
A

B
Volume CO2 (cm3)

C
D

Time (s)

1.4 Which ONE of the graphs (A, B, C or D) represents experiment 1? Fully explain the
answer by comparing experiment 1 with experiments 2, 3 and 4. (6)
1.5 When the reaction in experiment 4 reaches completion, the volume of gas formed is
4,5 dm3. Assume that the molar gas volume at 40 °C is equal to 25,7 dm3. Calculate (5)
the mass of the impurities present in the calcium carbonate. [18]
QUESTION 2
A group of learners uses the reaction of EXCESS hydrochloric acid (HCℓ) with zinc (Zn) to
investigate factors which influence reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)
They use the same volume of hydrochloric acid and 1,2 g of zinc in each of five experiments.
The reaction conditions and temperature readings before and after completion of the reaction in
each experiment are summarised in the table below.
REACTION CONDITIONS
Time
Experiment Concentration of Temperature (°C) State of division
(s)
HCℓ (mol·dm-3) Before After of the 1,2 g of Zn
1 0,5 20 34 granules 50
2 0,5 20 35 powder 10
3 0,8 20 36 powder 6
4 0,5 35 50 granules 8
5 0,5 20 34 granules 11
2.1 Is the reaction between hydrochloric acid and zinc EXOTHERMIC or
ENDOTHERMIC? Give a reason for the answer by referring to the data in the table. (2)
2.2 Give a reason for the difference in reaction rate observed for Experiments 1 and 2. (1)
2.3 The learners compare the results of Experiments 1 and 3 to draw a conclusion
regarding the effect of concentration on reaction rate. Give a reason why this is not a
fair comparison. (1)
2.4 How does the rate of the reaction in Experiment 5 compare to that in Experiment 1?
Write down FASTER THAN, SLOWER THAN or EQUAL TO.
Write down the factor responsible for the difference in the rate of reaction and fully
explain, by referring to the collision theory, how this factor affects reaction rate. (5)
2.5 Calculate the rate at which the hydrochloric acid reacts in Experiment 4 in mol·s-1. (6)
[15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 36 FS/2019

QUESTION 3
A group of learners uses the reaction of clean magnesium ribbon with dilute hydrochloric acid to
investigate factors that influence reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2(g) ∆H < 0
3.1 Is the above reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Give a reason for the
answer. (2)
3.2 In one of the experiments 5 g magnesium ribbon was added to the hydrochloric acid
solution.
3.2.1 If 30 cm3 dilute hydrochloric acid solution of concentration 1,5 mol∙dm-3 is
USED UP in 1 minute, calculate the average reaction rate in mol∙s -1. (5)
The volume of hydrogen gas produced as a function of time in this experiment is
represented by graph S below. (The graph is NOT drawn to scale.)
S
Volume (cm3)

Time (s)
0 t1 t2 t3
3.2.2 How does the rate of the reaction change between:
(Write down INCREASES, DECREASES or NO CHANGE.)
(a) t1 and t2
Use the collision theory to explain the answer. (4)
(b) t2 and t3
Give a reason for the answer without referring to the graph. (2)
3
3.3 In another experiment they add 5 g of magnesium to 30 cm of dilute hydrochloric acid
of concentration 1,5 mol∙dm -3. They obtained graph T below. (The graph is NOT drawn
to scale.)

T
Volume (cm3)

Time (s)

Give TWO possible reasons why graph T differs from graph S. (2)
[15]
QUESTION 4
Dilute acids, indicated in the table below, react with EXCESS zinc in each of the three
experiments to produce hydrogen gas. The zinc is completely covered with the acid in each
experiment.
EXPERIMENT DILUTE ACID
1 100 cm of 0,1 mol∙dm-3 H2SO4
3

2 50 cm3 of 0,2 mol∙dm-3 H2SO4

3 100 cm3 of 0,1 mol∙dm-3 HCℓ
The volume of hydrogen gas produced is measured in each experiment.
4.1 Name TWO essential apparatuses needed to determine the rate of hydrogen
production. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 37 FS/2019

The graph below was obtained for Experiment 1.

Experiment 1

Volume (cm3)
Time (s)
0 t1 t2 t3
Use this graph and answer the questions that follow.
4.2 At which time (t1, t2 or t3) is the:
4.2.1 Reaction rate the highest (1)
4.2.2 Mass of zinc present in the flask the smallest (1)
4.3 In which time interval, between t1 and t2 OR between t2 and t3, does the largest
volume of hydrogen gas form per second? (1)
4.4 Redraw the graph for Experiment 1 in the ANSWER BOOK. On the same set of axes,
sketch the graphs that will be obtained for Experiments 2 and 3. Clearly label the
three graphs as EXPERIMENT 1, EXPERIMENT 2 and EXPERIMENT 3. (4)
4.5 The initial mass of zinc used in each experiment is 0,8 g. The balanced equation for
the reaction in Experiment 3 is: Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)
4.5.1 Calculate the mass of zinc present in the flask after completion of the
reaction in Experiment 3. (5)
4.5.2 How will the mass of zinc present in the flask after completion
of the reaction in Experiment 2 compare to the answer to
QUESTION 4.5.1? Write down only LARGER THAN, SMALLER THAN or (1)
EQUAL TO. [15]
QUESTION 5
Methanol and hydrochloric acid react according to the following balanced equation:
CH3OH(aq) + HCℓ(aq)  CH3Cℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ)
5.1 State TWO factors that can INCREASE the rate of this reaction. (2)
5.2 Define the term reaction rate. (2)
5.3 The rate of the reaction between methanol and hydrochloric acid is investigated. The
concentration of HCℓ(aq) was measured at different time intervals. The following
results were obtained:
TIME (MINUTES) HCℓ CONCENTRATION (mol∙dm-3)
0 1,90
15 1,45
55 1,10
100 0,85
215 0,60
5.3.1 Calculate the average reaction rate, in (mol∙dm -3)∙min-1 during the
first 15 minutes. (3)
5.3.2 Use the data in the table to draw a graph of concentration versus time on
a graph paper. NOTE: The graph is not a straight line. (3)
5.3.3 From the graph, determine the concentration of HCℓ(aq) at the 40 th minute. (1)
5.3.4 Use the collision theory to explain why the reaction rate decreases with
time. Assume that the temperature remains constant. (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 38 FS/2019

5.3.5 Calculate the mass of CH3Cℓ(aq) in the flask at the 215th minute. The (5)
volume of the reagents remains 60 cm3 during the reaction. [19]
QUESTION 6
The reaction between dilute hydrochloric acid and sodium
thiosulphate (Na2S2O3) is used to investigate one of the factors
flask that influences reaction rate. The balanced equation for the
reaction is:
Na2S2O3(aq) Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + S(s) + H2O(ℓ) + SO2(g)
+ HCℓ(aq) The hydrochloric acid solution is added to the sodium
white paper thiosulphate solution in a flask. The flask is placed over a cross
drawn on a sheet of white paper, as shown in the diagram below.
The time that it takes for the cross to become invisible is
measured to determine the reaction rate.
Four experiments, A to D, are conducted during this investigation. The volumes of reactants
used in each of the four experiments and the times of the reactions are summarised in the table
below.
Volume of Volume of Volume of
Experiment Time (s)
Na2S2O3(aq) (cm3) H2O(ℓ) (cm3) HCℓ(aq) (cm3)
A 25 0 5 50,0
B 20 5 5 62,5
C 15 10 5 83,3
D 10 15 5 125,0
6.1 State TWO factors that can influence the rate of the reaction above. (2)
6.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the product that causes the cross to become
invisible. (1)
6.3 Give a reason why water is added to the reaction mixture in experiments B
to D. (1)
6.4 Write down an investigative question for this investigation. (2)
6.5 In which experiment (A, B, C or D) is the reaction rate the highest? (1)
6.6 Use the collision theory to explain the difference in reaction rate between
experiments B and D. (3)
6.7 The original Na2S2O3 solution was prepared by dissolving 62,50 g Na 2S2O3 crystals in
distilled water in a 250 cm 3 volumetric flask. Calculate the mass of sulphur, S, that will (7)
form in experiment D if Na2S2O3 is the limiting reactant. [17]
QUESTION 7
Hydrogen peroxide, H2O2, decomposes to produce water and oxygen according to the following
balanced equation: 2H2O2(ℓ) → 2H2O(ℓ) + O2(g)
7.1 The activation energy (EA) for this reaction is 75 kJ and the heat of reaction (ΔH) is
–196 kJ.
7.1.1 Define the term activation energy. (2)
Potential energy (kJ)

7.1.2 Redraw the set of axes alongside in your ANSWER

BOOK and then complete the potential energy
diagram for this reaction. Indicate the value of the
H2O2 potential energy of the following on the y-axis:
0  Activated complex
 Products
(The graph does NOT have to be drawn to scale.) (3)

Course of reaction

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 39 FS/2019

When powdered manganese dioxide is added to the reaction mixture, the rate of the
reaction increases.
7.1.3 On the graph drawn for QUESTION 7.1.2, use broken lines to show the
path of the reaction when the manganese dioxide is added. (2)
7.1.4 Use the collision theory to explain how manganese dioxide influences the
rate of decomposition of hydrogen peroxide. (3)
7.2 Graphs A and B below were obtained for the volume of oxygen produced over time
under different conditions.
60 ● ● ● ●
●
Graph A
● ●
50
Volume of oxygen gas (dm3)

● Graph B
40

●
30 ●

20
●

10

Time (s)
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
7.2.1 Calculate the average rate of the reaction (in dm ∙s-1) between
3

t = 10 s and t = 40 s for graph A. (3)

7.2.2 Use the information in graph A to calculate the mass of hydrogen peroxide
used in the reaction. Assume that all the hydrogen peroxide decomposed.
Use 24 dm3·mol-1 as the molar volume of oxygen. (4)
7.2.3 How does the mass of hydrogen peroxide used to obtain graph B compare
to that used to obtain graph A? Choose from GREATER THAN, SMALLER
THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
7.3 Three energy distribution curves for the oxygen gas produced under different
conditions are shown in the graph below. The curve with the solid line represents 1 mol
of oxygen gas at 90 °C.
Choose the curve (P or Q) that best
P
Number of molecules

represents EACH of the following situations:

7.3.1 1 mol of oxygen gas produced at (1)
120 °C
7.3.2 2 moles of oxygen gas produced at (1)
90 °C
Q [20]

Kinetic energy

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 40 FS/2019

QUESTION 8
The apparatus below is used to investigate one of the factors that affects the rate of
decomposition of hydrogen peroxide, H2O2. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
2H2O2(ℓ) → 2H2O(ℓ) + O2(g)
Two experiments are conducted. The reaction conditions are as follows:
Experiment I: 50 cm3 of hydrogen peroxide is allowed to decompose at 30 °C.
Experiment II: 50 cm3 of hydrogen peroxide decompose at 30 °C in the presence of copper(II)
oxide powder (CuO).

The results of the investigation are summarised in the table below.

Total volume of O2(g) Time taken for complete
Experiment
produced(dm3) decomposition (min.)
I 0,4 12,3
II 0,4 5,8
8.1 For this investigation, write down the function of the:
8.1.1 Graduated syringe (1)
8.1.2 Copper(II) oxide (1)
8.2 How will you know when the reaction is completed? (1)
8.3 Write down the independent variable for this investigation. (1)
8.4 Use the collision theory to fully explain the difference in reaction rates of
experiment I and experiment II. (3)
8.5 The graphs below show changes in the potential energy during the decomposition of
hydrogen peroxide in experiment I and experiment II.

8.5.1 Is energy ABSORBED or RELEASED during this reaction? Give a reason

for the answer. (2)
8.5.2 Which ONE of the curves, A or B, represents experiment II? (1)
8.6 Calculate the rate, in mol∙dm ∙min , at which 50 cm of hydrogen peroxide
-3 -1 3

decomposes in experiment II. Assume that 1 mole of gas occupies a volume of 25 dm3 (6)
at 30 °C. [16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 41 FS/2019

QUESTION 9
The reaction of copper(II) carbonate with excess dilute hydrochloric acid is used to investigate
the rate of reaction. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
CuCO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → CuCℓ2(aq) + H2O(ℓ) + CO2(g)
The apparatus used is illustrated below.

Conical flask

Dilute
hydrochloric acid Copper(II) carbonate lumps

170,00 g Scale

9.1 State TWO ways in which the rate of the reaction above can be increased. (2)
During the investigation, samples of both PURE and IMPURE copper(II) carbonate of EQUAL
mass are used. The graphs below are obtained from the results.

170,00

----- Impure CuCO3

169,95
––– Pure CuCO3
Mass of flask and contents (g)

169,90

169,85

169,80

169,75

169,70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Time (s)
9.2 Write down the reaction time for the reaction of the pure CuCO3 with HCℓ. (1)
9.3 Assume that all the gas formed during the two reactions escape from the flask and that
the impurities do not react. Calculate the:
9.3.1 Average rate of the reaction of the pure sample over the first 20 s (3)
9.3.2 Percentage purity of the impure sample (4)
9.3.3 Maximum volume of CO2(g) produced during the reaction of the pure
sample of CuCO3 if the reaction takes place at STANDARD CONDITIONS (3)
9.4 Sketch a graph of the volume of gas produced versus time for the reaction of the pure (2)
CuCO3. Indicate the reaction time on the x-axis. [15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 42 FS/2019

QUESTION 10
A group of learners uses the reaction between powdered zinc and EXCESS dilute hydrochloric
acid to investigate one of the factors that affects the rate of a chemical reaction. The balanced
equation for the reaction is: Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)
They conduct two experiments. The reaction conditions used are summarised in the table
below.
TEMPERATURE VOLUME OF CONCENTRATION MASS OF Zn
EXPERIMENT
(°C) HCℓ (cm3) OF HCℓ (mol∙dm-3) (g)
I 25 200 0,25 x
II 25 200 0,40 x
The results obtained are shown in the graph (not drawn to scale) below.

10.1 Define reaction rate. (2)

10.2 Write down an investigative question for this investigation. (2)
10.3 Which curve, P or Q, represents the results of experiment I? Explain the answer. (3)
10.4 The average rate of the production of hydrogen gas, as represented by graph P, was
15 cm3∙s-1. Calculate the mass of zinc used. Take the molar gas volume at 25 °C as
24 000 cm3. (5)
10.5 In a third experiment (experiment III), 200 cm3 of a 0,25 mol∙dm -3 dilute hydrochloric (2)
acid solution at 35 °C reacts with the same amount of zinc powder as in experiment I
and experiment II.
10.5.1 How will the heat of reaction of experiment II compare with that of
experiment III? Choose from MORE THAN, LESS THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
10.5.2 How will the activation energy of the reaction in experiment I compare with
that of the reaction in experiment III? Choose from MORE THAN, LESS
THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
10.6 The rate of the reaction in experiment III is higher than that of experiment I. (3)
Fully explain this statement by referring to the collision theory. [17]
QUESTION 11
Learners use the reaction between sodium thiosulphate and hydrochloric acid to investigate one
of the factors that affects reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ) + SO2(g) + S(s)
In the first experiment, 50 cm 3 of the sodium
flask thiosulphate solution is added to 100 cm 3 of a
2 mol∙dm-3 dilute hydrochloric acid solution in a
Na2S2O3(aq) + HCℓ(aq) flask that is placed over a cross drawn on a
sheet of white paper. The hydrochloric acid is in
white paper EXCESS.

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 43 FS/2019

The time taken for the cross to become invisible, when viewed from the top, is
recorded. The experiment is then repeated four times with different volumes of the
sodium thiosulphate solution. The results obtained are shown in the table below.

11.1 Define reaction rate. (2)

11.2 How does the concentration of the sodium thiosulphate solution used in experiment 2
compare to that used in experiment 5? Choose from MORE THAN, LESS THAN or
EQUAL TO. (1)
11.3 Draw a graph of average reaction rate versus volume of sodium thiosulphate used on
a GRAPH SHEET. (3)
11.4 Use the information in the graph to answer the following questions.
11.4.1 Determine the volume of dilute sodium thiosulphate solution that needs to
react in order for the cross to become invisible in 40 seconds. USE
DOTTED LINES ON THE GRAPH TO SHOW HOW YOU ARRIVED AT
THE ANSWER. (3)
11.4.2 Write down a conclusion for this investigation. (2)
11.5 Use the collision theory to explain the effect of an increase in concentration on reaction
rate. (3)
11.6 The mass of sulphur produced in experiment 1 is 1,62 g. Calculate the mass of the (4)
sodium thiosulphate used in experiment 1. [18]
QUESTION 12
Two experiments are carried out to investigate one of the factors that affects the reaction rate
between magnesium and dilute hydrochloric acid. The reaction that takes place is represented
by the following balanced equation: Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)
In experiment 1 a certain mass of magnesium ribbon reacts with excess dilute hydrochloric acid.
In experiment 2 magnesium powder of the same mass as the magnesium ribbon, reacts with
the same volume of excess dilute hydrochloric acid. The concentration of the acid is the same
in both experiments. The apparatus below is used for the investigation.

12.1 Define reaction rate. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 44 FS/2019

12.2 For this investigation, write down the:

12.2.1 Independent variable (1)
12.2.2 Controlled variable (1)
The change in mass of magnesium is calculated and recorded in 2-minute intervals for both
experiments. The results obtained are shown in the graph below (NOT drawn to scale).

12.3 Use the information on the graph to:

12.3.1 Calculate the volume of hydrogen gas produced in experiment 1 from
t = 2 minutes to t = 10 minutes
Take the molar gas volume as 25 dm 3∙mol-1. (5)
12.3.2 Calculate the initial mass of magnesium used if the average rate of
formation of hydrogen gas in experiment 2 was 2,08 x 10-4 mol·s-1. (5)
12.4 Use the collision theory to explain why the curve of experiment 2 is steeper than that (3)
of experiment 1. [17]
QUESTION 13
The reaction of zinc and EXCESS dilute hydrochloric acid is used to investigate factors that
affect reaction rate. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Zn(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) ⟶ ZnCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)

The reaction conditions used and the results obtained for each experiment are summarised in
the table below. The same mass of zinc is used in all the experiments. The zinc is completely
covered in all reactions. The reaction time is the time it takes the reaction to be completed.

13.1 Experiment 1 and experiment 5 are compared. Write down the independent variable. (1)
13.2 Define reaction rate. (2)
13.3 Write down the value of x in experiment 4. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 45 FS/2019

13.4 The Maxwell-Boltzmann energy distribution

curves for particles in each of experiments
1, 3 and 5 are shown alongside.
Identify the graph (A or B or C) that
represents the following:
13.4.1 Experiment 3
Give a reason for the answer. (2)
13.4.2 Experiment 5
Give a reason for the answer. (2)

13.5 Experiment 6 is now conducted using a catalyst and the SAME reaction conditions as
for Experiment 1.
13.5.1 What is the function of the catalyst in this experiment? (1)
13.5.2 How will the heat of reaction in experiment 6 compare to that in experiment
1? Choose from: GREATER THAN, EQUAL TO or LESS THAN. (1)
-1
13.6 Calculate the average rate of the reaction (in mol·min ) with respect to zinc for (4)
experiment 2 if 1,5 g of zinc is used. [15]

CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM
QUESTION 1
A certain amount of nitrogen dioxide gas (NO 2) is sealed in a gas syringe at 25 °C. When
equilibrium is reached, the volume occupied by the reaction mixture in the gas syringe is 80 cm3.
The balanced chemical equation for the reaction taking place is:
2NO2(g) ⇌ N2O4(g) ∆H < 0
dark brown colourless
1.1 Define the term chemical equilibrium. (2)
-3
1.2 At equilibrium the concentration of the NO2(g) is 0,2 mol·dm . The equilibrium constant
for the reaction is 171 at 25 °C. Calculate the initial number of moles of NO 2(g) placed
in the gas syringe. (8)
1.3 The diagram shows the reaction
mixture in the gas syringe after
80 cm3 equilibrium is established.
The pressure is now increased by
decreasing the volume of the gas
syringe at constant temperature as illustrated in the diagram below.

1.3.1 IMMEDIATELY after increasing the pressure, the colour of the reaction
mixture in the gas syringe appears darker than before. Give a reason for
this observation. (1)
After a while a new equilibrium is established as illustrated below. The colour of the
reaction mixture in the gas syringe now appears lighter than the initial colour.

1.3.2 Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the colour change observed in the
gas syringe. (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 46 FS/2019

1.4 The temperature of the reaction mixture in the gas syringe is now increased and a new
equilibrium is established. How will each of the following be affected?
1.4.1 Colour of the reaction mixture
Write down only DARKER, LIGHTER or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
1.4.2 Value of the equilibrium constant (Kc)
Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
[16]
QUESTION 2
Pure hydrogen iodide, sealed in a 2 dm3 container at 721 K, decomposes according to the
following balanced equation: 2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g) ∆H = + 26 kJ∙mol-1
The graph below shows how reaction rate changes with time for this reversible reaction.
2.1 Write down the meaning of the term
reversible reaction. (1)
Reaction rate

2.2 How does the concentration of the

reactant change between the 12th and
the 15th minute? Write down only
INCREASES, DECREASES or NO
CHANGE. (1)
2.3 The rates of both the forward and the
0 5 12 15 17 20 reverse reactions suddenly change at
Time (minutes) t = 15 minutes.
2.3.1 Give a reason for the sudden change in reaction rate. (1)
2.3.2 Fully explain how you arrived at the answer to QUESTION 2.3.1. (3)
The equilibrium constant (Kc) for the forward reaction is 0,02 at 721 K.
2.4 At equilibrium it is found that 0,04 mol HI(g) is present in the container. Calculate the
concentration of H2(g) at equilibrium. (6)
2.5 Calculate the equilibrium constant for the reverse reaction. (1)
2.6 The temperature is now increased to 800 K. How will the value of the equilibrium
constant (Kc) for the forward reaction change? Write down only INCREASES, (1)
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. [14]
QUESTION 3
Initially excess NH4HS(s) is placed in a 5 dm 3 container at 218 °C. The container is sealed and
the reaction is allowed to reach equilibrium according to the following balanced equation:
NH4HS(s) ⇌ NH3(g) + H2S(g) ∆H > 0
3.1 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)
3.2 What effect will each of the following changes have on the amount of NH 3(g) at
equilibrium? Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
3.2.1 More NH4HS(s) is added (1)
3.2.2 The temperature is increased (1)
-4
3.3 The equilibrium constant for this reaction at 218 °C is 1,2 x 10 . Calculate the minimum
mass of NH4HS(s) that must be sealed in the container to obtain equilibrium. (6)
The pressure in the container is now increased by decreasing the volume of the container at
constant temperature.
3.4 How will this change affect the number of moles of H 2S(g) produced? Fully explain the (3)
answer. [13]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 47 FS/2019

QUESTION 4
An unknown gas, X2(g), is sealed in a container and allowed to form X3(g) at 300 °C. The reaction
reaches equilibrium according to the following balanced equation: 3X2(g) ⇌ 2X3(g)
4.1 How will the rate of formation of X3(g) compare to the rate of formation of X2(g) at
equilibrium? Write down only HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)
The reaction mixture is analysed at regular time intervals. The results obtained are shown in the
table below.
TIME [ X2 ] [ X3 ]
(s) (mol∙dm-3) (mol∙dm-3)
0 0,4 0
2 0,22 0,120
4 0,08 0,213
6 0,06 0,226
8 0,06 0,226
10 0,06 0,226
4.2 Calculate the equilibrium constant, Kc, for this reaction at 300 °C. (4)
4.3 More X3(g) is now added to the container.
4.3.1 How will this change affect the amount of X2(g)? Write down INCREASES,
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
4.3.2 Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the answer to QUESTION 4.3.1. (2)
Concentration (mol∙dm-3)

The curves on the set of axes alongside (not drawn to scale)

was obtained from the results in the table.

4.4 How does the rate of the forward reaction compare

to that of the reverse reaction at t1? Write down only
HIGHER THAN, LOWER THAN or EQUAL TO. (1)

t1 Time (s)
The reaction is now repeated at a temperature of 400 °C. The curves indicated by the dotted
lines below were obtained at this temperature.
Concentration (mol∙dm-3)

300 °C
400 °C

Time (s)
4.5 Is the forward reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Fully explain how you
arrived at the answer. (4)
The Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curve represents the
Number of

number of particles against kinetic energy at 300 °C.

particles

300 °C
4.6 Redraw this curve in the ANSWER BOOK. On the
same set of axes, sketch the curve that will be obtained
at 400 °C. Clearly label the curves as 300 °C and (2)
Kinetic energy 400 °C respectively. [15]
Terms, definitions, questions and answers
Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 48 FS/2019

QUESTION 5
Initially, 2,2 g of pure CO2(g) is sealed in an empty 5 dm3 container at 900 °C.
5.1 Calculate the initial concentration of CO2(g). (4)
5.2 Give a reason why equilibrium will not be established. (1)
CaCO3(s) is now added to the 2,2 g CO2(g) in the container and after a while equilibrium is
established at 900 °C according to the following balanced equation:
CaCO3(s) ⇌ CaO(s) + CO2(g)
The equilibrium constant for this reaction at 900 °C is 0,0108.
5.3 Give a reason why this reaction will only reach equilibrium in a SEALED container. (1)
5.4 Calculate the minimum mass of CaCO 3(s) that must be added to the container to
achieve equilibrium. (7)
5.5 How will EACH of the following changes affect the amount of CO2(g)? Write down only
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
5.5.1 More CaCO3(s) is added at 900 °C (1)
5.5.2 The pressure is increased (1)
-6
5.6 It is found that the equilibrium constant (Kc) for this reaction is 2,6 x 10 at 727 °C. Is
the reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Fully explain how you arrived at the (4)
answer. [19]
QUESTION 6
Carbon dioxide reacts with carbon in a closed system to produce carbon monoxide, CO(g),
according to the following balanced equation:
CO2(g) + C(s) ⇌ 2CO(g) ΔH > 0
6.1 What does the double arrow indicate in the equation above? (1)
6.2 Is the above reaction an EXOTHERMIC reaction or an ENDOTHERMIC reaction?
Give a reason for the answer. (2)
Initially an unknown amount of carbon dioxide is exposed to hot carbon at 800 °C in a sealed
2 dm3 container. The equilibrium constant, Kc, for the reaction at this temperature is 14.
At equilibrium it is found that 168,00 g carbon monoxide is present.
6.3 How will the equilibrium concentration of the product compare to that of the reactants?
Choose from LARGER THAN, SMALLER THAN or EQUAL TO.
Give a reason for the answer. (No calculation is required.) (2)
6.4 Calculate the initial amount (in moles) of CO2(g) present. (9)
6.5 State how EACH of the following will affect the yield of CO(g) at equilibrium. Choose
from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
6.5.1 More carbon is added at constant temperature. (1)
6.5.2 The pressure is increased. (1)
6.5.3 The temperature is increased. (1)
[17]
QUESTION 7
Hydrogen gas, H2(g), reacts with sulphur powder, S(s), according to the following balanced
equation: H2(g) + S(s) ⇌ H2S(g) ∆H < 0
The system reaches equilibrium at 90 °C.
7.1 Define the term chemical equilibrium. (2)
7.2 How will EACH of the following changes affect the number of moles of H2S(g) at
equilibrium? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
7.2.1 The addition of more sulphur (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 49 FS/2019

7.2.2 An increase in temperature

Use Le Chatelier's principle to explain the answer. (4)
7.3 The sketch graph below was obtained for the equilibrium mixture.
Reaction rate (mol∙s-1)

A catalyst is added to the equilibrium

mixture at time t1.
Redraw the graph in your book. On the
same set of axes, complete the graph
showing the effect of the catalyst on the
reaction rates. (2)

Time (s)
t1
Initially 0,16 mol H2(g) and excess S(s) are sealed in a 2 dm 3 container and the system is allowed
to reach equilibrium at 90 °C.
An exact amount of Pb(NO3)2 solution is now added to the container so that ALL the H2S(g)
present in the container at EQUILIBRIUM is converted to PbS(s) according to the following
balanced equation: Pb(NO3)2(aq) + H2S(g) → PbS(s) + 2HNO3(aq)
The mass of the PbS precipitate is 2,39 g.
7.4 Calculate the equilibrium constant Kc for the reaction H2(g) + S(s) ⇌ H2S(g) at 90 °C. (9)
[18]
QUESTION 8
8.1 Consider the balanced equation for a reversible reaction below.
N2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2NO(g)
8.1.1 What is meant by the term reversible reaction? (1)
The sketch graph alongside shows the relationship
between the value of the equilibrium constant (Kc) for
this reaction and temperature.
8.1.2 Is the reaction ENDOTHERMIC or (1)
EXOTHERMIC?
8.1.3 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 8.1.2. (3)
How will EACH of the following changes affect the amount of NO(g) at equilibrium?
Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
8.1.4 More N2(g) is added. (1)
8.1.5 The pressure is increased by decreasing the volume. (1)
8.2 Initially 336 g titanium (Ti) and 426 g chlorine gas (Cℓ 2) are mixed in a sealed 2 dm 3

container at a certain temperature. The reaction reaches equilibrium according to the

following balanced equation: Ti(s) + 2Cℓ2(g) ⇌ TiCℓ4(s)
At equilibrium it is found that 288 g titanium is left in the container.
8.2.1 Calculate the equilibrium constant (Kc) for the reaction at this temperature. (8)
8.2.2 More titanium is now added to the equilibrium mixture. How will this change
affect the yield of TiCℓ4(s)? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or (1)
REMAINS THE SAME. [16]
QUESTION 9
Hydrogen and iodine are sealed in a 2 dm 3 container. The reaction is allowed to reach equilibrium
at 700 K according to the following balanced equation: H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)
9.1 Give a reason why changes in pressure will have no effect on the equilibrium position. (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 50 FS/2019

9.2 At equilibrium, 0,028 mol H2(g) and 0,017 mol I2(g) are present in the container.
Calculate the initial mass of I2(g), in grams, that was sealed in the container, if K c for
the reaction is 55,3 at 700 K. (9)
The reaction rate versus time graph below represents different changes made to the equilibrium
mixture.
Forward reaction
Reverse reaction
Reaction rate

Time (minutes)
0 2 4 6 8 10
9.3 What do the parallel lines in the first two minutes indicate? (1)
9.4 State TWO possible changes that could be made to the reaction conditions at
t = 2 minutes. (2)
9.5 The temperature of the equilibrium mixture was changed at t = 4 minutes.
9.5.1 Is the forward reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Fully explain
the answer. (3)
9.5.2 How will this change influence the K c value? Choose from INCREASES,
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (1)
9.6 What change was made to the equilibrium mixture at t = 8 minutes? (1)
[18]
QUESTION 10
Carbonyl bromide, COBr2, decomposes into carbon monoxide and bromine according to the
following balanced equation: COBr2(g) ⇌ CO(g) + Br2(g) ΔH > 0
Initially COBr2(g) is sealed in a 2 dm 3 container and heated to 73 °C. The reaction is allowed to
reach equilibrium at this temperature. The equilibrium constant for the reaction at this
temperature is 0,19.
10.1 Define chemical equilibrium. (2)
At equilibrium it is found that 1,12 g CO(g) is present in the container.
10.2 Calculate the equilibrium concentration of the COBr2(g). (7)
10.3 Calculate the percentage of COBr2(g) that decomposed at 73 °C. (4)
10.4 Which ONE of the following CORRECTLY describes the Kc value when equilibrium is
reached at a lower temperature?
Kc < 0,19 Kc > 0,19 Kc = 0,19 (1)
10.5 The pressure of the system is now decreased by increasing the volume of the
container at 73 °C and the system is allowed to reach equilibrium. How will the number
of moles of COBr2(g) be affected? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or (3)
REMAINS THE SAME. Explain the answer. [17]
QUESTION 11
11.1 A reversible gaseous reaction is allowed to reach
equilibrium in a closed container at different temperatures
and pressures. The graph shows the percentage yield for
this reaction at 30 kPa as the temperature is increased.
Use the information in the graph above to answer the
following questions
11.1.1 State Le Chatelier's principle. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 51 FS/2019

11.1.2 The heat of reaction (ΔH) for the forward reaction is POSITIVE. Use Le
Chatelier's principle to explain this statement. (3)
The graph below show the percentage yield for this reaction as pressure changes at
constant temperature.
11.1.3 Explain the effect of an increase in pressure on
the equilibrium position of a reaction. (2)
11.1.4 Which ONE of the following equations (I, II or III)
represents the equilibrium above?
I: 2A(g) + 3B(g) ⇌ 3C(g)
II: A(g) + B(g) ⇌ 3C(g)
III: A(g) + B(g) ⇌ 2C(g) (2)
11.2 A mixture of 0,2 moles of hydrogen chloride (HCℓ) and 0,11 moles of oxygen gas (O 2)
is sealed in a 200 cm3 flask at a certain temperature. The reaction reaches equilibrium
according to the balanced equation: 4HCℓ(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2Cℓ2 (g) + 2H2O(g)
It is found that 1,825 g of hydrogen chloride is present at equilibrium. Calculate the (9)
equilibrium constant, Kc, for this reaction at this temperature. [18]
QUESTION 12
The equation below represents a hypothetical reaction that reaches equilibrium in a closed
container after 2 minutes at room temperature. The letters x, y and z represent the number of
moles in the balanced equation.
xA(aq) + yB(aq) ⇌ zC(aq)
The graph below shows the change in the number of moles of reactants and products versus
time during the reaction.

12.1 Define a dynamic equilibrium. (2)

12.2 Use the information in the graph and write down the value of:
12.2.1 x (1)
12.2.2 y (1)
12.2.2 z (1)
12.3 Calculate the equilibrium constant, K c, for this hypothetical reaction at room
temperature if the volume of the closed container is 3 dm3. (7)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 52 FS/2019

12.4 At t = 4 minutes, the temperature of the system was increased to 60 °C. Is the
REVERSE reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Explain how you arrived at (3)
the answer. [15]
QUESTION 13
Dinitrogen tetraoxide, N2O4(g), decomposes to nitrogen dioxide, NO2(g), in a sealed syringe of
volume 2 dm3.

The mixture reaches equilibrium at 325 °C according to the following balanced equation:
N2O4(g) ⇌ 2 NO2(g)
Colourless brown
When equilibrium is reached, it is observed that the colour of the gas in the syringe is brown.
13.1 State Le Chatelier’s principle. (2)
13.2 The syringe is now dipped into a beaker of ice water. After a while the brown colour
disappears. Is the forward reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Explain the
answer using Le Chatelier's principle. (3
13.3 The volume of the syringe is now decreased while the temperature is kept constant.
How will EACH of the following be affected? Choose from: INCREASES,
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. (3
13.3.1 The number of moles of N2O4(g) (1)
13.3.2 The value of the equilibrium constant (1)
13.3.2 The rate of the forward and reverse reactions (1)
3
13.4 Initially X moles of N2O4(g) were placed in the syringe of volume 2 dm . When
equilibrium was reached, it was found that 20% of the N 2O4(g) had decomposed.
If the equilibrium constant, Kc, for the reaction is 0,16 at 325 °C, calculate the value of
X. (8)
ACIDS AND BASES
QUESTION 1
1.1 Nitric acid (HNO3), an important acid used in industry, is a strong acid.
1.1.1 Give a reason why nitric acid is classified as a strong acid. (1)
1.1.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the conjugate base of nitric acid. (1)
1.1.3 Calculate the pH of a 0,3 mol∙dm nitric acid solution.
-3
(3)
1.2 A laboratory technician wants to determine the percentage purity of magnesium oxide.
He dissolves a 4,5 g sample of the magnesium oxide in 100 cm3 hydrochloric acid of
concentration 2 mol∙dm-3.
1.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of hydrochloric acid added to the magnesium
oxide. (3)
He then uses the apparatus below
to titrate the EXCESS hydrochloric
Retort stand Q acid in the above solution against
a sodium hydroxide solution.
Sodium hydroxide 1.2.2 Write down the name of
solution apparatus Q in the above
diagram. (1)

Erlenmeyer flask
Hydrochloric acid

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 53 FS/2019

1.2.3 The following indicators are available for the titration:

INDICATOR pH RANGE
A 3,1 – 4,4
B 6,0 – 7,6
C 8,3 – 10,0
Which ONE of the above indicators (A, B or C) is most suitable to indicate
the exact endpoint in this titration? Give a reason for the answer. (3)
1.2.4 During the titration, the technician uses distilled water to wash any sodium
hydroxide spilled against the sides of the Erlenmeyer flask into the solution.
Give a reason why the addition of distilled water to the Erlenmeyer flask will
not influence the results. (1)
3 -3
1.2.5 At the endpoint of the titration he finds that 21 cm of a 0,2 mol dm sodium
hydroxide solution has neutralised the EXCESS hydrochloric acid. Calculate
the number of moles of hydrochloric acid in excess. (3)
1.2.6 The balanced equation for the reaction between hydrochloric acid and
magnesium oxide is: MgO(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2O(ℓ)
Calculate the percentage purity of the magnesium oxide. Assume that only
the magnesium oxide in the 4,5 g sample reacted with the acid. (5)
[21]
QUESTION 2
2.1 Sulphuric acid is a diprotic acid.
2.1.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)
2.1.2 Give a reason why sulphuric acid is referred to as a diprotic acid. (1)
2.2 The hydrogen carbonate ion can act as both an acid and a base. It reacts with water
according to the following balanced equation:
HCO 3 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H2CO3(aq) + OH-(aq)
2.2.1 Write down ONE word for the underlined phrase. (1)
2.2.2 HCO 3 (aq) acts as base in the above reaction. Write down the formula of
the conjugate acid of HCO 3 (aq). (1)
2.3 A learner accidentally spills some sulphuric acid of concentration 6 mol∙dm from a -3

flask on the laboratory bench. Her teacher tells her to neutralise the spilled acid by
sprinkling sodium hydrogen carbonate powder onto it. The reaction that takes place
is: (Assume that the H2SO4 ionises completely.)
H2SO4(aq) + 2NaHCO3(s) → Na2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ) + 2CO2(g)
The fizzing, due to the formation of carbon dioxide, stops after the learner has added
27 g sodium hydrogen carbonate to the spilled acid.
2.3.1 Calculate the volume of sulphuric acid that spilled. Assume that all the
sodium hydrogen carbonate reacts with all the acid. (6)
The learner now dilutes some of the 6 mol∙dm sulphuric acid solution in the flask to
-3

0,1 mol∙dm-3.
2.3.2 Calculate the volume of the 6 mol∙dm-3 sulphuric acid solution needed to
prepare 1 dm3 of the dilute acid. (2)
During a titration 25 cm of the 0,1 mol∙dm sulphuric acid solution is added to an
3 -3

Erlenmeyer flask and titrated with a 0,1 mol∙dm-3 sodium hydroxide solution.
2.3.3 The learner uses bromothymol blue as indicator. What is the purpose of
this indicator? (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 54 FS/2019

2.3.4 Calculate the pH of the solution in the flask after the addition of 30 cm3 of
sodium hydroxide. The endpoint of the titration is not yet reached at this (8)
point. [22]
QUESTION 3
Anhydrous oxalic acid is an example of an acid that can donate two protons and thus ionises in
two steps as represented by the equations below:
I: (COOH)2(aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + H(COO) 2 (aq)
II: H(COO) 2 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O+(aq) + (COO) 22  (aq)
3.1 Write down:
3.1.1 ONE word for the underlined phrase in the above sentence (1)
3.1.2 The FORMULA of each of the TWO bases in reaction II (2)
3.1.3 The FORMULA of the substance that acts as ampholyte in reactions I and
II. Give a reason for the answer. (2)
3.2 Give a reason why oxalic acid is a weak acid. (1)
3.3 A standard solution of (COOH)2 of concentration 0,20 mol∙dm is prepared by
-3

dissolving a certain amount of (COOH)2 in water in a 250 cm3 volumetric flask.

Calculate the mass of (COOH)2 needed to prepare the standard solution. (4)
3
3.4 During a titration 25 cm of the standard solution of (COOH)2 prepared in QUESTION
7.3 is neutralised by a sodium hydroxide solution from a burette. The balanced
equation for the reaction is:
(COOH)2(aq) + 2NaOH(aq) (COONa)2(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)
The diagrams below show the burette readings before the titration commenced and at
the endpoint respectively.
Before the titration At the endpoint
cm3 cm3

2 38

Level of Level of
NaOH(aq) NaOH(aq)
3 39

3.4.1 Use the burette readings and calculate the concentration of the sodium
hydroxide solution. (5)
3.4.2 Write down a balanced equation that explains why the solution has a pH
greater than 7 at the endpoint. (3)
[18]
QUESTION 4
4.1 Ammonium chloride crystals, NH4Cℓ(s), dissolve in water to form ammonium and
chloride ions. The ammonium ions react with water according to the following balanced

equation: NH 4 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ NH3(aq) + H3O+(aq)
4.1.1 Write down the name of the process described by the underlined sentence. (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 55 FS/2019

4.1.2 Is ammonium chloride ACIDIC or BASIC in aqueous solution? Give a

reason for the answer. (2)
4.2 A certain fertiliser consists of 92% ammonium chloride. A sample of mass x g of this
fertiliser is dissolved in 100 cm 3 of a 0,10 mol∙dm -3 sodium hydroxide solution,
NaOH(aq). The NaOH is in excess. The balanced equation for the reaction is:

NH4Cℓ(s) + NaOH(aq)  NH3(g) + H2O(ℓ) + NaCℓ(aq)

4.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of sodium hydroxide in which the sample is
dissolved. (3)
3
During a titration, 25 cm of the excess sodium hydroxide solution is titrated with a
0,11 mol∙dm-3 hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq). At the endpoint it is found that
14,55 cm3 of the hydrochloric acid was used to neutralise the sodium hydroxide
solution according to the following balanced equation:
HCℓ(aq) + NaOH(aq)  NaCℓ(aq) + H2O(ℓ)
4.2.2 Calculate the mass x (in grams) of the fertiliser sample used. (8)
4.3 Calculate the pH of a 0,5 moldm-3 sodium hydroxide solution at 25 °C. (4)
[18]
QUESTION 5
5.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)
5.2 Carbonated water is an aqueous solution of carbonic acid, H 2CO3. H2CO3(aq) ionises
in two steps when it dissolves in water.
5.2.1 Write down the FORMULA of the conjugate base of H2CO3(aq). (1)
5.2.2 Write down a balanced equation for the first step in the ionisation of
carbonic acid. (3)
5.2.3 The pH of a carbonic acid solution at 25 °C is 3,4. Calculate the hydroxide
ion concentration in the solution. (5)
5.3 X is a monoprotic acid.
5.3.1 State the meaning of the term monoprotic. (1)
5.3.2 A sample of acid X is titrated with a standard sodium hydroxide solution
using a suitable indicator. At the endpoint it is found that 25 cm 3 of acid X
is neutralised by 27,5 cm3 of the sodium hydroxide solution of
concentration 0,1 mol∙dm-3. Calculate the concentration of acid X. (5)
+
5.3.3 The concentration of H3O ions in the sample of acid X is
2,4 x 10-4 mol∙dm-3. Is acid X a WEAK or a STRONG acid? Explain the (3)
answer by referring to the answer in QUESTION 5.3.2. [20]
QUESTION 6
6.1 Hydrogen carbonate ions react with water according to the following balanced
equation: HCO 3 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H2CO3(aq) + OH (aq)
6.1.1 Define an acid according to the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)
6.1.2 Write down the FORMULAE of the two acids in the equation above. (2)
6.1.3 Write down the formula of a substance in the reaction above that can act
as an ampholyte. (1)
6.2 During an experiment 0,50 dm 3 of a 0,10 mol∙dm -3 HCℓ solution is added to 0,80 dm3
of a NaHCO3 solution of concentration 0,25 mol∙dm-3. The balanced equation for the
reaction is: NaHCO3(aq) + HCℓ(aq) → NaCℓ(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ)
6.2.1 Calculate the concentration of the hydroxide ions in the solution on
completion of the reaction. (8)
6.2.2 Calculate the pH of the solution on completion of the reaction. (4)
[17]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 56 FS/2019

QUESTION 7
7.1 A learner dissolves ammonium chloride (NH 4Cℓ) crystals in water and measures the
pH of the solution.
7.1.1 Define the term hydrolysis of a salt. (2)
7.1.2 Will the pH of the solution be GREATER THAN, SMALLER THAN or
EQUAL TO 7? Write a relevant equation to support your answer. (3)
7.2 A sulphuric acid solution is prepared by dissolving 7,35 g of H 2SO4(ℓ) in 500 cm of 3

water.
7.2.1 Calculate the number of moles of H2SO4 present in this solution. (2)
Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) pellets are added to the 500 cm 3 H2SO4 solution. The
balanced equation for the reaction is:
H2SO4(aq) + 2NaOH(s) → Na2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)
After completion of the reaction, the pH of the solution was found to be 1,3. Assume
complete ionisation of H2SO4.
7.2.2 Calculate the mass of NaOH added to the H 2SO4 solution. Assume that
the volume of the solution does not change. (9)
[16]
QUESTION 8
8.1 Ethanoic acid (CH3COOH) is an acid that ionises incompletely in water according to
the following balanced equation:
CH3COOH(aq) + H2O(ℓ) → CH3COO─(aq) + H3O+(aq)
8.1.1 Write down the term used for the underlined phrase above. (1)
8.1.2 An ethanoic acid solution has a pH of 4 at 25°C. Calculate the
concentration of the hydronium ions, H3O+(aq) in the solution. (3)
3
8.2 A standard solution of potassium hydroxide (KOH) is prepared in a 250 cm volumetric
flask. During a titration, 12,5 cm 3 of this solution neutralises 25 cm 3 of a
0,16 mol∙dm-3 ethanoic acid solution. The balanced equation for the reaction is:
CH3COOH(aq) + KOH(aq) → CH3COOK(aq) + H2O(ℓ)
8.2.1 Define a base according to the Arrhenius theory. (2)
8.2.2 Calculate the mass of potassium hydroxide used to prepare the solution
above in the 250 cm3 volumetric flask. (7)
8.2.3 Will the pH of the solution in the conical flask at the end point be GREATER
THAN 7, SMALLER THAN 7 or EQUAL TO 7? (1)
8.2.4 Explain the answer to QUESTION 8.2.3 with the aid of a balanced
chemical equation. (3)
[17]
QUESTION 9
The Ka values for two weak acids, oxalic acid and carbonic acid, are as follows:
NAME FORMULA Ka
Oxalic acid (COOH)2 5,6 x 10-2
Carbonic acid H2CO3 4,3 x 10-7
9.1 Define the term weak acid. (2)
9.2 Which acid, OXALIC ACID or CARBONIC ACID, is stronger? Give a reason for the
answer. (2)
9.3 Oxalic acid ionises in water according to the following balanced equation:
2
(COOH)2(s) + 2H2O(ℓ) ⇌ (COO) 2 (aq) + 2H3O+(aq)
Write down the FORMULAE of the TWO bases in this equation. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 57 FS/2019

9.4 Learners prepare 2 dm3 of a sodium hydroxide solution of concentration

0,1 mol∙dm-3. Calculate the pH of the solution. (4)
9.5 During a titration of the sodium hydroxide solution in QUESTION 9.4 with dilute oxalic
acid, the learners find that 25,1 cm3 of the NaOH(aq) neutralises exactly
14,2 cm3 of the (COOH)2(aq). The balanced equation for the reaction is as follows:
2NaOH(aq) + (COOH)2(aq) → (COO)2Na2(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)
9.5.1 Calculate the concentration of the oxalic acid solution. (5)
The following indicators are available for the titration:
INDICATOR pH RANGE
A 3,1–4,4
B 6,0–7,6
C 8,3–10,0
9.5.2 Which ONE of the indicators above is most suitable for this titration? Give (2)
a reason for the answer. [17]
QUESTION 10
10.1 Ammonia ionises in water to form a basic solution according to the following balanced
equation: NH3(aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ NH 4 (aq) + OH-(aq)
10.1.1 Is ammonia a WEAK or a STRONG base? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
10.1.2 Write down the conjugate acid of NH3(g). (1)
10.1.3 Identify ONE substance in this reaction that can behave as an ampholyte
in some reactions. (1)
10.2 A learner adds distilled water to a soil sample and then filters the mixture. The pH of
the filtered liquid is then measured. He then gradually adds an ammonia solution,
NH3(aq), to this liquid and measures the pH of the solution at regular intervals. The
graph below shows the results obtained.

10.2.1 Is the soil sample ACIDIC or BASIC? Refer to the graph above and give a
reason for the answer. (2)
10.2.2 Calculate the concentration of the hydroxide ions (OH-) in the reaction
mixture after the addition of 4 cm 3 of NH3(aq). (4)
10.3 A laboratory technician wants to determine the concentration of a hydrochloric acid
(HCℓ) sample. He adds 5 cm 3 of the HCℓ sample to 495 cm 3 of distilled water to give
500 cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid, HCℓ(aq). During a reaction 50 cm 3 of this dilute
hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq), reacts completely with 0,29 g of sodium carbonate,
Na2CO3(s).

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 58 FS/2019

10.3 The balanced equation for the reaction is:

Na2CO3(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → 2NaCℓ(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(ℓ) (7)
Calculate the concentration of the hydrochloric acid sample. [17]
QUESTION 11
11.1 The balanced equation below represents the first step in the ionisation of sulphuric
+ -
acid (H2SO4) in water: H2SO4(ℓ) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ H3O (aq) + HSO4 (aq)
11.1.1 Write down the FORMULAE of the TWO bases in the equation above. (2)
11.1.2 Is sulphuric acid a STRONG or a WEAK acid? Give a reason for the
answer. (2)
11.2 Learners use the reaction of a 0,15 mol∙dm sulphuric acid solution with a sodium
-3

hydroxide solution in two different experiments. The balanced equation for the reaction
is: H2SO4(aq) + 2NaOH(aq) → Na2SO4(aq) + H2O(ℓ)
11.2.1 They use 24 cm 3 of H2SO4(aq) in a titration to neutralise 26 cm 3 of
NaOH(aq). Calculate the concentration of the NaOH(aq). (5)
3 3
11.2.2 In another experiment, 30 cm of the H2SO4(aq) is added to 20 cm of a
0,28 mol∙dm-3 NaOH solution in a beaker. Calculate the pH of the final (8)
solution. [17]
QUESTION 12
The reaction between a sulphuric acid (H 2SO4) solution and a sodium hydroxide (NaOH) solution
is investigated using the apparatus illustrated below.

Retort stand Burette

H2SO4(aq)

Erlenmeyer flask
NaOH(aq)

12.1 Write down the name of the experimental procedure illustrated above. (1)
12.2 What is the function of the burette? (1)
12.3 Define an acid in terms of the Arrhenius theory. (2)
12.4 Give a reason why sulphuric acid is regarded as a strong acid. (1)
12.5 Bromothymol blue is used as indicator. Write down the colour change that will take
place in the Erlenmeyer flask on reaching the endpoint of the titration. Choose from
the following:
BLUE TO YELLOW YELLOW TO BLUE GREEN TO YELLOW (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 59 FS/2019

During the titration a learner adds 25 cm 3 of NaOH(aq) of concentration 0,1 mol·dm -3 to an

Erlenmeyer flask and titrates this solution with H 2SO4 (aq) of concentration 0,1 mol·dm -3. The
balanced equation for the reaction that takes place is:
2NaOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) → Na2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)
12.6 Determine the volume of H2SO4(aq) which must be added to neutralise the NaOH(aq)
in the Erlenmeyer flask completely. (4)
12.7 If the learner passes the endpoint by adding 5 cm 3 of the same H2SO4(aq) in excess, (7)
calculate the pH of the solution in the flask. [17]
QUESTION 13
13.1 Sulphuric acid is a strong acid present in acid rain. It ionises in two steps as follows:

13.1.1 Define an acid in terms of the Lowry-Brønsted theory. (2)

+
13.1.2 Write down the FORMULA of the conjugate base of H3O (aq). (1)
13.1.3 Write down the FORMULA of the substance that acts as an ampholyte in
the ionisation of sulphuric acid. (2)
13.2 Acid rain does not cause damage to lakes that have rocks containing limestone
(CaCO3). Hydrolysis of CaCO3 results in the formation of ions, which neutralise the
acid.
13.2.1 Define hydrolysis of a salt. (2)
13.2.2 Explain, with the aid of the relevant HYDROLYSIS reaction, how limestone
can neutralise the acid. (3)
13.3 The water in a certain lake has a pH of 5.
13.1.1 Calculate the concentration of the hydronium ions in the water. (3)
9 3
The volume of water in the lake is 4 x 10 dm . Lime, CaO, is added to the water to
neutralise the acid according to the following reaction:
CaO + 2H3O+ ⇌ Ca2+ + 3H2O
13.3.2 If the final amount of hydronium ions is 1,26 x 10 3 moles, calculate the (7)
mass of lime that was added to the lake. [20]

GALVANIC CELLS
QUESTION 1
A standard electrochemical cell is set up using a standard hydrogen half-cell and a standard
X|X2+ half-cell as shown below. A voltmeter connected across the cell, initially registers 0,31 V.
V
+

Hydrogen gas _
Q
X

Platinum
1 mol·dm-3 H+(aq)

1.1 Besides concentration write down TWO conditions needed for the hydrogen half-cell
to function under standard conditions. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 60 FS/2019

1.2 Give TWO reasons, besides being a solid, why platinum is suitable to be used as
electrode in the above cell. (2)
1.3 Write down the:
1.3.1 NAME of component Q (1)
2+
1.3.2 Standard reduction potential of the X|X half-cell (1)
1.3.3 Half-reaction that takes place at the cathode of this cell (2)
2+
1.4 The hydrogen half-cell is now replaced by a M|M half-cell. The cell notation of this
cell is: M(s) | M2+(aq) || X2+(aq) | X(s)
The initial reading on the voltmeter is now 2,05 V.
1.4.1 Identify metal M. Show how you arrived at the answer. (5)
1.4.2 Is the cell reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? (1)
1.5 The reading on the voltmeter becomes zero after using this cell for several hours. Give (1)
a reason for this reading by referring to the cell reaction. [15]
QUESTION 2
A learner conducts two experiments to investigate the reaction between copper (Cu) and a silver
nitrate solution, AgNO3(aq).
EXPERIMENT 1
The learner adds a small amount of copper (Cu) powder to a test tube containing silver nitrate
solution, AgNO3(aq). The solution changes from colourless to blue after a while.
Before addition of Cu(s) After addition of Cu(s)

Colourless AgNO3(aq) Blue Cu(NO3)2(aq)

2.1 Define the term oxidising agent. (2)

2.2 Explain why the solution turns blue by referring to the relative strength of oxidising
agents. (4)
EXPERIMENT 2
The learner now sets up a galvanic cell as shown below. The cell functions under standard
conditions.
V 2.3 Write down the energy
conversion that takes place in
A B
this cell. (1)

Cu(s) Ag(s) 2.4 In which direction (A or B) will

ANIONS move in the salt
bridge? (1)
2.5 Calculate the emf of this cell
under standard conditions. (4)
2+
Cu (aq) +
Ag (aq) 2.6 Write down the balanced
equation for the net cell reaction
that takes place in this cell. (3)
2.7 How will the addition of 100 cm 3 of a 1 mol  dm-3 silver nitrate solution to the silver half-
cell influence the initial emf of this cell? Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES (1)
or REMAINS THE SAME. [16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 61 FS/2019

QUESTION 3
Learners set up an electrochemical cell, shown in the simplified diagram below, using
magnesium and lead as electrodes. Nitrate solutions are used as electrolytes in both half-cells.

String dipped in
KNO3(aq)
+
Electrode P Electrode Q

Electrolyte Electrolyte

Half-cell A Half-cell B
3.1 What type of reaction (NEUTRALISATION, REDOX or PRECIPITATION) takes place
in this cell? (1)
3.2 Which electrode, P or Q, is magnesium? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
3.3 Write down the:
3.3.1 Standard conditions under which this cell functions (2)
3.3.2 Cell notation for this cell (3)
3.3.3 NAME or FORMULA of the oxidising agent in the cell (1)
3.4 Calculate the initial emf of the cell above under standard conditions. (4)
3.5 How will the voltmeter reading change if the:
(Write down only INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.)
3.5.1 Size of electrode P is increased (1)
3.5.2 Initial concentration of the electrolyte in half-cell B is increased (1)
[15]
QUESTION 4
Learners are given the following two unknown half-cells:
Half-cell 1: Q2+ (aq) | Q(s)
Half-cell 2: Pt | R2(g) | R-(aq)
During an investigation to identify the two half-cells, the learners connect each half-cell
alternately to a Cd2+(aq) | Cd(s) half-cell under standard conditions. For each combination of two
half-cells, they write down the net cell reaction and measure the cell potential. The results
obtained for the two half-cell combinations are given in the table below.
COMBINATION NET CELL REACTION CELL POTENTIAL
I Q2+(aq) + Cd(s) → Cd2+(aq) + Q(s) 0,13 V
II R2(g) + Cd(s) → Cd (aq) + 2R (aq)
2+ -
1,76 V
4.1 Write down THREE conditions needed for these cells to function as standard cells. (3)
4.2 For Combination I, identify:
4.2.1 The anode of the cell (1)
4.2.2 Q by using a calculation (5)
4.3 For Combination II, write down the:
4.3.1 Oxidation half-reaction (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 62 FS/2019

4.3.2 NAME or FORMULA of the metal used in the cathode compartment (1)
4.4 Arrange the following species in order of INCREASING oxidising ability:
Q2+ ; R2 ; Cd2+
(4)
Explain fully how you arrived at the answer. A calculation is NOT required. [16]
QUESTION 5
An electrochemical cell consisting of half-cells A and B is assembled under standard conditions
as shown below.
Half-cell A Pt, Cℓ2 (101,3 kPa) | Cℓ- (1 mol∙dm-3)
Half-cell B Mg2+ (1 mol∙dm-3) | Mg(s)
5.1 At which half-cell, A or B, are electrons released into the external circuit? (1)
5.2 Write down the:
5.2.1 Reduction half-reaction that takes place in this cell (2)
5.2.2 NAME or FORMULA of the substance whose oxidation number
DECREASES (1)
5.3 Calculate the initial cell potential of this cell when it is in operation. (4)
5.4 Write down an observation that will be made in half-cell B as the cell operates. Give a (2)
reason for the answer. [10]
QUESTION 6
Magnesium (Mg) reacts with a dilute hydrochloric acid solution, HCℓ(aq), according to the
following balanced equation: Mg(s) + 2HCℓ(aq) → MgCℓ2(aq) + H2(g)
6.1 Give a reason why the reaction above is a redox reaction. (1)
6.2 Write down the FORMULA of the oxidising agent in the reaction above. (1)
It is found that silver does not react with the hydrochloric acid solution.
6.3 Refer to the relative strengths of reducing agents to explain this observation. (3)
The reaction of magnesium with hydrochloric acid is used in an electrochemical cell, as shown
in the diagram below. The cell functions under standard conditions.
V

hydrogen gas Q

Mg

platinum
1 mol·dm-3 H+(aq)

half-cell A half-cell B
6.4 What is the function of platinum in the cell above? (1)
6.5 Write down the:
6.5.1 Energy conversion that takes place in this cell (1)
6.5.2 Function of Q (1)
6.5.3 Half-reaction that takes place at the cathode (2)
6.5.4 Cell notation of this cell (3)
6.6 Calculate the initial emf of this cell. (4)
Terms, definitions, questions and answers
Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 63 FS/2019

6.7 How will the addition of concentrated acid to half-cell A influence the answer to (1)
QUESTION 6.6? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. [18]
QUESTION 7
7.1 A nickel (Ni) rod is placed in a beaker containing a silver nitrate solution, AgNO 3(aq)
and a reaction takes place.

Nickel (Ni) rod

AgNO3(aq)

Write down the:

7.1.1 NAME or FORMULA of the electrolyte (1)
7.1.2 Oxidation half-reaction that takes place (2)
7.1.3 Balanced equation for the net (overall) redox reaction that takes place (3)
7.2 A galvanic cell is now set up using a nickel half-cell and a silver half-cell.
V

Ag Ni

Ag+(aq) Ni2+(aq)

7.2.1 Which electrode (Ni or Ag) must be connected to the negative terminal of
the voltmeter? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
7.2.2 Write down the cell notation for the galvanic cell above. (3)
7.2.3 Calculate the initial reading on the voltmeter if the cell functions under
standard conditions. (4)
7.2.4 How will the voltmeter reading in QUESTION 7.2.3 be affected if the
concentration of the silver ions is increased? Choose from INCREASES, (1)
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. [16]
QUESTION 8
The electrochemical cell represented by the cell
notation below is used to investigate the
relationship between the concentration of
X2+(aq) and the emf of the cell. The
concentration of Zn2+(aq) and the temperature
are kept at standard conditions.
Zn(s) | Zn2+(aq) || X2+(aq) | X(s)
The graph shows the results obtained.
8.1 For this investigation, write down the:
8.1.1 Dependent variable (1)
8.1.2 Name of an instrument needed to
measure the emf of the cell (1)
8.1.3 Name of the component of the cell that ensures electrical neutrality (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 64 FS/2019

8.1.4 Values of TWO standard conditions needed to ensure that the standard
emf is obtained (2)
8.2 Write down the conclusion that can be drawn from the results. (2)
8.3 Identify electrode X with the aid of a calculation. (5)
8.4 Write down the overall (net) cell reaction that takes place when this cell is in operation. (3)
[15]
QUESTION 9
In the electrochemical cell shown below an aluminium electrode and another metal electrode, Y,
are used.
V 9.1 Write down the:
9.1.1 Name of component Q (1)
Q
9.1.2 Type of electrochemical cell
Aℓ Y (1)
represented above
It is found that the mass of the aluminium electrode
increases whilst the cell is functioning.
9.2 How will EACH of the following change while the
cell is functioning? Choose from INCREASES,
Aℓ3+(aq) Y2+(aq)
DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME.
9.2.1 The concentration of Aℓ3+(aq) (1)
2+
9.2.2 The concentration of Y (aq) (1)
9.3 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at electrode Y. (2)
9.4 Write down the cell notation of the cell. (3)
9.5 The initial emf of this cell measured under standard conditions is 0,7 V. Identify metal (5)
Y by means of a calculation. [14]
QUESTION 10
10.1 Learners set up a galvanic cell and measure its emf under standard conditions.
10.1.1 Write down the name of component
(1)
Y.
10.1.2 Is Aℓ the ANODE or the CATHODE? (1)
10.1.3 Write down the overall (net) cell
reaction that takes place in this cell
when it is working. (3)
10.1.4 Calculate the initial emf of this cell. (4)
10.2 Consider the half-cells, P, Q and R, represented in the table below.
HALF-CELL P HALF-CELL Q HALF-CELL R
Zn | Zn2+(aq) Cℓ | Cℓ-(aq) Cu | Cu2+(aq)
Different combinations of the half-cells above are compared to determine the highest emf
produced under standard conditions.
10.2.1 Write down the NAME of a suitable electrode for half-cell Q. (1)
10.2.2 State the standard conditions under which the half-cells should operate to
ensure a fair comparison. (2)
10.2.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the strongest reducing agent in the
half-cells above. (1)
10.2.4 Which combination of half-cells will produce the highest emf? Choose from (1)
PR, PQ or QR. (NO calculation is required.) [14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 65 FS/2019

QUESTION 11
11.1 A group of learners use the redox reaction below to construct an electrochemical cell.
Sn2+(aq) + 2Ag+(aq) → 2Ag(s) + Sn4+(aq)
11.1.1 Define a reducing agent in terms of electron transfer. (2)
11.1.2 Name a substance that should be used as electrode in the anode half-cell. (1)
11.1.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the reducing agent. (1)
11.1.4 Write down the cell notation of the cell. (3)
11.1.5 Calculate the initial emf of this cell under standard conditions. (4)
11.2 In a separate experiment, the learners place magnesium ribbon in a beaker containing a
blue solution of copper(II) sulphate. After a while the solution becomes colourless.

11.2.1 State ONE observable change in the beaker, besides a colour change of the
solution, that the learners can make. (1)
11.2.2 Refer to the relative strengths of oxidising agents or reducing agents to explain (3)
why the solution becomes colourless. [15]
QUESTION 12
12.1 Consider the electrochemical cell represented by the cell notation below, where X is an
unknown metal: Pt(s) | Fe2+(aq), Fe3+(aq) || X+(aq) | X(s)
The cell potential of this cell was found to be 0,03 V.
12.1.1 Write down the type of electrochemical cell illustrated above. (1)
12.1.2 What does the single line (|) in the above cell notation represent? (1)
12.1.3 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at the anode in the above cell. (2)
12.1.4 Identify X with the aid of a calculation. (5)
2+ 3+ 2+
12.2 A Pt(s) | Fe (aq), Fe (aq) half-cell is connected to a Cu(s) | Cu (aq) half-cell.
Write down the:
12.2.1 Chemical symbol for the electrode in the cathode half-cell (1)
12.2.2 NAME of the oxidising agent (1)
12.2.3 Overall balanced cell reaction that takes place in this cell (3)
[14]
QUESTION 13
13.1 Corrosion is a redox reaction that takes place in the presence of oxygen and water.
Rusting is the corrosion of iron leading to the formation of iron(III) ions.
13.1.1 Define oxidation in terms of electron transfer. (2)
A cleaned copper rod and a cleaned iron nail are placed in a
beaker containing water at 25 °C, as shown. After a while it
was observed that the iron nail was coated with rust. The
copper rod showed no visible signs of corrosion.
13.1.2 Write down the half-reaction for the iron nail. (2)
13.1.3 Does iron act as REDUCING AGENT or OXIDISING AGENT in the beaker? (1)
13.1.4 Explain the above observation by referring to the Table of Standard Reduction
Potentials. (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 66 FS/2019

To prevent rusting of an underground iron pipe, the

pipe is connected to a metal (Q) that corrodes easily.
13.1.5 You are given two metals, Zn and Cu, to use
as metal Q. Which metal would more
suitable? Give a reason. (2)
13.2 A galvanic cell is constructed using a Fe | Fe3+half-
cell and a Cu | Cu2+ half-cell.
13.2.1 Write down the overall (net) cell reaction that takes place when the cell is
functioning. (3)
13.2.2 Calculate the cell potential of this cell under standard conditions. (4)
[17]

ELECTROLYTIC CELLS
QUESTION 1
The simplified diagrams below represent two electrochemical cells, A and B.
A concentrated copper(II) chloride solution is used as electrolyte in both cells.
ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL A ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL B

P Q R T
Carbon Carbon

Copper Copper

Concentrated CuCℓ2(aq) Concentrated CuCℓ2(aq)

1.1 Are A and B ELECTROLYTIC or GALVANIC cells? (1)
1.2 Which of the electrodes (P, Q, R or T) will show a mass increase? Write down a half-
reaction to motivate the answer. (4)
1.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the product formed at:
1.3.1 Electrode P (1)
1.3.2 Electrode R (1)
1.4 Fully explain the answer to QUESTION 1.3.2 by referring to the relative strengths of (3)
the reducing agents involved. [10]
QUESTION 2
The apparatus below is used to demonstrate the electrolysis of a concentrated sodium chloride
solution. Both electrodes are made of carbon. A few drops of universal indicator are added to
the electrolyte. The equation for the net cell reaction is:
2NaCℓ(aq) + 2H2O(ℓ) → Cℓ2(g) + H2(g) + 2NaOH(aq)
Initially the solution has a green colour.
Power Universal indicator becomes red in acidic
source
solutions and purple in alkaline solutions.
2.1 Define the term electrolyte. (2)
Electrode Y Electrode X When the power source is switched on,
the colour of the electrolyte around
NaCℓ(aq) and
universal electrode Y changes from green to purple.
indicator 2.2 Write down the half-reaction that
takes place at electrode Y. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 67 FS/2019

2.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of the gas released at electrode X. (1)
2.4 Refer to the Table of Standard Reduction Potentials to explain why hydrogen gas, and (2)
not sodium, is formed at the cathode of this cell. [7]
QUESTION 3
The diagram shows a simplified electrolytic cell that can be used to electroplate a plastic ring
with nickel. Prior to electroplating the ring is covered with a graphite layer.
3.1 Define the term electrolyte. (2)
Battery
3.2 Give ONE reason why the plastic
ring must be coated with graphite
prior to electroplating. (1)
3.3 Write down the half-reaction that
occurs at the plastic ring. (2)
Plastic ring Nickel
coated with electrode 3.4 Write down the NAME or
graphite NiSO4(aq) FORMULA of the reducing agent
in the cell. Give a reason for the
answer. (2)
3.5 Which electrode, the RING or NICKEL, is the cathode? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
The nickel electrode is now replaced with a carbon rod.
3.6 How will the concentration of the electrolyte change during electroplating? Write down (2)
only INCREASES, DECREASES or NO CHANGE. Give a reason for the answer. [11]

QUESTION 4
The simplified diagram represents an electrochemical cell used for the purification of copper.

DC source 4.1 Define the term electrolysis. (2)

4.2 Give a reason why a direct-
current (DC) source is used in
this experiment. (1)
Electrode A
4.3 Write down the half-reaction
Electrode B which takes place at
(impure copper) electrode A. (2)
Electrolyte

4.4 Due to small amounts of zinc impurities in the impure copper, the electrolyte becomes
contaminated with Zn2+ ions. Refer to the attached Table of Standard Reduction
Potentials to explain why the Zn2+ ions will not influence the purity of the copper
obtained during this process. (3)
4.5 After the purification of the impure copper was completed, it was found that
2,85 x 10-2 moles of copper were formed. The initial mass of electrode B was 2,0 g. (4)
Calculate the percentage of copper that was initially present in electrode B. [12]
QUESTION 5
The electrochemical cell below is set up to demonstrate the purification of copper.

5.1 Write down the type of electrochemical cell illustrated

above. (1)
B A

Copper(II) chloride
solution
Terms, definitions, questions and answers
Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 68 FS/2019

The graphs below show the change in mass of the electrodes whilst the cell is in operation.
5.2 Define a reducing agent in terms of electron transfer. (2)
5.3 Which graph represents the change in mass of (1)
P electrode A?
Mass (g)

Q 5.4 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at (2)

electrode A.
5.5 Electrodes A and B are now replaced by graphite
electrodes. It is observed that chlorine gas (Cℓ2) is
released at one of the electrodes. At which electrode
(A or B) is chlorine gas formed? Fully explain how it (3)
Time (min.)
is formed. [9]
QUESTION 6
The diagram below shows an electrochemical cell used to purify copper. A solution that conducts
electricity is used in the cell.
6.1 Write down:
6.1.1 ONE word for the underlined phrase above the (1)
A B diagram
6.1.2 The type of electrochemical cell illustrated above (1)
6.2 In which direction (from A to B or from B to A) will
electrons flow in the external circuit? (1)
6.3 Which electrode (A or B) is the:
6.3.1 Cathode (1)
6.3.2 Impure copper (1)
6.4 How will the mass of electrode A change as the reaction proceeds? Choose from (2)
INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE SAME. Give a reason for the answer. [7]
QUESTION 7
In the electrochemical cell below, carbon electrodes are used during the electrolysis of a
concentrated sodium chloride solution. The balanced equation for the net (overall) cell reaction
is: 2H2O(ℓ) + 2Cℓ ─(aq) → Cℓ2(g) + H2(g) + 2OH─(aq)
Gas X Gas Y

Electrode P Electrode Q
Concentrated NaCℓ(aq)

7.1 Is the reaction EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? (1)

7.2 Is electrode P the ANODE or the CATHODE? Give a reason for the answer. (2)
7.3 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of:
7.3.1 Gas X (1)
7.3.2 Gas Y (1)
7.4 Write down the reduction half-reaction. (2)
7.5 Is the solution in the cell ACIDIC or ALKALINE (BASIC) after completion of the (2)
reaction? Give a reason for the answer. [9]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 69 FS/2019

QUESTION 8
The simplified diagram below represents a cell used to electroplate an iron medal with a thin
layer of gold.
8.1 Is this an ELECTROLYTIC or a GALVANIC
cell? (1)
8.2 Which electrode, P or the Medal, is the
anode? (1)
8.3 Write down the:
8.3.1 Half-reaction that takes place at
electrode P (2)
8.3.2 Oxidation number of gold (Au) in the electrolyte (1)
8.3.3 Energy change that takes place in this cell (1)
8.3.4 Visible change that occurs on electrode P after the cell functions for a while (1)
8.4 Besides improving appearance, state ONE other reason why the medal is
electroplated. (1)
8.5 State ONE of the two possible changes that should be made to the cell above to (1)
electroplate the medal with silver instead of gold. [9]
QUESTION 9
The simplified diagram alongside shows an
Electrode X electrolytic cell used in the industrial extraction
of aluminium (Aℓ) from aluminium oxide at
temperatures as high as 1 000 °C. Electrode X
is a carbon rod.
Carbon- The cell reaction that takes place is as follows:
lined iron Molten Aℓ2O3 dissolved 2Aℓ2O3(ℓ) → 4Aℓ(ℓ) + 3O2(g)
in cryolite 9.1 Write down the name of the ore used as (1)
Molten
Aℓ source of aluminium oxide.
9.2 Which half-reaction (OXIDATION or REDUCTION) takes place at electrode X? (1)
9.3 What is the function of the cryolite? (1)
9.4 Write down the reduction half-reaction. (2)
9.5 Write down a balanced equation that shows why the carbon rod, X, must be replaced (3)
regularly. [8]
QUESTION 10
The simplified diagram below represents an electrochemical cell used in the refining of copper.
One of the electrodes consists of impure copper.
10.1 What type of power source, AC or DC, is used to drive the
reaction in this cell? (1)
10.2 When an electric current passes through the CuCℓ 2(aq),
the mass of electrode P increases. Is electrode P the
CATHODE or the ANODE? Write down the relevant half-
reaction to support the answer. (3)
10.3 The impure copper contains zinc impurities which are
oxidised to zinc ions. Refer to the relative strengths of
oxidising agents to explain why zinc ions will not influence
the quality of the pure copper produced in this cell. (3)
10.4 Electrodes P and Q are now replaced by carbon electrodes.
10.4.1 What will be observed at electrode Q? (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 70 FS/2019

10.4.2 How will the concentration of the electrolyte change as the reaction
proceeds? Choose from INCREASES, DECREASES or REMAINS THE (1)
SAME. [9]
QUESTION 11
The graph represents the changes in mass that
occur at electrode A and electrode B in an
electrolytic cell during the purification of copper.
11.1 Define electrolysis. (2)
11.2 Which graph, A or B, represents the change
in mass of the anode during electrolysis? (1)
11.3 Write down the equation of the half-reaction
which takes place at the cathode of this cell. (2)
11.4 Use the information in the graph and
calculate the percentage purity of the (4)
impure copper. [9]
QUESTION 12
The diagram below shows an electrolytic cell used to electroplate an iron rod with COPPER.
Solution X is made up of an unknown NITRATE.
12.1 Solutions, such as solution X, are always
used in electrochemical cells.
12.1.1 Write down the general term used
to describe these solutions. (1)
12.1.2 What is the function of these
solutions in electrochemical cells? (1)
12.2 Write down the FORMULA of solution X. (1)
12.3 Which electrode (A or IRON ROD) is the
negative electrode? Give a reason for the
answer. (2)
12.4 Write down the half-reaction that takes place at electrode A. (2)
12.5 Electrode A is now replaced by a silver rod without making any other changes to the
cell. After a while, TWO metallic ions are found to be present in the solution.
12.5.1 Name the TWO metallic ions present in the solution. (2)
12.5.2 Refer to the relative strengths of oxidising agents to explain which ONE (2)
of the two ions will preferably be involved in the plating process. [11]
QUESTION 13
The electrolytic cell below is set up to obtain pure
copper from a piece of impure copper. The impure
copper contains other metals, such as platinum,
iron, cobalt, silver and nickel. The cell potential of
the power source is adjusted so that only copper is
deposited on electrode B.
13.1 Define an electrolytic cell. (2)
13.2 Write down the FORMULA of a suitable
electrolyte for this cell. (1)
13.3 Which electrode (A or B) is the cathode? Write down the relevant half-reaction taking
place at this electrode. (3)
13.4 Sludge forms below one of the electrodes while the cell above is in operation. Which
of the metals, PLATINUM, IRON, COBALT, SILVER or NICKEL, will be present in the (2)
sludge? [8]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

 Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 71 FS/2019

FERTILISERS
QUESTION 1
1.1 The flow diagram below shows the processes involved in the industrial preparation of
fertiliser Q.
Haber Ostwald
Reactants Product A Main product B
process process

Fertiliser Q
Write down the:
1.1.1 NAMES or FORMULAE of the reactants used in the
3 – 1 – 5 (36) Haber process (2)
1.1.2 Balanced equation for the formation of fertiliser Q (3)
20 kg 1.2 The diagram alongside shows a bag of NPK fertiliser. 4)
Calculate the mass of nitrogen in the bag. [9]
QUESTION 2
Reactions A, B, C and D in the flow diagram below represent the manufacturing of Fertiliser X.
SO2(g)

A B C D
SO3(g) H2S2O7(ℓ) H2SO4(ℓ) Fertiliser X

O2(g)
2.1 Write down the name of the industrial preparation of sulphuric acid. (1)
2.2 Write down the:
2.2.1 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst used in reaction A (1)
2.2.2 Balanced equation for reaction C (3)
2.3 Ammonia is one of the reactants used in reaction D to make Fertiliser X. Write down:
2.3.1 A balanced equation for reaction D (3)
2.3.2 The NAME of Fertiliser X (1)
2.4 Two 50 kg bags, containing fertilisers P and Q respectively, are labelled as follows:
Fertiliser P: 5 : 2 : 3 (25)
Fertiliser Q: 1 : 3 : 4 (20)
2.4.1 What do the numbers (25) and (20) on the labels represent? (1)
2.4.2 Using calculations, determine which fertiliser (P or Q) contains the greater (4)
mass of potassium. [14]
QUESTION 3
The industrial process for the
Sulphur V2O5
layer 1 preparation of sulphuric acid involves a
dioxide and air
V2O5 series of stages. The second stage in
layer 2 this process involves the conversion of
V2O5 sulphur dioxide into sulphur trioxide in a
layer 3
Converter converter as illustrated below. In the
V2O5
layer 4 converter the gases are passed over
vanadium pentoxide (V2O5) placed in
layers as shown.
Gas outlet
Terms, definitions, questions and answers
Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 72 FS/2019

3.1 Write down the:

3.1.1 Balanced equation for the reaction taking place in the converter (3)
3.1.2 Function of the vanadium pentoxide (1)
The table below shows data obtained during the second stage.
PERCENTAGE OF
VANADIUM TEMPERATURE OF TEMPERATURE OF
REACTANT
PENTOXIDE GAS BEFORE THE GAS AFTER THE
CONVERTED TO
LAYER REACTION (°C) REACTION (°C)
PRODUCT
1 450 600 66
2 450 518 85
3 450 475 93
4 450 460 99,5
3.2 Is the reaction in the second stage EXOTHERMIC or ENDOTHERMIC? Refer to the
data in the table to give a reason for the answer. (2)
3.3 After the conversion at each layer the gases are cooled down to 450 °C. Fully explain
why the gases must be cooled to this temperature. (3)
3.4 During the third stage sulphur trioxide is dissolved in sulphuric acid rather than in water
to produce oleum.
3.4.1 Write down the FORMULA of oleum. (1)
3.4.2 Give a reason why sulphur trioxide is not dissolved in water. (1)
3.5 Sulphuric acid reacts with ammonia to form a fertiliser. Write down a balanced (3)
equation for this reaction. [14]
QUESTION 4
Ammonia is an important fertiliser. Large amounts are prepared from hydrogen and nitrogen in
industry.
4.1 For the industrial preparation of ammonia, write down:
4.1.1 The name of the process used (1)
4.1.2 A balanced equation for the reaction that occurs (3)
4.1.3 The source of nitrogen (1)
4.2 The yield of ammonia changes with temperature and pressure during its industrial
preparation. The graphs below show how the percentage of ammonia in the reaction
mixture that leaves the reaction vessel varies under different conditions.
GRAPHS OF THE PERCENTAGE OF AMMONIA IN THE
REACTION MIXTURE VERSUS PRESSURE

300 °C
Percentage

400 °C

500 °C

Pressure (atmosphere)

4.2.1 Use the appropriate graph to estimate the percentage of ammonia present
in the reaction mixture at 240 atmosphere and 400 °C. (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 73 FS/2019

4.2.2 State TWO advantages of using high pressure in the preparation of

ammonia. (2)
4.2.3 The advantage of using a low temperature is the large percentage of
ammonia formed. What is the disadvantage of using a low temperature? (1)
4.3 Ammonia is also used in the preparation of other fertilisers such as ammonium nitrate.
Calculate the mass of nitrogen in a 50 kg bag of pure ammonium nitrate fertiliser. (3)
[12]
QUESTION 5
Ammonium nitrate is an important fertiliser. It is produced by reacting nitric acid with ammonia.
Both nitric acid and ammonia are prepared on a large scale in industry.
5.1 Write down the name of the industrial preparation of nitric acid. (1)
5.2 The catalytic oxidation of ammonia is one of the steps in the process named in
QUESTION 5.1. Write down the NAMES or FORMULAE of the TWO products formed
in this step. (2)
5.3 Write down a balanced equation for the preparation of ammonium nitrate. (3)
5.4 Calculate the mass, in kilogram, of ammonium nitrate that can be made from
6,8 x 104 kg of ammonia and excess nitric acid.
(One mole of ammonia produces one mole of ammonium nitrate.) (3)
5.5 Ammonium nitrate is often mixed with potassium chloride and ammonium phosphate.
Give a reason why it is mixed with these compounds. (1)
[10]
QUESTION 6
A chemical company produces ammonium sulphate, (NH 4)2SO4, starting from the raw materials
P, Q and R, as shown in the flow diagram below.
P Q R 6.1 Write down the NAME of raw
material:
SO2(g) 6.1.1 P (1)

nitrogen hydrogen
6.1.2 Q (1)
SO3(g) 6.1.3 R (1)
reaction 1 6.2 Write down the:
process 1 oleum 6.2.1 NAME of process 1 (1)
6.2.2 NAME of compound X (1)
compound X compound Y
6.2.3 FORMULA of compound Y (1)
6.2.4 Balanced equation for (3)
(NH4)2SO4 reaction 1

6.3 The company compares the nitrogen content of ammonium sulphate with that of
ammonium nitrate, NH4NO3.
6.3.1 Determine, by performing the necessary calculations, which ONE of the two
fertilisers has the higher percentage of nitrogen per mass. (4)
6.3.2 Write down the name of the process that should be included in the flow
diagram above if the company wants to prepare ammonium nitrate instead (1)
of ammonium sulphate. [14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 74 FS/2019

QUESTION 7
7.1 The flow diagram below shows the processes involved in the industrial preparation of
fertiliser Q.
Process Y
N2(g) + H2(g) Gas P SO2(g) + O2(g)
V2O5
H2SO4(ℓ)
Process X Compound B
H2O(ℓ)

Compound A Compound C

Fertiliser Q
Write down the:
7.1.1 Name of process X (1)
7.1.2 Name of process Y (1)
7.1.3 NAME or FORMULA of gas P (1)
7.1.4 Balanced equation for the formation of compound B (3)
7.1.5 Balanced equation for the formation of fertiliser Q (4)
7.2 The diagram alongsideshows a bag of NPK fertiliser of which
the NPK ratio is unknown. It is found that the mass of nitrogen
in the bag is 4,11 kg and the mass of phosphorus is 0,51 kg.
x – y – z (36)
Calculate the NPK ratio of the fertiliser. (4)
20 kg
[14]

QUESTION 8
8.1 The letters A to F in the table below represent some fertilisers and raw materials used
in the preparation of fertilisers.
A Sulphur B Air
B Methane E Potassium chloride
C Ammonium sulphate F Ammonium nitrate
Write down the:
8.1.1 LETTERS representing TWO raw materials used in the preparation of
compound F (2)
8.1.2 NAME or FORMULA of the acid needed to prepare compound F (1)
8.1.3 LETTER representing the solid raw material used in the contact process (1)
8.1.4 Balanced equation for the preparation of compound E (3)
8.1.5 LETTER representing the raw material that supplies the primary nutrient
needed for development of flowers (1)
8.2 A 2 kg bag of fertiliser is labelled as follows: 2 : 3 : 2 (22)
Calculate the mass of the:
8.2.1 Phosphorous in the bag (3)
8.2.2 Filler in the bag (3)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 75 FS/2019

QUESTION 9
9.1 The reactions represented below take place during one of the industrial processes
used in the fertiliser industry.
I: Pt 4NO(g) + 6H O(g)
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) ⇌ ∆H < 0
2

II: NO(g) + O2(g) ⇌ X

III: NO2 + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ HNO3(aq) + _____
Write down:
9.1.1 The name of this industrial process (1)
9.1.2 The function of Pt in reaction I (1)
9.1.3 The NAME of product X (1)
9.1.4 A balanced equation for reaction III (2)
9.1.5 TWO ways in which the yield of the NO(g) obtained in reaction I can be
increased without changing the amount of reactants and products (2)
9.2 NPK fertilisers contain NH4NO3, (NH4)3PO4 and KCℓ in varying proportions.
9.2.1 What does NPK mean? (1)
9.2.2 Consider the fertiliser illustrated alongside.

Calculate the mass, in kg, of KCℓ needed to produce

3 – 2 – 3 (25) this fertiliser.
50 kg (6)
[14]
QUESTION 10
10.1 The equations below represent two industrial processes involved in the preparation
of ammonium nitrate.

Write down the:

10.1.1 NAME of substance A (1)
10.1.2 FORMULA of substance B (1)
10.1.3 NAME given for reaction I (1)
10.1.4 NAME or FORMULA of the catalyst used in reaction I (1)
10.1.5 Name of process X (1)
10.1.6 Name of process Y (1)
10.1.7 Balanced equation for the preparation of ammonium nitrate from the
products obtained in process X and process Y (3)
10.2 A 15 kg bag of fertiliser contains 5% phosphorus, 10% nitrogen and 15%
potassium. Calculate the:
10.2.1 Mass of phosphorus in the bag (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 76 FS/2019

10.2.2 Mass of filler in the bag (3)

[14]
QUESTION 11
11.1 The diagram below shows processes involved in the production of fertiliser X and
fertiliser Z.

Write down the:

11.1.1 Balanced equation for the formation of product Q (3)
11.1.2 FORMULA of fertiliser X (1)
11.1.3 NAME of process A (1)
11.1.4 NAME of fertiliser Z (1)
11.2 A 10 kg bag of NPK fertiliser is labelled 6 : 1 : 5 (22).
11.2.1 What is the meaning of NPK? (1)
11.2.2 What is the meaning of (22) on the label? (1)
11.2.3 Calculate the mass of potassium in the bag. (4)
[12]
QUESTION 12
The flow diagram below shows the steps used to prepare fertilisers X and Y. Labels I and II
represent types of chemical reactions and P is a compound.

12.1 Write down the NAME of the reaction labelled:

12.1.1 I (1)
12.1.2 II (1)
12.2 Write down the NAME or FORMULA of:
12.2.1 Compound P (1)
12.2.2 The brown gas (1)
12.2.3 Liquid C (1)
12.3 Write down a balanced equation for:
12.3.1 The preparation of fertiliser X (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 77 FS/2019

10.3.2 Reaction I (3)

12.4 Fertiliser Y is ammonium nitrate. Calculate the mass percentage of nitrogen in fertiliser (3)
Y. [14]
QUESTION 13
In the flow diagram below, I and II represent industrial processes used in the fertiliser industry.
P and Q are chemical reactions that take place to produce ammonium sulphate and fertiliser Y
respectively.

13.1 Write down the name of the industrial process:

13.1.1 I (1)
13.1.2 II (1)
13.2 Write down the formula of:
13.2.1 Fertiliser Y (1)
13.2.2 The catalyst used in process I (1)
13.3 In reaction P, NH3(g) reacts with another substance. Write down a balanced equation
for this reaction. (3)
13.4 The following substances are present in a bag of fertiliser:
• 20 kg ammonium nitrate (NH4NO3)
• 12 kg sodium phosphate (Na3PO4)
• 18 kg potassium chloride (KCℓ) (5)
Calculate the NPK ratio of the fertiliser. [12]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 78 FS/2019

ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS
ORGANIC MOLECULES: NOMENCLATURE
QUESTION 1
1.1.1 B (1)
1.1.2 E (1)
1.1.3 F (1)
1.2.1 2-bromo-3-chloro-4-methylpentane
Marking criteria
 Correct stem i.e. pentane. 
 All substituents correctly identified. 
 Substituents correctly numbered, in alphabetical order, hyphens & commas correct.  (3)
1.2.2 Ethene  (1)
1.3.1 H Marking criteria
 Six saturated C atoms in longest
H C H chain i.e. hexane. .
H H H H H  Three methyl substituents on 2nd C
 and 4th C atom. 
H C C C C C C H

H H H H
H C H H C H

H H (2)

1.3.2 H H H O H Marking criteria
 Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C C H   Only functional group correct: 

H H H H (2)
1.4.1 Compounds with the same molecular formula  but DIFFERENT functional goups.  (2)
1.4.2 B&F (1)
[14]
QUESTION 2
2.1.1 Carboxyl group  (1)
2.1.2 Ketones  (1)
2.1.3 Addition  (1)
2.2.1 Ethene  (1)
2.2.2 4-methylhexan-3-one  (2)
2.2.3 4-ethyl-2,2-dimethylhexane  (2)
2.3 Carbon dioxide/CO2  and water/H2O  (2)
2.4.1 H Marking criteria
H C H
 Whole structure correct: 
 Only functional group correct: 
H H O

H C C C C O H

H H H (2)
2.4.2 H H H H H

H C C C C H  OR H C C C C
H H H H H H H H (2)
2.5.1 E (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 79 FS/2019

2.5.2 Substitution / halogenation / bromination  (1)

2.5.3 H Br
 Br H Marking criteria
 Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C H   Only functional group correct: 
(2)
H H H H [18]
QUESTION 3
3.1.1 B (1)
3.1.2 E (1)
3.1.3 A (1)
3.2.1 4-chloro-2,5-dimethylheptane
Marking criteria
 Correct stem i.e. heptane. 
 All substituents (chloro and dimethyl) correctly identified. 
 Substituents correctly numbered, in alphabetical order, hyphens and commas correctly used.  (3)
3.2.2 2-methylpropan-1-ol  (2)
3.2.3 O
C C C 
(1)
3.3.1 Compounds with the same molecular formula but different POSITIONS of the functional group
/ side chain / substituents on parent chain.  (2)
3.3.2 But-1-ene  AND But-2-ene  (4)
3.3.3 H Marking criteria
 Whole structure correct: 
H C H H  Only functional group correct: 
 
H C C C H
H H (2)
3.4.1 Cracking / elimination  (1)
3.4.2 Ethene  (1)
3.4.3 C4H10  (1)
3.4.4 Polyethene  H H
C C (3)
H H n [23]
QUESTION 4
4.1.1 B (1)
4.1.2 O 
C H (1)
4.1.3 CnH2n-2  (1)
4.1.4 4-ethyl-5-methylhept-2-yne Marking criteria
OR 4-ethyl-5-methyl-2-heptyne 4-ethyl  ; 5-methyl  ; hept-2-yne / 2-heptyne  (3)
4.1.5 Butan-2-one / 2-butanone  (2)
4.2.1 Alkanes  (1)
4.2.2 2-methylpropane  OR methylpropane 
H Marking criteria for structural formula:
H  Three carbons in longest chain. 
C H
H H  Methyl group on second carbon. 

H C C C H
H H H (4)
4.2.3 Chain  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 80 FS/2019

4.3.1 Haloalkanes / Alkyl halides  (1)

4.3.2 Substitution / halogenation / bromonation  (1)
[16]
QUESTION 5
5.1.1 Ketones  (1)
5.1.2 3,5-dichloro-4-methyloctane  (3)
5.1.3 H Marking criteria
 Functional group (-OH) on second C atom. 
H C H
 Whole structure correct 
H H

H C C C H

H O H

H (2)
5.2.1 Acts as catalyst. / Increases the rate of reaction.  (1)
5.2.2 Water / H2O (1)
5.2.3 5.2.4

(5) (3)
5.2.5 O

H C H (1)
5.2.6 Methyl methanoate  (2)
[19]
QUESTION 6
6.1.1 E (1)
6.1.2 C (1)
6.1.3 D (1)
6.2.1 Pent-2-yne OR 2-pentyne (2)
6.2.2 H H Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C H 
 Only functional group correct: 
H H H
H C H

H (2)
6.2.3 2-methylbut-1-ene OR 3-methylbut-1-ene
Marking criteria
 Correct stem i.e. but-1-ene/1-butene. 
 Only one type of substituent, methyl, correctly identified. 
 Entire name correct.  (3)
6.3.1 Esters  (1)
6.3.2 Sulphuric acid / H2SO4  (1)
6.3.3 Methyl propanoate  (2)
[14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 81 FS/2019

QUESTION 7
7.1.1 A OR D  (1)
7.1.2 B (1)
7.1.3 E (1)
7.1.4 D (1)
7.2.1 H Marking criteria
 Five C atoms in longest chain. 
H C H  Two Br and one methyl substituents. 
H H H H  Whole structure correct. 

H C C C C C H

H H Br Br H (3)
7.2.2 H O Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 
H C C O H   Only functional group correct: 

H (2)
7.2.3 H H Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 
C C  Only functional group correct: 

H H (2)
7.3.1 Hydrogen gas  (1)
7.3.2 Addition / Hydrogenation  (1)
[13]
QUESTION 8
8.1 A bond or an atom or a group of atoms  that determine(s) the (physical and chemical)
properties of a group of organic compounds.  (2)
8.2.1 O

C H (1)
8.2.2 Carboxyl (group)  (1)
8.3.1 Ketones  (1)
8.3.2 H H O H H H

H C C C C C C H 

H H H
H C H H C H

H H (3)
8.4.1 5-bromo-4-ethyl-2,2-dimethylhexane
Marking criteria
 Correct stem i.e. hexane. 
 All substituents (bromo, ethyl and dimethyl) correctly identified. 
 IUPAC name completely correct including numbering, sequence, hyphens and commas.  (3)
8.4.2 4-methylpent-2-yne  / 4-methyl-2-pentyne (2)
[13]
QUESTION 9
9.1.1 B (1)
9.1.2 D OR E  (1)
9.1.3 F (1)
9.2.1 Butanal  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 82 FS/2019

9.2.2 2,3,3-trimethylbut-1-ene  OR 2,3,3- trimethyl-1-butene

Marking criteria
 Correct stem i.e. but-1-ene / 1-butene. 
 Substituents correctly identified. 
 Substituents correctly numbered, hyphens and commas correctly used.  (3)
9.3 H H O H Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C H  Only functional group correct: 

H H H (2)
9.4.1 Esterification / Condensation  (1)
9.4.2 Propan-1-ol  (2)
9.4.3 H H H O Marking criteria

 Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C O H   Only functional group correct: 
H H H (2)
9.4.4 Propyl  butanoate  (2)
[16]
QUESTION 10
10.1.1 Esters  (1)
10.1.2 Ethyl  butanoate  (2)
10.1.3 Butanoic acid  (1)
10.1.4 H H H H H O Marking criteria

 Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C C C O H  Only functional group correct: 
H H H H H
(2)
10.2 H H H O H Marking criteria
  Functional group 
H C C C C C H 
 Methyl substituent 
H H H  Whole structure correct: 
H C H

H  (3)
10.3.1 CnH2n-2  (1)
10.3.2 5-ethyl-2,6-dimethylhept-3-yne OR 5-ethyl-2,6-dimethyl-3-heptyne
Marking criteria
 Correct stem i.e. hept-3-yne/3-heptyne. 
 All substituents (ethyl and dimethyl) correctly identified.  (3)
 Substituents correctly numbered, in alphabetical order, hyphens and commas correct.  [13]
QUESTION 11
11.1.1 A (1)
11.1.2 B (1)
11.1.3 D (1)
11.1.4 D (1)
11.2.1 Butanal  (1)
11.2.2 5-ethyl-6,6-dimethyloctan-3-ol OR 5-ethyl-6,6-dimethyl-3-octanol
Marking criteria:
 Stem, i.e. oct 
 Correct functional group, i.e. –ol 
 Two methyl groups and one ethyl group. 
 Correct numbering of substituents and functional group  (4)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 83 FS/2019

11.3 Compounds with the same molecular formula,  but different positions of the side
chain/substituents/functional groups on parent chain.  (2)
11.4.1 H Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 
H H O H  Only functional group correct: 

H C C C C H

H H H H (2)
11.4.2 H O H H Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C H   Only functional group correct: 

H H H (2)
11.4.3 O Marking criteria
H H
  Whole structure correct: 
H C C C O H  Only functional group correct: 
(2)
H H [17]
QUESTION 12
12.1.1 A (1)
12.1.2 D (1)
12.1.3 B (1)
12.1.4 E (1)
12.1.5 B (1)
12.2.1 H O H Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 

H C O C C H  Only functional group correct: 

H H
OR
H H O

H C C O C H

H H (2)
12.2.2 Methyl ethanoate  OR Ethyl methanoate  (2)
12.3.1 A large molecule composed of smaller monomer units covalently bonded to each other in a
repeating pattern.  (2)
12.3.2 Polyethene  (1)
12.3.3 H H H H H H

n C C C C OR ... C C ...

H H H H H H
n  (3)
12.4 Hydrolysis/Substitution  (1)
12.5  Use concentrated strong base/NaOH/KOH/LiOH 
OR ethanolic/alcoholic strong base/NaOH/KOH/LiOH. (2)
 Heat strongly  [18]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 84 FS/2019

QUESTION 13
13.1 ANY ONE:
 Alcohol/ethanol is flammable/catches fire easily. 
 To heat it evenly. (1)
13.2.1 Esterification/condensation  (1)
13.2.2 H2SO4  (1)
13.2.3 Esters  (1)
13.3 M(ester )

144 = 2
M(C 4H8 O) 72
 2 x C4H8O = C8H16O2  (2)
13.4 Ethyl  hexanoate  (2)
13.5 H H H H H O Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C C C O H   Only functional group correct: 
(2)
H H H H H [10]

ORGANIC MOLECULES: PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

QUESTION 1
1.1 Alkanes have ONLY single bonds between C atoms. OR Alkanes have NO multiple bonds. (1)
1.2.1
─C─O─H
(1)
1.2.2 H Marking criteria
 - OH group on second C atom of longest
H C H chain. 
H  H  Tertiary group consisting of four C atoms
with methyl group on 2nd C atom. 
H C C C H

H H
O
H (2)
1.3.1 Criteria for investigative question:
The dependent and independent variables are stated. 
Ask a question about the relationship between the independent and dependent variables. 
Examples:
 How does an increase in chain length influence boiling point?
 What is the relationship between chain length and boiling point? (2)
1.3.2  Structure: The chain length increases. 
 Intermolecular forces: Increase in strength of intermolecular. 
 Energy: More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces. 
OR
 Structure: From propane to methane the chain length decreases. 
 Intermolecular forces: Decrease in strength of intermolecular. 
 Energy: Less energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces.  (3)
1.4  Between propane molecules are London forces. 
 Between propan-1-ol molecules are London forces, dipole-dipole forces and hydrogen
bonds.  (3)
 Hydrogen bonds are stronger than London forces.  [12]
QUESTION 2
2.1 C (1)
2.2.1 Chain length  (1)
2.2.2 Boiling point  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 85 FS/2019

2.3 London forces  (1)

2.4 Higher than  (1)
2.5 Lower than 
 Both compounds D and E have hydrogen bonding between molecules. 
 Compound D has one site for hydrogen bonding whilst compound E has two sites for
hydrogen bonding OR can form dimers.  (4)
 More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces in compound E.  [9]
QUESTION 3
3.1 Saturated 
B has ONLY single bonds between C atoms.  OR B has NO multiple bonds. (2)
3.2.1 - 42 °C  (1)
3.2.2 78 °C  (1)
3.3  Between molecules of C/propane are London forces / induced dipole forces. 
 Between molecules of E/ethanol are (London forces / induced dipole forces and)
hydrogen bonds. 
 Hydrogen bonds / Forces between alcohol molecules are stronger.  (3)
3.4 Decrease 
From A to D:
 Chain length increases. 
 Strength of intermolecular forces increases. 
 More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces.  (4)
3.5 Higher than  (1)
[12]
QUESTION 4
4.1 A bond OR an atom OR a group of atoms  that determine(s) the (physical and chemical)
properties of a group of organic compounds.  (2)
4.2.1 D / ethanoic acid 
Lowest vapour pressure.  (2)
4.2.2 A / butane  (1)
4.3  Between molecules of A / butane are London forces. 
 Between molecules of B / propan-2-one / ketones are dipole-dipole forces  in addition to
London forces.
 Intermolecular forces in A are weaker than those in B.  (3)
4.4 London forces / induced dipole forces / dipole-dipole forces. 
OR A and B do not have hydrogen bonding. / C and D have hydrogen bonding. (1)
4.5  D has more sites for hydrogen bonding than C. / D forms dimers. 
 D has stronger intermolecular forces.  (2)
4.6 V(CO2) = 4V(C4H10) V(H2O) = 5V(C4H10) V(O2 reacted):
= (4)(8)  = (5)(8)  13
= 32 cm3 = 40 cm3 V(O2) = ( ) V(C4H10)
2
13
= ( ) (8)  = 52 cm3
2
V(O2 excess):
V(O2) = 60 – 52 = 8 cm3
(5)
Vtot = 32 + 40 + 8 = 80 cm3  [16]
QUESTION 5
5.1 Temperature at which the vapour pressure equals atmospheric pressure.  (2)
5.2 The stronger the intermolecular forces, the higher the boiling point. / The boiling point is
proportional to the strength of intermolecular forces. 
NOTE: NOT DIRECTLY proportional! (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 86 FS/2019

5.3.1  Between molecules of A / propane are London forces. 

 Between molecules of B / propan-2-one are dipole-dipole forces  in addition to London
forces.
 Intermolecular forces in A are weaker than those in B.  (3)
5.3.2  Both C and D: hydrogen bonding 
 D has two / more sites for hydrogen bonding. / D forms dimers. 
 D has stronger intermolecular forces than C.  (3)
5.4 Liquid  (1)
[10]
QUESTION 6
6.1 Temperature at which the vapour pressure equals atmospheric pressure.  (2)
6.2 Criteria for conclusion:
Dependent and independent variables correctly identified. 
Relationship between the independent and dependent variables correctly stated. 
Examples:
 Boiling point increases with increase in chain length.
 Boiling point decreases with decrease in chain length.
 Boiling point is proportional to chain length.
NOTE: Boiling point is NOT DIRECTLY proportional to chain length. (2)
6.3.1 P (1)
6.3.2 R (1)
6.4  Between alkane molecules are London forces. 
 In addition to London forces and dipole-dipole forces each alcohol molecule has one site
for hydrogen bonding. 
 In addition to London forces and dipole-dipole forces each carboxylic acid molecule has
two sites for hydrogen bonding. 
 Intermolecular forces in carboxylic acids are stronger than intermolecular forces in alkanes
and alcohols. 
 More energy is needed to overcome intermolecular forces in carboxylic acids than in the (5)
other two compounds.  [11]
QUESTION 7
7.1 Compounds with the same molecular formula  but different structural formulae. (2)
7.2 Chain  (1)
7.3 From A to C:
Structure: Less branched / less compact / larger surface area (over which intermolecular
forces act).
Intermolecular forces: Stronger intermolecular forces. 
Energy: More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces.  (3)
7.4 A
Lowest boiling point.  (2)
7.5 C5H12 + 8O2   5CO2 + 6H2O  Bal  (3)
[11]
QUESTION 8
8.1.1 H Marking criteria
  Functional group 
H C H  Methyl substituent 

H H  Whole structure correct: 

H C C C O H

H H H
(3)
8.1.2 D (1)
8.1.3 G (1)
8.2.1 Chain length/molecular size/surface area  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 87 FS/2019

8.2.2 London forces/dispersion forces/induced-induced dipole  (1)

8.3.1 108 °C  (1)
8.3.2 Compare compound F with compounds C and D:
 Compound F has a larger molecular mass/molecular size/surface area than compound C. 
 Compound F is more branched than compound D. 
 Intermolecular forces in compound F are stronger than in compound C and weaker than in
compound D. 
 More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces in compound F than in compound C
and less energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces in compound F than in D. (4)
8.4 H H
H Marking criteria
At least one structural formula of methanol as shown. 
O C H
H C O Dotted line drawn from O atom on one molecule to H
atom bonded to an O atom in the second molecule. 
H H
H (H atom should be between two O atoms.)
(2)
8.5.1 Esterification/Condensation  (1)
8.5.2 H H O H H Marking criteria
  Functional group 
H C C O C C C H   Whole structure correct: 

H H H H (2)
[17]
QUESTION 9
9.1 The temperature at which the vapour pressure equals atmospheric (external) pressure.  (2)
9.2 Flammable / Catch fire easily. / Volatile  (1)
9.3.1 Use straight chain  primary alcohols  (2)
9.3.2.  Structure: Chain length / more C atoms in chain / molecular size / molecular mass / surface
area increases from top to bottom / butan-1-ol to hexan-1-ol. 
 Intermolecular forces: Intermolecular forces / Van der Waals forces / London forces /
dispersion forces increases from top to bottom / butan-1-ol to hexan-1-ol. 
 Energy: Energy needed to overcome / break intermolecular forces increases from top to
bottom / butan-1-ol to hexan-1-ol. (3)
9.4 Remains the same  (1)
9.5.1 Functional group / Type of homologous series  (1)
9.5.2  Type of intermolecular forces:
Between molecules of aldehyde / hexanal are dipole-dipole forces. 
 Between molecules of alcohols / hexan-1ol are (in addition to dipole-dipole forces and
London forces) hydrogen bonds. 
 Strength of intermolecular forces:
Dipole-dipole forces are weaker than hydrogen bonds. 
OR Hydrogen bonds are stronger than dipole-dipole forces.
 Energy:
More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces in hexan-1-ol.  (4)
OR Less energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces in hexanal. [14]
QUESTION 10
10.1 ANY ONE:
 They have ONLY single bonds between C atoms.
 They have NO multiple bonds. (1)
10.2 The pressure exerted by a vapour in equilibrium with its liquid in a closed system.  (2)
10.3.1 Increases  (1)
10.3.2 Q
It is the temperature where the vapour pressure of compound Q equals atmospheric pressure/is
equal to 760 (mmHg). 
OR It is the temperature where the graph intercepts the dotted line. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 88 FS/2019

10.3.3 S
 At a given temperature/reference to any temperature. 
 S has the lowest vapour pressure. 
 Strongest intermolecular forces. 
OR
Highest energy needed to overcome the intermolecular forces. (4)
10.4.1 H H H H H

H C C C C H H C H

H H
H H H OR
H C C C H
H C H
H H
H H C H
2-methylbutane/methylbutane 
H
2,2-dimethylpropane/dimethylpropane  (3)
10.4.2 Higher than  (1)
[14]
QUESTION 11
11.1 150 kPa  (1)
11.2.1 The temperature at which the vapour pressure equals atmospheric/external pressure.  (2)
11.2.2 55 °C  (1)
11.3.1 Z (1)
11.3.2  Carboxylic acids have, in addition to London forces and dipole-dipole forces, two sites for
hydrogen bonding between molecules. 
OR Carboxylic acids can form dimers due to strong hydrogen bonding between molecules.
 Alcohols have, in addition to London forces and dipole-dipole forces, one site for hydrogen
bonding between molecules. 
 Ketones has, in addition to London forces, dipole-dipole forces between molecules. 
 Intermolecular forces in ethanoic acid is the strongest./Most energy needed to
overcome/break intermolecular forces in ethanoic acid.  (4)
11.3.3 Propanone  OR propan-2-one OR 2-propanone (1)
[10]
QUESTION 12
12.1  Structure: The chain length/molecular size/molecular mass/ surface area increases. 
 Intermolecular forces: Increase in strength of intermolecular forces. 
 Energy: More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces. 
OR
 Structure: From 4 C atoms to 1 C atom/bottom to top the chain length/molecular
size/molecular mass/surface area decreases. 
 Intermolecular forces: Decrease in strength of intermolecular forces. 
 Energy: Less energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces.  (3)
12.2  Alkanes have London forces. 
 Alcohols have hydrogen bonding (in addition to London forces and dipole dipole
forces). 
 Hydrogen bonding are stronger intermolecular forces than London. 
OR More energy needed to overcome intermolecular forces in alcohols
 Alcohols have higher boiling points than alkanes.  (4)
12.3 Decrease  (1)
12.4 Lower than 
2-methylpropane is more branched/has a smaller surface area than butane/chain isomer.  (2)
OR Butane/chain isomer is less branched /has larger surface area than 2-methylpropane. [10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 89 FS/2019

QUESTION 13
13.1 The temperature at which the vapour pressure of a substance equals atmospheric/external
pressure.  (2)
13.2.1 Carboxyl group  (1)
13.2.2 Propanoic acid  (1)
13.2.3 H O Marking criteria
 Whole structure correct: 

H C O C H   Only functional group correct: 

H
(2)
13.3 A
Lowest boiling point./Shortest chain length.  (2)
13.4.1 The same molecular mass/molecular size.  (1)
13.4.2 Primary 
-OH group is bonded to a C atom bonded to one other C atom.  (2)
13.4.3  Both compounds/X and B have (in addition to London forces and dipole-dipole forces)
hydrogen bonding. 
 Compound X/CH3CH2CH2OH/propan-1-ol/alcohol has one site for hydrogen bonding and
compound B/ethanoic acid/carboxylic acid has two/more sites for hydrogen bonding OR
B/ethanoic acid/carboxylic acid has two/more sites for hydrogen bonding. 
 Intermolecular forces in compound B/ethanoic acid/carboxylic acid are stronger than
intermolecular forces in compound X/CH3CH2CH2OH/ propan-1-ol/alcohol. 
OR Intermolecular forces in compound X/CH3CH2CH2OH/ propan-1-ol/alcohol are
weaker than intermolecular forces in compound B/ethanoic acid/carboxylic acid.
 More energy is needed to overcome intermolecular forces in compound B/ethanoic
acid/carboxylic acid than in compound X/CH3CH2CH2OH/ propan-1-ol/alcohol. 
OR
Less energy is needed to overcome intermolecular forces in compound (4)
X/CH3CH2CH2OH/propan-1-ol/alcohol than in compound B/ethanoic acid/carboxylic acid. [15]

ORGANIC MOLECULES: ORGANIC REACTIONS

QUESTION 1
1.1.1 Substitution / chlorination / halogenation  (1)
1.1.2 Substitution / hydrolysis  (1)
1.2.1 Hydrogenation  (1)
1.2.2 H H H H H
 

H C C C + H H H C C C H

H H H H H H (3)
1.3 Cℓ H H Marking criteria
  Whole structure correct: 
H C C C H   Only functional group correct: 

H H H
(2)
1.4.1 Esterification  (1)
1.4.2 Concentrated H2SO4 / sulphuric acid  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 90 FS/2019

1.4.3 H H H O H Marking criteria

   Whole structure correct: 
H C C C O C C H  Only functional group correct: 

H H H H (2)
1.4.4 Propyl  ethanoate  (2)
1.5 Sulphuric acid / H2SO4  (1)
[15]
QUESTION 2
2.1 Unsaturated 
Contains a double bond / multiple bond between C atoms.  (2)
2.2.1 H H H H

H C C C C H

H H O H

H (2)
2.2.2 Addition / hydration  (1)
2.3.1 2-chlorobutane  (2)
2.3.2 H H H H

H C C C C H 

Cl H H H (1)
2.4.1 H2O OR dilute NaOH / KOH  AND mild heat  (1)
2.4.2 Substitution / hydrolysis  (1)
2.4.3 C4H9Cℓ + NaOH  → C4H10O + NaCℓ  bal.  (3)
OR C4H9Cℓ + H2O  → C4H10O + HCℓ  bal.  [15]
QUESTION 3
3.1.1 Hydrolysis  (1)
3.1.2 (Mild) heat  AND dilute (strong) base/aqueous base  (2)
3.1.3 Ethanol  (1)
3.2.2 O Marking criteria
  Functional group correct: 

H C O H  Whole structure correct:  (2)
3.2.3 Ethyl methanoate  (2)
[9]
QUESTION 4
4.1.1 Esterification / Condensation  (1)
4.1.2 O

C O C 
(1)
4.1.3 Propanoic acid  (1)
4.1.4 Dehydration / elimination  (1)
4.1.5 (Concentrated) H2SO4 / sulphuric acid / H3PO4 / phosphoric acid  (1)
4.1.6 H H Marking criteria
   Only functional group correct: 
C C
 Whole structure correct: 
H H (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 91 FS/2019

4.2.1 H Marking criteria

H
 Only functional group correct: 
 
C C  Whole structure correct: 
(2)
H H
4.2.2 Addition  (1)
[10]
QUESTION 5
5.1.1 Addition  (1)
5.1.2 Polyethene  (1)
5.2.1 Chloroethane  (2)
5.2.2 Hydrohalogenation/hydrochlorination  (1)
5.3.1 H O Marking criteria
   Only functional group correct: 
H C C O H  Whole structure correct: 

H (2)
5.3.2 HCℓ / hydrogen chloride  (1)
5.4.1 Saturated  There are no double / multiple bonds between C atoms.  (2)
5.4.2 H2 / hydrogen gas (1)
5.4.3 2C2H6 + 7O2  → 4CO2 + 6H2O  Bal.  (3)
[14]
QUESTION 6
6.1.1 Addition / Hydrogenation  (1)
6.1.2 Elimination / Dehydrohalogenation / Dehydrobromination  (1)
6.1.3 Substitution / Halogenation / Bromination  (1)
6.2.1 Pt / platinum  (1)
6.2.2 H2SO4 / sulphuric acid  (1)
6.2.3 Hydration  (1)
6.2.4 2-bromopropane  (2)
6.3 H H H H H H

H C C C H H C C C H  + H2O 

H O H H Whole structure of alkene correct: 


Only functional group correct: 
H (5)
6.4 Higher temperature  (2)
Concentrated base  [15]
QUESTION 7
7.1.1 High temperature / heat / high energy / high pressure  (1)
7.1.2 C6H12  (1)
7.1.3 Alkenes  (1)
7.2 X / C6H12 / Alkene 
OPTION 1
 X has a double bond. / X is unsaturated. 
 X can undergo addition. 
 X will react without light / heat. 
OPTION 2
 Butane is an alkane OR butane is saturated. 
 Butane can only undergo substitution. 
 Butane will only react in the presence of light or heat.  (4)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 92 FS/2019

7.3.1 2-chlorobutane  (2)

7.3.2 Substitution / Hydrolysis  (1)
7.3.3 H H H H Marking guidelines
  Whole structure of alkene correct: 
H C C C C H  Only functional group correct: 

H H

7.3.4 Hydration  (1)

[13]
QUESTION 8
8.1.1 Addition/hydrogenation  (1)
8.1.2 Substitution/halogenation/chlorination  (1)
8.1.3 Elimination/dehydration  (1)
8.2 2-bromopropane  (2)
8.3.1 Dehydrohalogenation/Dehydrobromination  (1)
8.3.2 ANY TWO:
Strong base 
Concentrated base 
Strongly heated or hot base (2)
8.4.1 H2O/NaOH/KOH  (1)
8.4.2 H H H  H H H 
 
H C C C H + H−Cℓ H C C C H + H O

H O H H Cℓ H H
(4)
H [13]
QUESTION 9
9.1.1 Substitution / hydrolysis  (1)
9.1.2 H2O/water  OR Dilute sodium hydroxide /NaOH(aq) / Dilute potassium hydroxide/KOH(aq) (1)
9.1.3 Tertiary  (1)
9.1.4 Elimination / dehydrohalogenation / dehydrobromination  (1)
 
9.1.5 2-methylprop-1-ene / methylpropene / 2-methylpropene (2)
9.1.6 Halogenation / bromination  (1)
9.1.7 H H H Br Br


H C C C H + Br-Br H C C C H

H H H
H C H H C H
 Whole structure correct. 
H
 Only functional group correct.  H
(4)
9.2.1 Monomers  (1)
9.2.2 Alkenes  (1)
9.2.3 Addition (polymerisation)  (1)
[14]
QUESTION 10
10.1 Secondary 
The C atom bonded to the (–)OH (group) is bonded to TWO other C atoms. 
OR One H atom is bonded to the C atom that the –OH group is bonded to. (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 93 FS/2019

10.2.1 Dehydration  (1)

10.2.2 Hydration  (1)
10.2.3 Dehydrohalogenation/dehydrobromination  (1)
10.3.1 Substitution/Hydrolysis  (1)
10.3.2  Dilute (strong) base/ dilute sodium hydroxide/ dilute NaOH  OR Add water.
 Moderate temperature/(mild) heat/Reactants are heated.  (2)
10.3.3 2-bromo butane  (2)
10.4 NaOH/KOH  (1)
10.5 H H H H  H H H H 

H C C C C H + H−H H C C C C H
H H H H H H (3)
10.6 Butane  (1)
[15]
QUESTION 11
11.1 The chemical process in which longer chain hydrocarbon molecules are broken down  to
shorter more useful molecules.  (2)
11.2.1 III  (1)
11.2.2 II  (1)
11.2.3 I (1)
11.3.1 Heat/Light  (1)
11.3.2 P or S  (1)
11.3.3 Ethene  (1)
11.3.4 C8H18  (2)
11.3.5 H H H H Marking criteria:
 Whole structure correct: 
H C C C C H   4 C atoms in chain: 

H H H H (2)
11.3.6 H H Marking criteria:
   Whole structure of alkene/haloalkane
H C C C C H correct:  (2)
H H H H  Only functional group correct:  [14]
QUESTION 12
12.1.1 Substitution/halogenation/bromonation (1)
12.1.2 Elimination/dehydration  (1)
12.1.3 Esterification/condensation  (1)
12.1.4 Addition/hydrohalogenation/hydrobromonation  (1)
12.2.1 Catalyst/dehydrating agent/speeds up reaction  (1)
12.2.2 Propyl  ethanoate  (2)
12.2.3 H O Marking criteria:
  Whole structure of alkene/haloalkane
H C C O H  correct: 
 Only functional group correct: 
H (2)
12.3 H H H H H H
 
H C C C H + HBr  H C C C H + H2O 

H H O H H Br (5)

[14]
H
Terms, definitions, questions and answers
Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 94 FS/2019

QUESTION 13
13.1.1 (A series of organic) compounds that can be described by the same general formula/functional
group. 
OR (A series of organic) compounds in which one member differs from the next by a CH2 group. (2)
13.1.2 Substitution/halogenation/bromination  (1)
13.1.3 HBr  (1)
13.1.4 Br H H H Marking criteria
  Br on first C atom: 
H C C C C H   Whole structure correct: 

H H H H (2)
13.1.5 C5H12 + 8O2   5CO2 + 6H2O  Bal  (3)
13.1.6 The (chemical) process in which longer chain hydrocarbons/longer chain alkanes are broken
down to shorter/more useful hydrocarbons/molecules/ chains/alkanes and alkenes.  (2)
13.1.7 H H H H Marking guidelines
  One or more H atoms omitted: - 1
H C C C C H  Condensed or semi-structural formula: - 1

H H H H
(2)
13.2.1 Butan-2-ol  OR 2-butanol  (2)
13.2.2 H H H Marking criteria:
  Whole structure of alkene/haloalkane correct: 

H C C C C H  Only functional group correct: 

H H H (2)
[17]

REACTION RATE AND ENERGY IN CHEMICAL REACTIONS

QUESTION 1
1.1 Change in concentration of products / reactants  per unit time.  (2)
1.2.1 Temperature  (1)
1.2.2 Rate of reaction / Volume of gas formed per unit time  (1)
1.3  Larger mass / amount / surface area. 
 More effective collisions per unit time. / More particles collide with sufficient kinetic
energy & correct orientation per unit time.  (3)
1.4 Marking criteria
Compare Reaction in exp. 1 is faster than in exp. 2 due to higher acid concentration. 
Exp.1 with Therefore the gradient of the graph representing exp. 1 is greater /

Exp. 2: steeper than that of exp. 2.
Compare The reaction in exp. 3 is faster than that in exp. 1 due to the higher

Exp. 1 with temperature.
Exp 3 & 4: The reaction in exp. 4 is faster than that in exp. 1 due to the higher
temperature / larger surface area.

OR Graph A represents exp. 4 due to the greater mass of CaCO3 - greater
yield of CO2 at a faster rate.
Therefore the gradient of the graphs of exp. 3 & 4 are greater/steeper than

that of exp. 1.
Final answer C  (6)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 95 FS/2019

1.5 V 4,5
n(CO2) = =  = 0,18 mol
Vm 25,7
n(CaCO3) = n(CO2) = 0,18 mol 
m m
n(CaCO3) =  0,18 =  m(CaCO3) = 18 g
M 100  (5)
m(CaCO3) not reacted: 25 – 18  = 7,00 g  [18]
QUESTION 2
2.1 Exothermic  Temperature increases during reaction. / Ti ˂ Tf  (2)
2.2 Larger surface area in experiment 2.  (1)
2.3 More than one independent variable.  OR Different concentrations and state of division. (1)
2.4 Faster than 
A catalyst is used in experiment 5. 
 A catalyst provides an alternative pathway of lower activation energy. 
 More molecules have sufficient kinetic energy. 
 More effective collisions per unit time.  (5)
2.5 m 1,2
n(Zn) = =  = 0,018 mol
M 65
n(HCℓ)reacted = 2n(Zn) = 2(0,018) = 0,037 mol 
n 0,037 (6)
Rate = = = 4,63 x 10-3 mol∙s-1 
t 8 [15]
QUESTION 3
3.1 Exothermic  ∆H < 0 / Energy is released.  (2)
3.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
3.2.1 n(HCℓ) = cV n 0  1,5 
= (1,5)  (30 x 10-3)  = 0,045 mol Ave rate =  = 
t 60  1 
n 0  45  = 0,025 mol∙dm-3∙s-1
Ave rate =  = 
t 60  1   average rate = (0,025)(30 x 10-3) 
= 7,5 x 10-4 mol∙s-1  = 7,5 x 10-4 (mol∙s-1)  (5)
3.2.2(a) Increases 
 The reaction is exothermic, resulting in an increase in temperature. 
 More molecules have sufficient kinetic energy. 
 More effective collisions per unit time.  (4)
3.2.2(b) Decreases 
Concentration of acid decreases.  OR The surface area of magnesium decreases. (2)
3.3 ANY TWO
 Higher temperature 
 Larger surface area/state of division/contact area of Mg. / Use Mg powder.  (2)
 Addition of a catalyst. [15]
QUESTION 4
4.1 Time: Stop watch  Volume: Gas syringe / burette  (2)
4.2.1 t1  (1)
4.2.2 t3  (1)
4.3 Between t1 and t2  (1)
4.4
Exp. 2
Volume (cm3)

 Marking criteria
 Exp. 1 Initial gradient higher than that of Exp.1. 
Exp.
2 Curve reaches same constant volume as
 
Exp. 3 for Exp. 1 (but earlier).

Exp.3 Initial gradient lower than that of Exp.1. 
Curve reaches a smaller constant volume

as for Exp. 1 (later stage).
Time (s) (4)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 96 FS/2019

4.5.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2

n(HCℓ) = cV = (0,1)(100 x 10-3)  n(HCℓ) = cV = (0,1)(100 x 10-3)  = 0,01 mol
= 0,01 mol n(Zn reacted) = ½n(HCℓ) = ½(0,01) 
n(Zn reacted) = ½n(HCℓ) = ½(0,01)  = 5 x 10-3 mol
= 5 x 10-3 mol m 0,8
m(Zn reacted) = (5 x 10 )(65)  = 0,325 g
-3 n(Zn)i = =  = 1,23 x 10-2 mol
m(Znf) = 0,8 – 0,325  M 65
= 0,48 g  (0,475 g) n(Zn)f = 1,23 x 10-2 – 5 x 10-3  = 7,3 x 10-3 mol
m(Zn) = nM = (7,3 x 10-3)(65) = 0,47 g  (5)
4.5.2 Smaller than  (1)
[15]
QUESTION 5
5.1 ANY TWO:
Increase temperature.  ; Increase concentration of acid.  ; Add a catalyst. (2)
5.2 Change in concentration of products / reactants  per unit time.  (2)
5.3.1

(3)
5.3.2

(3)
5.3.3 1,15 to 1,25 mol∙dm 
-3
(1)
5.3.4  Concentration of reactants decreases. 
 Less particles per unit volume. 
 Less effective collisions per unit time.  (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 97 FS/2019

5.3.5

(5)
[19]
QUESTION 6
6.1 ANY TWO:
Temperature of reaction mixture ; Addition of a catalyst  ; Concentration of reactants (2)
6.2 Sulphur / S  (1)
6.3 Water is used to dilute/change the concentration of the Na2S2O3(aq)  (1)
6.4 Criteria for investigative question:
The dependent and independent variables are stated correctly. 
Asks a question about the relationship between dependent and independent variables. 
Dependent variable: reaction rate
Independent variable: concentration
Examples: What is the relationship between concentration and reaction rate?
How does the reaction rate change with change in concentration? (2)
6.5 A (1)
6.6 Experiment B:
 The concentration of Na2S2O3(aq) is higher. / More Na2S2O3 particles per unit volume. 
 More particles with correct orientation. 
 More effective collisions per unit time.  (3)
6.7 OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3
250 cm3 ..... 62,5 g
 
10 cm3 .......  x 62,5

   m(Na2S2O3in D) = 2,5 g

=

=

 = 0,0158 mol

n(S) = (Na2S2O3)  = 0,0158

n(Na2S2O3 in D) = cV = (1,58)(0,01) 
= 0,0158 mol m = 0,51 g (7)
 [17]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 98 FS/2019

QUESTION 7
7.1.1 The minimum energy needed for a reaction to take place.  (2)
7.1.2
75
Potential energy (kJ) Marking criteria
Shape of curve for exothermic

0 reaction as shown.
Energy of activated complex shown

as 75 kJ in line with the peak.
Energy of products shown as −

196 kJ below the zero.
-196 0
IF: Wrong shape, e.g. straight line. 3
Course of reaction (3)
7.1.3 Marking criteria
 Dotted line (---) on graph in Q7.1.2 showing lower energy for activated complex. 
 Dotted curve starts at/above energy of reactants and ends at/above energy of products on
the inside of the original curve.  (2)
7.1.4  A catalyst provides an alternative pathway of lower activation energy. 
 More molecules have sufficient kinetic energy. 
 More effective collisions per unit time.  (3)
7.2.1 V 52  16 
Ave rate = = = 1,2 (dm3∙s-1) 
t 40  10  (3)
7.2.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3
V 60 24 dm3 : 1 mol V 60
n(O2) = = 60 dm3 : 2,5 mol  n(O2) = =  = 2,5 mol
Vm 24  n(H2O2) = 2n(O2) Vm 24
= 2,5 mol = 2(2,5)  m m
n(H2O2) = 2n(O2) = 2(2,5)  = 5 mol n(O2) =  2,5 =
= 5 mol M 32
34 g : 1 mol
m m x : 5 mol   m = 80 g
n(H2O2) =  5 = x = 170 g  2(34) g  H2O2 .......32 g O2
M 34  x g H2O2 ................ 80 g O2
 m = 170 g  m(H2O2) = 170 g  (4)
7.2.3 Equal to  (1)
7.3.1 Q (1)
7.3.2 P (1)
[20]
QUESTION 8
8.1.1 To measure volume of gas/oxygen produced.  (1)
8.1.2 Catalyst/Speeds up the reaction./Increases reaction rate.  (1)
8.2 No more gas/bubbles produced. (1)
8.3 CuO/Copper(II) oxide/catalyst  (1)
8.4  A catalyst provides an alternative pathway of lower activation energy. 
 More molecules have sufficient/enough kinetic energy. 
OR More molecules have kinetic energy equal to or greater than the activation energy.
 More effective collisions per unit time./Frequency of effective collisions increases.  (3)
8.5.1 Released  Products at lower energy than reactant./Reaction is exothermic/∆H < 0  (2)
8.5.2 B (1)
8.6
n(O2)produced =
V
=
0,4
= 0,016 mol  n(H2O2)used = 2(0,016)  = 0,032 mol
Vm 25
n 0,032 c 0  0,64 
[H2O2] = =  = 0,64 mol∙dm-3  Rate =  =  = 0,11 (mol∙dm-3∙min-1)  (6)
V 0,05 t 5,8  0  [16]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 99 FS/2019

QUESTION 9
9.1 ANY TWO
 Increase temperature of HCℓ. 
 Add a catalyst. 
 Increase the concentration of HCℓ.
 Increase the state of division of CuCO3. (2)
9.2 Accepted range: 42 s to 50 s  (1)
9.3.1 m (169,76  170,00)
ave rage   =   0,012 (g  s 1 ) 
t (20  0)
If answer is negative (minus 1 mark) (3)
9.3.2 Pure sample: m(CO2)formed = 170,00 – 169,73  = 0,27 g
Impure sample: m(CO2)formed = 170,00 - 169,78  = 0,22 g
0,22
%Purity =  100  = 81,48% 
0,27 (4)
9.3.3 m 0,27
n(CO 2 ) formed   = 6,13 x 10-3 mol
M 44
V
n(CO 2 ) 
V
 6,13  10 3   V = 0,137 dm3 
Vm 22,4 (3)
9.4

Marking criteria for sketch graph:


Volume

Graph drawn from origin with decreasing


gradient.
 Constant volume after (42 -50) s.or graph

stops at (42 -50) s.
If no labels on axes: minus 1.
42 - 50 Time (s) (2)
[15]
QUESTION 10
10.1 Change in concentration of products/reactants per (unit) time.  (2)
10.2 Marking criteria
Independent (concentration) and dependent (reaction rate) variables correctly identified. 
Ask a question about the relationship between the independent and dependent variables. 

Examples:
 What is the relationship between concentration and reaction rate?
 How does the reaction rate change when the concentration changes/increases/
decreases?
IF the answer to the question is ''YES'' or ''NO'': Max. 1 mark
Examples: Does reaction rate increase with increase in concentration?
Is there a relationship between reaction rate and concentration? (2)
10.3 Q
 Reaction I has the lower (HCℓ) concentration. 
 Smaller/less steep gradient. 
OR Take longer to complete./Slower reaction rate./Produce less product per unit time./Take
longer for the maximum volume of gas to form. (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 100 FS/2019

10.4 OPTION 1 OPTION 2

V V V V
Ave rate =  15 =  Ave rate =  15 x 10-3 = 
t 30 ( 0) t 30 ( 0)
V(H2)produced = 450 cm3 V(H2)produced = 0,45 dm3
V 450 V 0,45
n(H2)produced = = n(H2)produced = =
Vm 24 000 Vm 24
= 0,0188 mol = 0,0188 mol
n(Zn) = n(H2) = 0,0188 mol 
m m
n(Zn)used =  0,0188 =  m(Zn) = 1,22 g 
M 65 (5)
10.5.1 Equal to  (1)
10.5.2 Equal to  (1)
10.6  At higher temperature the (average) kinetic energy of particles is higher. 
 More molecules have sufficient/enough kinetic energy. 
OR More molecules have kinetic energy equal to or greater than the activation energy. (3)
 More effective collisions per unit time.  [17]
QUESTION 11
11.1 Change in concentration  of a reactant/product per unit time.  (2)
11.2 Greater than  (1)
11.3 Graph of average reaction rate versus volume of Na 2S2O3(aq)
5
Average reaction rate /Gemiddelde reaksietempo (x10-2 s-1 )

4.5

3.5

2.5

1.5

0.5

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Volume of/van Na2 S2 O3(aq) (cm3)

Marking criteria
Any 3 points correctly plotted.
All (5) points correctly plotted.
Straight line drawn. (3)
11.4.1 Marking criteria
y axis/y-as: 2,5 x 10-2 s-1 
Dotted line drawn from the y-axis to the x-axis as shown. 
V = 28 to 30 cm3  (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 101 FS/2019

11.4.2 Criteria for conclusion

Dependent and independent variables correctly identified. 
Relationship between the independent and dependent variables correctly stated. 
Examples:
 Reaction rate of reaction increases with an increase in concentration/volume of sodium
thiosulphate.
 Reaction rate decreases with a decrease in concentration/volume of sodium thiosulphate.
 Reaction rate is (directly) proportional to concentration/volume of sodium thiosulphate. (2)
11.5  More Na2S2O3 particles per unit volume. 
 More effective collisions per unit time./Higher frequency of effective collisions. 
 Increase in reaction rate.  (3)
m m
11.6
n(S)produced =
m
=
1,62
= 0,05 mol n(Na2S2O3) =
M
 0,05 = 158
M 32 
n(Na2S2O3) = n(S) = 0,05 mol   m(Na2S2O3) = 7,90g  (4)
[18]
QUESTION 12
12.1 Change in concentration of products/reactants per (unit) time.  (2)
12.2.1 Surface area/State of division  (1)
12.2.2 ANY ONE:
 Amount/mass of magnesium 
 Concentration of HCℓ/acid
 (Initial) temperature/ (1)
12.3.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
△m(Mg) = 2,6 - 0,2  = 2,4 g m 2,6
m 2,4
n(Mg)t = 2 s = = = 0,1083 mol
M 24 
n(Mgused) = = = 0,1 mol 0,2
M 24  n(Mg)t = 10 s = = 0,0083 mol
24
n(H2) = n(Mg) = 0,1 mol  △n(Mg) = 0,1083 - 0,0083  = 0,1 mol
V(H2) = nVm = (0,1)(25)  = 2,5 dm3  n(H2) = n(Mg) = 0,1 mol 
V(H2) = nVm = (0,1)(25)  = 2,5 dm3  (5)
12.3.2 n 
ave rate / gem. tempo   2,08 x 10-4 = n  △n = 0,125 mol
t (10  60 )  0 
n(Mg) = n(H2) = 0,125 mol  and m(Mg) = nM = 0,125 x 24  = 3 g  (2,995 g) (5)
12.4  Larger surface area/state of division. 
 More particles (per volume) with correct orientation.  (3)
More effective collisions per (unit) time./Frequency of effective collisions increases.  [17]

QUESTION 13
13.1 Temperature  (1)
13.2 Change in concentration of products/reactants per (unit) time.  (2)
13.3 14 min  (2)
13.4.1 Graph B 
(Experiment 3) has the highest (acid) concentration/more particles/higher number of moles.  (2)
13.4.2 Graph C 
(Experiment 5) is at highest temperature/more particles with sufficient kinetic energy.  (2)
13.5.1 Speeds up the reaction./Increases the reaction rate.  (1)
13.5.2 Equal to  (1)
13.6 m 1,5
n(Zn) = = = 0,023 mol
M 65 
n
rate =  = - ( 0 - 0,023) = 1,65 x 10-3 (mol·min-1)  (4)
t 14 - 0  [15]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 102 FS/2019

CHEMICAL EQUILIBRIUM
QUESTION 1
1.1 The stage in a chemical reaction when the rate of forward reaction equals the rate of reverse
reaction. 
OR The stage in a chemical reaction when the concentrations of reactants and products remain
constant. (2)
1.2 OPTION 1
 171  =   [N2O4] = 171 x (0,2)2 = 6,84 mol∙dm-3
[N 2 O 4 ] [N 2 O 4 ]
Kc = 
[NO 2 ] 2 (0,2) 2

NO2 N2O4
Initial quantity (mol) 1,11  0
Change (mol) subtract  1,094 0,55  ratio 
Quantity at equilibrium (mol)/ 0,016 0,55
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 0,2 6,84 x 0,08 
OPTION 2
  171  = 2 4   [N2O4] = 171 x (0,2)2 = 6,84 mol∙dm-3
[N 2 O 4 ] [N O ]
Kc =
2
[NO 2 ] (0,2) 2
Equilibrium moles:
n(N2O4) = (6,84)(0,080) = 0,55 mol
 x 0,08 dm3
n(NO2) = (0,2)(0,080) = 0,016 mol
n(N2O4 formed) = 0,55 – 0 = 0,55 mol 
Ratio: n(NO2 reacted) = 2n(N2O4 formed) = 2(0,55) = 1,094 mol 
Initial n(NO2) = 0,016 + 1,094  = 1,11 (mol)  (8)
1.3.1 Concentration (of the gases) increases. / Molecules become more condensed or move closer
to each other.  (1)
1.3.2  Increase in pressure favours the reaction that leads to smaller number of moles of gas. 
 Forward reaction is favoured. 
 Number of moles/amount of N2O4 / colourless gas increases.
OR Number of moles/amount of NO2 / brown gas decreases.  (3)
1.4.1 Darker  (1)
1.4.2 Decreases  (1)
[16]
QUESTION 2
2.1 A reaction is reversible when products can be converted back to reactants.  (1)
2.2 No change  (1)
2.3.1 Temperature decreases  (1)
2.3.2  Decrease in temperature decreases the rate of both forward and reverse
reactions. 
 Decrease in temperature favours the exothermic reaction. 
 The rate of the reverse (exothermic) reaction is faster or the reverse reaction is favoured.  (3)
2.4

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 103 FS/2019

(6)
2.5 1
Kc = = 50 
0,02 (1)
2.6 Increases  (1)
[14]
QUESTION 3
3.1 When the equilibrium (in a closed system) is disturbed, the system will re-instate a new
equilibrium  by favouring the reaction that will cancel the disturbance.  (2)
3.2.1 Remains the same  (1)
3.2.2 Increases  (1)
3.3 OPTION 1
Kc = [NH3][H2S] 
 1,2 x 10-4  = [NH3][H2S]
 [NH3] = [H2S] = 0,011 mol∙dm-3
n(NH3) = cV = (0,011)(5)  = 0,06 mol (0,06 mol)
n(NH4HS) = n(NH3) = 0,06 mol 
m(NH4HS) = nM = (0,06)(51)  = 2,81 g 
OPTION 2
NH4HS NH3 H2S
Initial quantity (mol) 0 0
Change (mol) x x x
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) - x x
x x Divide by
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) - 5
5 5
Kc = [NH3][H2S] 
x x
 1,2 x 10-4 = ( )( )  x = 0,0547 mol
5 5
m(NH4HS) = nM = (0,0547)  (51)  = 2,79 g  (6)
3.4 Decreases 
 Increase in pressure favours the reaction that leads to the smaller number of moles of
gas.  (3)
 The reverse reaction is favoured.  [13]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 104 FS/2019

QUESTION 4
4.1 Equal to   (1)
4.2 [X3 ]2 (0,226 ) 2 
Kc = = = 236,46 
[X 2 ]3 (0,06) 3  (4)
4.3.1 Increases 
4.3.2  The increase in [X3] is opposed. / Change is opposed. 
 The reverse reaction is favoured. / X3 is used. / [X3] decreases.  (2)
4.4 Higher than  (1)
4.5 Exothermic 
 The concentration of the product / X3(g) is lower. / The concentration of the reactant / X2(g)
is higher. 
 The increase in temperature favoured the reverse reaction. 
 According to Le Chatelier's principle an increase in temperature favours the endothermic
reaction. 
OR
 [X3] decreases and [X2] increases. 
 Kc decreases if temperature increases. 
 Decrease in temperature favoured the forward reaction.  (4)
4.6
Number of particles

Marking criteria
300 °C Peak of curve at 400 °C lower than at 300 °C

and shifted to the right.
Curve at 400 °C has larger area at the higher Ek. 
400 °C

(2)
Kinetic energy [15]
QUESTION 5
5.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
m 2,2 m 2,2
c = = 0,01 mol∙dm-3 n = = 0,05 mol
MV 44  5 M 44
n 0,05
c = = 0,01 mol∙dm-3
V 5 (4)
5.2 For equilibrium, a forward and a reverse reaction are needed. 
OR Without CaO(s), the reverse reaction is not possible. (1)
5.3 CO2 is a gas and will escape if the container is not sealed.  (1)
5.4 OPTION 1

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 105 FS/2019

OPTION 2

(7)
5.5.1 Remains the same  (1)
5.5.2 Decreases  (1)
5.6 Endothermic 
 Kc decreases with decrease in temperature. 
 Therefore the product of the concentration of products decreases./The reverse reaction is
favoured.  (4)
 A decrease in temperature favours the exothermic reaction.  [19]
QUESTION 6
6.1 Reversible reaction  (1)
6.2 Endothermic  ΔH is positive. / ΔH > 0  (2)
6.3 Larger than  Kc > 1  (2)
6.4 OPTION 1
m 168
n = = 6 mol
M 28
CO2 CO
Initial quantity (mol) x 0
Change (mol) 3 6 ratio 
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) x–3 6
x3
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 3 Divide by 2 
2
(3 ) 2
 14  =   x = 4,29 mol 
[CO] 2
Kc  
[CO 2 ] x3
2
OPTION 2
m 168 n 6
n = = 6 mol and c = = 3 mol∙dm-3
M 28 V 2
CO2 CO
Initial concentration (mol∙dm-3) x 0
Change (mol∙dm-3) 1,5 3 ratio 
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm ) -3
x – 1,5 3
(9)
2
  14  =   x = 2,14 mol∙dm-3
2
[CO] (3 )
Kc 
[CO 2 ] x  1,5
n(CO2) = cV = (2,14)(2) = 4,29 mol 
6.5.1 Remains the same  (1)
6.5.2 Decreases  (1)
6.5.3 Increases  (1)
[17]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 106 FS/2019

QUESTION 7
7.1 The stage in a chemical reaction when the rate of forward reaction equals the rate of reverse
reaction. 
OR The stage in a chemical reaction when the concentrations / quantities of reactants and
products remain constant. (2)
7.2.1 Remains the same  (1)
7.2.2 Decreases 
 When the temperature is increased the reaction that will oppose this increase / decrease
the temperature will be favoured. OR The forward reaction is exothermic.
 An increase in temperature favours the endothermic reaction. 
 The reverse reaction is favoured.  (4)
7.3 Marking criteria
 Vertical parallel lines show a sudden increase in
Reaction rate (mol∙s-1)

 rate of both forward and reverse reactions. 

 Horisontal parallel lines showing a constant
 higher rate for both forward and reverse
catalysed reactions after time t1. 

Time (s)
t1 (2)
7.4 OPTION 1
m 2,39
n(PbS) = = = 0,01 mol
M 239 
n(H2S)equilibrium = n(PbS)  = 0,01 mol

H2 H2S
Initial quantity (mol) 0,16 0
Change (mol) 0,01 0,01  ratio 
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) 0,15  0,01
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 0,075 0,005 divide by 2 

[H 2 S] 0,005
Kc  =  = 0,067  0,07 
[H 2 ] 0,075
OPTION 2
m 2,39
n(PbS) = = = 0,01 mol
M 239 
n(H2S)reacted = n(PbS)  = 0,01 mol = n(H2S)equilibrium
n(H2S)formed = n(H2S)equilibrium – n(H2S)initial = 0,01 – 0  = 0,01 mol
n(H2)reacted = n(H2S)formed  = 0,01 mol
n(H2)equilibrium = n(H2)initial - n(H2)reacted = 0,16 - 0,01  = 0,15 mol
n 0,15
c(H2) = = = 0,075 mol∙dm-3
V 2 Divide by 2
n 0,01
(H2S) = = = 0,005 mol∙dm-3
V 2
[H 2 S] 0,005
Kc  =  = 0,067  (9)
[H 2 ] 0,075 [18]
QUESTION 8
8.1.1 Products can be converted back to reactants. 
OR Both forward and reverse reactions can take place. (1)
8.1.2 Endothermic  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 107 FS/2019

8.1.3  Kc increases with increase in temperature. 

 Forward reaction is favoured./Concentration of products increases./ Concentration of
reactants decreases. 
 Increase in temperature favours an endothermic reaction.  (3)
8.1.4 Increases  (1)
8.1.5 Remains the same  (1)
8.2.1 OPTION 1
Cℓ2 Ti
Initial quantity (mol) 6 7
Change (mol) 2 1 Use mole ratio
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) 4 6
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 2 Divide by 2
1 1
Kc = 2
=  = 0,25 
[Cl2 ] (2)2
OPTION 2
m 48
n(Ti)reacted = = = 1 mol and n(Cℓ2)reacted = 2n(Ti) = 2(1)  = 2 mol
M 48 
m 426
n(Cℓ2)initial = = = 6 mol
M 71 
n(Cℓ2)equilibrium = 6 – 2  = 4 mol
n 4
c= = = 2 mol·dm-3
V 2
1 1
Kc = =  = 0,25 
[Cl 2 ] 2
(2)2 (8)
8.2.2 Remains the same  (1)
[16]
QUESTION 9
9.1 Amount / number of moles / volume of (gas) reactants equals amount/number of moles/volume
of (gas) products. 
OR A change in pressure will change the concentration of the reactants and products equally. (1)
9.2 OPTION 1

Kc 
[HI] 2
  55,3  = [HI] 2
  [HI] = 0,08112 mol∙dm-3
[H 2 ][I 2 ] (0,014 )(0,0085 )
H2 I2 HI
Initial mass (g) (0,09812)(254) 
= 24,92 g 
Initial quantity (mol) 0,1091 0,09812 0
Change (mol) 0,08112 0,08112 0,1622  Using
ratio 
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) 0,028 0,017 0,1622
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 0,014 0,0085 0,08112 x2
Divide by 2 
OPTION 2

 55,3  =  x = 0,08112 mol∙dm-3

[HI] 2 x2
Kc 
[H2 ][I2 ] (0,014 )(0,0085 )
H2 I2 HI
Initial mass (g)
Initial quantity (mol) x+0,028 x + 0,017 0
Change (mol) x x 2x Using
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) 0,028  0,017 2x ratio 
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 0,014 0,0085 x x2
Divide by 2 
Initial quantity I2(mol) = 0,08112 + 0,017 = 0,09812 mol
m(I2) = nM = (0,09812)(254)  = 24,92 g  (9)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 108 FS/2019

9.3 Chemical/dynamic equilibrium  (1)

9.4 Addition of a catalyst.  AND Increase in pressure.  (2)
9.5.1 Endothermic 
 The rate of the forward reaction decreases more. / The rate of the reverse reaction
decreases less. 
 A decrease in temperature favours the exothermic reaction.  (3)
9.5.2 Decreases  (1)
9.6 Reactants / H2 / I2 removed (1)
[18]
QUESTION 10
10.1 The stage in a chemical reaction when the rate of forward reaction equals the rate of reverse
reaction. 
OR The stage in a chemical reaction when the concentrations/amount of reactants and
products remain constant.  (2)
10.2 OPTION 1
m 1,12
n= = = 0,04 mol
M 28
COBr2 CO Br2
Initial quantity (mol) 0 0
Change (mol) 0,04 0,04 0,04
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) 0,04 0,04 
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 0,02 0,02
[CO][Br2 ] 2
(0,02)
Kc   0,19  =  c(COBr2)eq = 2,11 x 10-3 mol∙dm-3 
[COBr2 ] [COBr2 ] (7)
OPTION 2
m 1,12
n= = = 0,04 mol
M 28 
COBr2 CO Br2
Initial quantity (mol) x 0 0
Change (mol) 0,04 0,04 0,04
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) x – 0,04 0,04 0,04 
Equilibrium concentration x  0,04
0,02 0,02 Divide by 2 
2
(0,02) 2
Kc 
[CO][Br2 ]
  0,19  =   x = 0,0442 mol
[COBr2 ] x  0,04
2
 c(COBr2)eq = 2,11 x 10-3 mol∙dm-3 
10.3 OPTION 1 OPTION 2: From Q10.2 Option 2
n(COBr2)eq = cV = 2,11  10-3  2  n(COBr2)initial = x = 0,0442 mol 
= 4,22  10-3 mol n(COBr2)react = 0,04 mol
n(COBr2)initial = 0,04 + 4,22  10 
-3

= 0,044 mol
0,04
% decomposed =  x 100 = 90,46%  (90,3 – 90,9%)
0,044 (4)
10.4 Kc < 0,19  (1)
10.5 Decreases 
A decreases in pressure favours the reaction that produces the larger number of moles/volume
(units) of gas.  (3)
The forward reaction will be favoured..  [17]
QUESTION 11
11.1.1 When the equilibrium in a closed system is disturbed, the system will re-instate a new
equilibrium by favouring the reaction that will oppose the disturbance.  (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 109 FS/2019

11.1.2  Percentage yield increases with an increase in temperature. 

 Forward reaction is favoured. 
 Increase in temperature favours an endothermic reaction. . (3)
11.1.3 When the pressure increases, the reaction that leads to a decrease in the number of moles
will be favoured.  (2)
11.1.4 I  (2)
11.2 OPTION 1
HCℓ O2 Cℓ2 H2O
Initial quantity (mol) 0,2 0,11 0 0
Change (mol) 0,15  0,0375 0,075 0,075 ratio 
Quantity at 1,825
equilibrium (mol) = 0,05  0,0725 0,075 0,075 
36,5
Equilibrium concen- Divide
0,25 0,3625 0,375 0,375
tration (mol∙dm-3) by 0,2

[Cl2 ]2 [H2 O]2
( 0,375 ) 2
( 0,375 )2 = 13,97 
Kc = 4 =
[HCl] [O2 ] (0,25)4 (0,3625 ) 
OPTION 2
m 1,825
n(HCℓ)equilibrium = = = 0,05 mol
M 36,5 
n(HCℓ)reacted = 0,2 – 0,05 = 0,15 mol 

n(O2)reacted = ¼n(HCℓ)reacted = ¼ x 0,15 = 0,0375 mol

n(Cℓ2)formed = ½n(HCℓ)reacted = ½ x 0,15 = 0,075 mol Using ratio 
n(H2O)formed = ½n(HCℓ)reacted = ½ x 0,15 = 0,075 mol

n(O2)equilibrium = 0,11 – 0,0375 = 0,0725 mol


n(Cℓ2)equilibrium = n(H2O)equilibrium = 0,075 mol

0,0375
c(O2)equilibrium = n = = 0,3625 mol∙dm-3
V 0,2 Divide by 0,2
c(Cℓ2)equilibrium = c(H2O)equilibrium = n = 0,075 = 0,375 mol∙dm-3
V 0,2
[Cl2 ]2 [H2 O]2 2 2

Kc = 4  = (0,375 ) (0,375 ) = 13,97  (9)
[HCl] [O2 ] 4
(0,25) (0,3625 )  [18]
QUESTION 12
12.1 The stage in a chemical reaction when the rate of forward reaction equals the rate of reverse
reaction. 
OR The stage in a chemical reaction when the concentrations of reactants and products remain
constant.  (2)
12.2.1 2 (1)
12.2.2 1 (1)
12.2.3 3 (1)
12.3 OPTION 1
[A] = 8 = 2,67 mol∙dm-3
3

[B] = 4 = 1,33 mol∙dm-3 Divide by 3 dm3 
3

[C] = 12 = 4 mol∙dm-3
3
[C]3  ( 4 )3  = 6,75 
Kc  
2
[ A ] [B] (2,67)2 (1,33)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 110 FS/2019

OPTION 2
A B C
Initial quantity (mol) 16 8 0
Change (mol) 8 4 12
Quantity at equilibrium (mol) 8 4 12 
8 4 12 Divide by
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 3 dm3 
3 3 3

[C]3  ( 4)3  = 6,75 

Kc  
2
[ A ] [B] (2,67)2 (1,33) (7)
12.4 Endothermic 
 (An increase in temperature) favours the reverse reaction.  (3)
 An increase in temperature favours an endothermic reaction.  [15]
QUESTION 13
13.1 When the equilibrium in a closed system is disturbed, the system will re-instate a (new)
equilibrium  by favouring the reaction that will cancel/oppose the disturbance.  (2)
13.2 Endothermic 
 Decrease in temperature favours the exothermic reaction. 
 The reverse reaction is favoured./Die terugwaartse reaksie word bevoordeel. 
OR Number of moles/amount/concentration of N2O4/colourless gas increases.
OR Number of moles/amount of NO2/brown gas decreases. (3)
13.3.1 Increases  (1)
13.3.2 Remains the same  (1)
13.3.3 Increases  (1)
13.4 OPTION 1
N2O4 NO2
Initial amount (moles) x 0
Change in amount (moles) 0,2x  0,4x ratio 
Equilibrium amount (moles) 0,8x 0,4x 
Equilibrium concentration (mol∙dm-3) 0,4x 0,2x Divide by
  0,16   x = 1,6 mol 
2
[NO 2 ] 2  ( 0,2x ) 2 dm3 
Kc  
[N2 O 4 ] (0,4x )
OPTION 2
∆n(N2O4) = 20 x  = 0,2x AND ∆n(NO2) = 2∆n(N2O4) = 0,4 x 
100
n(N2O4)eq = x – 0,2x = 0,8x AND n(NO2)eq = 0 + 0,4x 
0,8x
c(N2O4)eq =  0,4x
2 
c(NO2)eq = 0,4x  0,2x
2
 (0,2x ) 2  x = 1,6 mol 
2
[NO 2 ]
Kc   0,16   (8)
[N2 O 4 ] (0,4x ) [16]

ACIDS AND BASES

QUESTION 1
1.1.1 Ionises / dissociates completely in water.  (1)

1.1.2 NO 3 / Nitrate ion  (1)
1.1.3 pH = - log[H3O+] / - log[H+]  = -log(0,3)  = 0,52  (3)
1.2.1
c
n
 2 = n
  n(HCℓ) = 0,2 mol 
V 0,1 (3)
1.2.2 Burette  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 111 FS/2019

1.2.3 B Titration of strong acid and strong base.  (3)

1.2.4 The number of moles of acid in the flask remains constant.  (1)
1.2.5
  0,2 =  n = 4,2 x 10-3 mol 
n n
c  n(HCℓ)excess = n(NaOH) = 4,2 x 10-3 mol
V 0,021 (3)
1.2.6 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
n(HCℓ reacted): n(HCℓ reacted) = 0,2 – 4,2 x 10-3  = 0,196 mol
0,2 – 4,2 x 10-3  = 0,196 mol m
n(MgO reacted): n(HCℓ reacted) =  0,196 = m
½n(HCℓ) = ½(0,196) = 9,8 x 10-2 mol  M 36,5
m m  m(HCℓ reacted) = 7,154 g
n(MgO reacted) =  0,098 = 
M 40 40 g MgO  .............. 73 g HCℓ 
 m = 3,92 g x g MgO ................... 7,154 g  x = 3,92 g
3,92 3,92
% purity =  = 87,11%  % purity =  = 87,11%  (5)
4,5  100 4,5  100 [21]
QUESTION 2
2.1.1 An acid is a proton (H+ ion) donor.  (1)
2.1.2 It ionises to form 2 protons for each H2SO4 molecule. / It ionises to form 2 moles of H ions. 
+

OR It donates 2 H+ ions per H2SO4 molecule. (1)

2.2.1 Amphiprotic substance / Ampholyte  (1)
2.2.2 H2CO3  (1)
2.3.1

(6)
2.3.2

(2)
2.3.3 Shows end point of titration. / Shows when neutralisation occurs.  (1)
2.3.4

(8)
[22]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 112 FS/2019

QUESTION 3
3.1.1 Diprotic  (1)
3.1.2 H2O  and (COO) 22  (2)
3.1.3 H(COO) 2 / HC2O 4  It acts as base (in reaction I) and as acid (in reaction II).  (2)
3.2 Ionises / dissociates incompletely / partially.  (1)
3.3 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
m n
c   0,2 = m  c   0,2 =
n
 n = 0,05 mol
MV  0,25  90 V 0,25
 m = 4,5 g  m m
n  0,05 =   m = 4,5 g 
M 90 (4)
3.4.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
c a Va na n((COOH)2) = cV  = (0,2)(0,025) 
  = 0,005 mol
c b Vb nb
 n(NaOH) = 2(0,005)  = 0,01 mol
0,2  25 1
  cb = 0,28 mol∙dm-3  n 0,01
c b  36 2  c = = 0,28 mol∙dm-3 
V 0,0036 (5)
3.4.2 2 (3)
(COO) 2 (aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)  ⇌ (COOH)2(aq) + 2OH-(aq)  Bal. 
[18]
QUESTION 4
4.1.1 Hydrolysis  (1)
4.1.2 Acidic  Forms H3O ions during hydrolysis.  OR Salt of strong acid and weak base.
+
(2)
4.2.1 n = cV  = (0,1)(0,1)  = 0,01 mol  (3)

4.2.2 n(HCℓ) = caVa = (0,11)(14,55 x 10-3)  = 1,6 x 10-3 mol

n(NaOH) = n(HCℓ) = 1,6 x 10-3 mol 
n(NaOH excess) in 100 cm3 = 1,6 x 10-3 x 4  = 6,4 x 10-3 mol
n(NaOH reacted) = 0,01 - 6,4 x 10-3  = 3,6 x 10-3 mol
n(NH4Cℓ) = n(NaOH) = 3,6 x 10-3 mol  (0,003598 mol)

m(NH4Cℓ) = nM x m
= (3,6 x 10-3)(53,5) n(NH4Cℓ) = 0,92  n(NH4Cℓ) =
53,5 53,5
= 0,193 g

92% : 0,193 g  3,6 x 10-3 = 0,92 x  3,6 x 10-3 = m
100% : x 53,5 53,5 
0,193  100  x = 0,21 g  n(NH4Cℓ) = 0,192 g
x = 
0,192  100
92
m(fertiliser) = 
= 0,21 g  92
= 0,21 g  (8)
4.3 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
[OH-] = [NaOH] = 0,5 mol∙dm-3 pOH = -log[OH-] 
Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = -log(0,5) 
1 x 10-14 = [H3O+]0,5  = 0,301
 [H3O+] = 2 x 10-14 mol∙dm-3
pH = -log[H+]  pH + pOH = 14
= -log(2 x 10-14)  pH = 14 – 0,301  (4)
= 13,7  = 13,7  (13,699) [18]
QUESTION 5
5.1 It is a proton donor.  (2)
5.2.1 2
CO 3 (aq)  (1)

5.2.2 H2CO3 + H2O  ⇌ HCO 3 (aq) + H3O+(aq)  Bal.  (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 113 FS/2019

5.2.3

(5)
5.3.1 An acid that donates ONE proton / H ion / H3O ion. 
+ +

OR An acid of which ONE mol ionises to form ONE mol of protons / H + ions / H3O+ ions. (1)
5.3.2

(5)
5.3.3 Weak 
The [H+] OR [H3O+] is lower than the concentration of acid X.  (3)
Therefore the acid is incompletely ionised.  [20]
QUESTION 6
6.1.1 An acid is a proton/ H+ donor.  NOTE: NOT H3O+ (2)
6.1.2 H2O  and H2CO3  (2)
6.1.3 H2O  OR HCO 3 (1)
6.2.1 n(HCℓ) = cV  = (0,1)(0,5)  = 0,05 mol
n(NaHCO3) = cV = (0,25) (0,8)  = 0,2 mol
n(NaHCO3)reacted = n(HCℓ) = 0,05 mol 
n(NaHCO3)excess = 0,2 – 0,05  = 0,15 mol
n(OH-) = n(NaHCO3)  = 0,15 mol
n 0,15
c(OH-) = = = 0,12 mol∙dm-3 
V 1,3  (8)
6.2.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
Kw = [H3O+][OH-] = 1 x 10-14 pOH = -log[OH—] = -log(0,12) 
1 x 10-14 = [H3O+](0,12)  = 0,92
[H3O+] = 8,33 x 10-14 mol∙dm-3 pH + pOH = 14
pH = - log [H3O+] = - log(8,33 x 10-14)  pH + 0,92 = 14  (4)
= 13,08  pH = 13,08  [17]
QUESTION 7
7.1.1 Hydrolysis is the reaction of a salt with water.  (2)
7.1.2 Smaller than 7 

NH 4 + H2O  → NH3 + H3O+  (3)
7.2.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3
m 7,35 98 g : 1 mol m 7,35
n = = 0,08 mol  7,35 :0,08 mol  c = = 0,15 mol∙dm-3
M 98  MV 98  0,5
n = cV = 0,15 x 0,5 = 0,08 mol  (2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 114 FS/2019

7.2.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2

Q7.2.1
pH = −log[H3O ] 
+ n 0,075
[H2SO4]in = =
1,3  = −log[H3O+] V 0,5 
[H3O+] = 0,05 mol∙dm-3 = 0,15 mol∙dm-3
[H3O ]initially = 2[H2SO4] = 2 x 0,15 
+

[H2SO4] = ½[H3O+] = ½ x 0,05  = 0,3 mol∙dm-3

pH = −log[H3O+]   1,3  = -log[H3O+]
= 0,025 mol∙dm-3
n(H2SO4)excess = cV  = 0,025 x 0,5 
[H3O+] = 0,05 mol∙dm-3
= 0,0125 mol
Q7.2.1 [H3O+]react = 0,3 – 0,05  = 0,25 mol∙dm-3
[H2SO4]react = ½[H3O+]
n(H2SO4)react = 0,075 – 0,0125  = ½ x 0,25
= 0,0625 mol
= 0,125 mol∙dm-3 (0,14)
n(NaOH) = 2n(H2SO4) = 2 x 0,0625 
n(H2SO4)react = cV = (0,125)(0,5) = 0,0625
= 0,125 mol mol
OR n(NaOH) = 2n(H2SO4) = 2 x 0,0625 
= 0,125 mol
m m m
n(NaOH) =
M 
1 mol : 40 g 
n(NaOH) =  0,125 =  m=5g
M 40
m
 0,125 = 0,125 mol : 5 g 
40 (9)
 m=5g [16]
QUESTION 8
8.1.1 Weak acid  (1)
8.1.2 pH = -log[H3O+] 
4  = -log[H3O+]  [H3O+] = 1 x 10-4 mol∙dm-3  (3)
8.2.1 A substance that produces hydroxide ions (OH-) in water.  (2)
8.2.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3
c a  Va n c a  Va n n(acid)used = cV 
 a  a = (0,16)(0,025) 
c a  Vb nb c a  Vb nb
  = 4 x 10-3 mol
0,16  25 1 0,16  25 1 n(KOH) = 4 x 10-3 mol 
   
c b  12,5  1 c b  12,5  1
cb = 0,32 mol·dm-3 cb = 0,32 mol·dm-3 In 12,5 cm3:
n n(KOH) = 4 x 10-3 mol
m c
c V In 250 cm3
MV n
m 0,32   n = 0,08 mol n(KOH) =
250
 4  10  3 
0,32  0,25 12,5
56 0,25 m m = 0,08 mol
m = 4,48 g  n  0,08   m(KOH) = nM = 0,08 x 56 
M 56
 m = 4,48 g  = 4,48 g 
(7)
8.2.3 Greater than 7  (1)
8.2.4 CH3COO-(aq) + H2O(ℓ)  ⇌ CH3COOH(aq) + OH-(aq)  Bal.  (3)
[17]
QUESTION 9
9.1 A substance that ionises incompletely/to a small extent.  (2)
9.2 Oxalic acid  Higher Ka value  OR Carbonic acid has a lower Ka value. (2)
9.3 2
H2O  and (COO) 2  (2)
9.4 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
Kw = [OH─][ H3O+]  1 x 10-14 = (0,1)[H3O+]  pOH = -log[OH─]  = -log(0,1)  = 1
[H3O+] = 1 x 10-13 mol∙dm-3 14 = pOH + pH  14 = 1 + pH 
pH = -log[H3O+]  = -log(1 x 10-13)  = 13  pH = 13  (4)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 115 FS/2019

9.5.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2

c a  Va na n(NaOH) = cV  = (0,1)(0,0251) = 0,00251 mol

c b  Vb nb  1
n(COOH)2 = (0,00251) = 0,00126 mol
c a  14,2  1 2
 
0,1 25,1 2 n 0,00126
 ca  =  = 0,09 mol∙dm-3 
c a  0,09 mol  dm  3 V 0,0142
(5)
9.5.2 C / phenolphthalein 
Titration of weak acid and strong base.  (2)
OR The endpoint will be at pH > 7 which is in the range of the indicator. [17]
QUESTION 10
10.1.1 Weak 
Dissociates/Ionises incompletely/partially (in water to form a low concentration of OH - ions.)  (2)
10.1.2 NH4 /ammonium ion  (1)
10.1.3 H2O/water/NH3/ammonia  (1)
10.2.1 Acidic pH < 7/pH = 4  (2)
10.2.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
pH = -log[H3O+]  pH + pOH = 14
 6  = -log[H3O+] 6  + pOH = 14  Any one
 [H3O+] = 1  10-6 mol∙dm-3
[H3O+][OH-] = 10-14  Any one pOH = -log[OH-] 
(1  10-6) [OH-] = 10-14  8 = -log[OH-]
 [OH-] = 1  10-8 mol∙dm-3   [OH-] = 1  10-8 mol∙dm-3  (4)
10.3 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
m  0,29 m 0,29
n(Na 2CO 3 )   n(Na 2CO 3 )  
M 106 M 106 
 nb = 2,74  10-3 mol / 0,003 mol = 2,74  10-3 mol / 0,003 mol
n(HCℓ) = 2n(Na2CO3) 
n(HCℓ) = 2n(Na2CO3)  = 5,47  10-3 mol  0,005 mol
= 5,47  10-3 mol / 0,005 mol 5,47  10-3 → 50 cm3
n(HCℓ) → 500 cm3:
5,47 x10 3
3 
 n(HCℓ) = 500  5,47 10
n
c(HCℓ)dilute =  = 0,1094 mol∙dm-3
V 0,05  50
cV(HCℓ)dilute = cV(HCℓ)conc = 0,0547 mol
0,1094 x 500  = (HCℓ)conc x 5  n 0,0547
 c(HCℓ)conc = 10,94 mol∙dm-3  c(HCℓ)conc =
V
=
5  10  3  (7)
= 10,94 mol∙dm-3  [17]
QUESTION 11

11.1.1 H2O  & HSO 4  (2)
11.1.2 Strong  Completely ionised (in water).  (2)
11.2.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
c a  Va na n(H2SO4) = cV  = (0,15)(0,024)  = 3,6 x 10-3 mol
  n(NaOH) =2(3,6 x 10-3) 
c a  Vb nb = 7,2 x 10-3 mol
0,15  24  1 n 7,2 × 10-3
  c= = = 0,28 mol∙dm-3 
c b  26 2 V 0,026
c(NaOH) = 0,28 mol∙dm-3  (5)
11.2.2 n(NaOH) = cV = 0,02 x 0,28  = 0,0056 mol [H2SO4] = n = 0,0017 = 0,034mol∙dm-3
n(H2SO4) = 0,03 x 0,15  = 0,0045 mol V 0,05 
n(H2SO4)used = ½n(NaOH) = 0,0028 [H3O+] = 2[H2SO4] = 2 x 0,034 
n(H2SO4)excess = 0,0045–0,0028  = 0,068mol∙dm-3 (8)
= 0,0017 mol pH = -log[H3O ] OR -log(0,068)  = 1,17 
+
[17]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 116 FS/2019

QUESTION 12
12.1 Titration/Volumetric analysis  (1)
12.2 To measure the (exact) volume of acid needed to reach endpoint/to neutralise the base.  (1)
12.3 Acids produce hydrogen ions (H )/hydronium ions (H3O ) in solution/water. 
+ +
(2)
12.4 H2SO4 ionises completely.  (1)
12.5 Blue to yellow  (1)
12.6 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
n
  0,1 =   nb = 2,5 x 10-3 mol
c a Va na n
  cb =
c b Vb nb V 0,025
na = 1 nb = 1 (2,5 x 10-3)  = 1,25 x 10-3 mol
  Va = 12,5 cm3
(0,1 )Va 1
2 2
(0,1)(25 ) 2
n
 ca =  0,1 = 1,25  10  Va = 0,0125 dm3/12,5 cm3 
3

V V (4)
12.7 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
na(excess = cV  na(final) = cV 
= (0,1)(0,005)  = 5 x 10-4 mol = (0,1)(0,0175)  = 1,75 x 10-3 mol
n 4 na(exs) = na(final) - na(react)
ca = = 5  10 = 1,75 x 10-3 – 1,25 x 10-3 = 5 x 10-4 mol
V 4,25  10 2
n 4
= 1,18 x 10-2 mol·dm-3 ca = = 5  10 = 1,18 x 10-2 mol·dm-3
c(H ) = 2ca = 2(1,18 x 10-2) 
+ V 4,25  10 2
= 2,36 x 10-2 mol·dm-3 c(H+) = 2ca = 2(1,18 x 10-2) 
pH = -log[H3O+] = -log(2,36 x 10-2) = 2,36 x 10-2 mol·dm-3 (7)
= 1,63  pH = -log[H3O+] = -log (2,36 x 10-2) = 1,63  [17]
QUESTION 13
13.1.1 An acid is a proton donor.  (2)
13.1.2 H2O  (1)

13.1.3 HSO 4  (2)
13.2.1 Reaction of a salt with water/H2O.  (2)
13.2.2 CO 32 (aq) + 2H2O(ℓ)  ⇌ H2CO3(aq) + 2OH- (aq) 
OR CO 32 (aq) + H2O(ℓ) ⇌ HCO 3 (aq) + OH-(aq)
The formation of OH- (aq) neutralises the excess acid.  (3)
13.3.1 pH = -log[H3O ]   5  = -log[H3O ]
+ +
 [H3O ] = 1 x 10 mol·dm 
+ -5 -3
(3)
13.3.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
c(H3O+)ini. = n   1 x 10-5 = n c(H3O+)fin = n = 1,26  10
3

V 4  10 
9
V 4  10 
9

 na = 4 x 104 mol = 3,15 x 10-7 mol∙dm-3

n(H3O+)react = 4 x 104 – 1,26 x 103 
c(H3O+)rea = 1 x 10-5 – 3,15 x 10-7 
= 3,87 x 104 mol
= 9,69 x 10-6 mol∙dm-3
n(CaO) = ½n(H3O+) = ½ x 3,87 x 104 
= 1,94 x 104 mol n(H3O+)rea = cV = (9,65 x 10-6)(4 x 109)
= 3,87 x 104 mol

n(CaO) = ½n(H3O+) = ½ x 3,87 x 104 

= 1,94 x 104 mol

OR
n(CaO) = m  1,94 x 10 = m
4
1 mol : 56 g 
M 56
 m = 1,09 x 106 g  1,94 x 104 mol : m (7)
 m = 1,09 x 106 g  [20]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 117 FS/2019

GALVANIC CELLS
QUESTION 1
1.1  Pressure: 1 atmosphere (atm) / 101,3 kPa / 1,013 x 105 Pa 
 Temperature: 25 °C / 298 K  (2)
1.2  Platinum is inert / does not react with the H ions OR acid. 
+

 Platinum is a conductor (of electricity).  (2)

1.3.1 Salt bridge  (1)
1.3.2 -0,31 V  (1)
1.3.3 2H + 2e → H2 
+ -
(2)
1.4.1 
E cell 
 E cathode 
 E anode   2,05  = - 0,31 – E M / M  2

EM / M2 
= -2,36 (V) 
 M is magnesium/ Mg.  (5)
1.4.2 Exothermic  (1)
1.5 The cell reaction reaches equilibrium.  (1)
[15]
QUESTION 2
2.1 A substance that is being reduced. 
OR A substance that gains electrons. OR A substance whose oxidation number decreases. (2)
2.2 Ag is a stronger oxidising agent  than Cu  and will oxidise Cu  to (blue)
+ 2+

Cu2+ ions. 
OR Cu2+ is a weaker oxidising agent  than Ag+  and Cu will be oxidised  to
Cu2+ ions.  (4)
2.3 Chemical energy to electrical energy  (1)
2.4 A (1)
2.5   
E cell  E cathode  E anode  = -0,8  – 0,34  = 0,46 V  (4)
2.6 Cu + 2Ag+(aq) → Cu2+ (aq) + 2Ag(s)  Balancing  (3)
2.7 Remains the same  (1)
[16]
QUESTION 3
3.1 Redox reaction  (1)
3.2 P Negative electrode. / Mg is a stronger reducing agent/is oxidized/release electrons.  (2)
3.3.1 (Temperature): 25 °C/298 K 
(Concentration): 1 mol∙dm-3  (2)

Mg(s) | Mg (aq) || Pb2+(aq) | Pb(s) 
2+
OR 2+
Mg | Mg || Pb | Pb2+
3.3.2 (3)
3.3.3 Pb / Pb(NO3)2 / lead(II) ions 
2+
(1)
  
3.4 E cell  E cathode  E anode  = -0,13  – (-2,36)  = 2,23 V  (4)
3.5.1 Remains the same  (1)
3.5.2 Increases  (1)
[15]
QUESTION 4
4.1 Temperature: 25 °C / 298 K 
Pressure: 101,3 kPa / 1,013 x 105 Pa / 1 atm / 100 kPa 
Concentration: 1 mol∙dm-3  (3)
4.2.1 Cd(s) / Cadmium / Cd∣Cd 2+
/ Cd ∣Cd 
2+
(1)

  0,13 = Ecathode – (-0,40) 

   
4.2.2 Ecell  Ecathode  Eanode
= - 0,27 V   Q is Ni / nickel 

Ecathode (5)
4.3.1 Cd(s) → Cd (aq) + 2e 
2+ -
(2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 118 FS/2019

4.3.2 Pt / Platinum  (1)

2+ 2+ 2+
4.4 Compare Q Q is reduced / Cd is oxidised and therefore Q is a stronger

& Cd2+ oxidising agent than Cd2+.
Compare R2 R2 is reduced / Cd is oxidised and therefore R2 is a stronger oxidising

& Cd2+ agent than Cd2+. 
Compare R2 The cell potential of combination II is higher than that of combination

& Q2+ I, therefore R2 is a stronger oxidising agent than Q2+. (4)
Final answer Cd2+; Q2+;R2 OR Cd2+ ; Ni2+ ; Cℓ2  [16]
QUESTION 5
5.1 B (1)
5.2.1 Cℓ2(g) + 2e- → 2Cℓ-(aq)  (2)
5.2.2 Cℓ2 / chlorine  (1)
5.3   
Ecell  Ecathode  Eanode  = 6  – (-2,36)  = 3,72 V  (4)
5.4  The Mg electrode becomes smaller. / The mass of the Mg electrode decreases. / The Mg
electrode being corroded.  (2)
 Magnesium is oxidised. / Mg → Mg2+ + 2e-  [10]
QUESTION 6
6.1 Electrons are transferred. 
OR The oxidation number of Mg / H changes. OR Mg is oxidised / H+ is reduced. (1)
6.2 H ions / HCℓ / H (aq) / HCℓ(aq) 
+ +
(1)
6.3 Ag is a weaker reducing agent  than H2 and will not be oxidised to Ag  +

OR H2 is a stronger reducing agent  than Ag and will be oxidised  to H+. (3)

6.4 Electrode / Conductor of electrons in hydrogen half-cell  (1)
6.5.1 Chemical energy to electrical energy  (1)
6.5.2 Provides path for movement of ions./Completes the circuit./Ensures electrical neutrality in
cell.  (1)
6.5.3 2H + 2e → H2 
+ -
(2)
  
6.5.4 Mg(s) | Mg2+(aq) || H+(aq) | H2(g) | Pt OR Mg(s) | Mg2+(1 mol∙dm-3) || H+(1 mol∙dm-3) | H2(g) | Pt (3)
6.6   
Ecell  Ecathode  Eanode  = 0,00  – (-2,36)  = 2,36 V  (4)
6.7 Increases  (1)
[18]
QUESTION 7
7.1.1 AgNO3 / Silver nitrate  (1)
7.1.2 Ni → Ni 2+
+ 2e 
-
(2)
7.1.3 Ni + 2Ag  → Ni + 2+
+ 2Ag  Bal  (3)
7.2.1 Ni 
Ni is a stronger reducing agent. / Ni is the anode. / Ni loses electrons. / Ni is oxidised.  (2)
  
7.2.2 Ni (s) | Ni2+ (aq) || Ag+(aq) | Ag(s) OR Ni (s) | Ni2+ (1 mol∙dm-3) || Ag+(1 mol∙dm-3) | Ag(s) (3)
  
7.2.3 Ecell  Ecathode  Eanode  = 0,80  – (-0,27)  = 1,07 V  (4)
7.2.4 Increases  (1)
[16]
QUESTION 8
8.1.1 Emf  (1)
8.1.2 Voltmeter/Multimeter  (1)
8.1.3 Salt bridge  (1)
8.1.4 Temperature: 25 °C / 298 K  AND Concentration: 1 mol·dm 
-3
(2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 119 FS/2019

8.2 Marking criteria

Dependent and independent variables correctly identified. 
Relationship between the independent and dependent variables correctly stated. 
Examples:
Emf increases as concentration increases. (2)
8.3 
Ecell 
 Ereduction 
 Eoxidation   1,11  = E 
X / X2
- (- 0,76)  E 
X / X2
= 0,35 (V) 
X = Copper / Cu  (5)
8.4 Cu (aq) + Zn(s)  → Zn (aq) + Cu(s) 
2+ 2+
Bal.  (3)
[15]
QUESTION 9
9.1.1 Salt bridge  (1)
9.1.2 Voltaic / Galvanic cell  (1)
9.2.1 Decreases  (1)
9.2.2 Increases  (1)
9.3 Y(s) → Y (aq) + 2e 
2+ -

OR Mg(s) → Mg2+(aq) + 2e- (2)

  
9.4 Y(s) |Y2+(aq) ||Aℓ3+(aq) | Aℓ(s) OR Mg(s) |Mg2+(aq) ||Aℓ3+(aq) | Aℓ(s

OR Y(s) | Y2+ (1 mol∙dm-3) || Aℓ3+(1 mol∙dm-3) | Aℓ(s) (3)

9.5 
Ecell 
 Ereduction 
 Eoxidation   0,7  = - 1,66  - Eθoxidation  Eθoxidation = -2,36 V (5)
Y is Mg  [14]
QUESTION 10
10.1.1 Voltmeter/multimeter/galvanometer  (1)
10.1.2 Anode  (1)
10.1.3 3Ag (aq) + Aℓ(s)   3Ag(s) + Aℓ
+ 3+
(aq)  Bal.  (3)
10.1.4   
Ecell  Ereduction  Eoxidation  = +0,80 - (- 1,66)  = 2,46 V 
(4)
10.2.1 Platinum/carbon  (1)
10.2.2 ANY TWO: Concentration: 1 mol∙dm ; Temperature: 25 °C/298 K  ;
-3

Pressure: 101,3 kPa/1,01 x 105 Pa/1 atm (2)

10.2.3 Zinc/Zn  (1)
10.2.4 PQ  (1)
[14]
QUESTION 11
11.1.1 A substance that loses/donates electrons.  (2)
11.1.2 Platinum/Pt  (1)
11.1.3 Sn (aq)/tin(II) ionsne 
2+
(1)
  
11.1.4 Pt | Sn2+(aq) | Sn 4+(aq) || Ag+(aq) | Ag(s)
OR Pt| Sn (1 mol∙dm ) | Sn (1 mol∙dm-3) || Ag+ (1 mol∙dm-3) | Ag(s)
2+ -3 4+
(3)
  
11.1.5 Ecell  Ereduction  Eoxidation  = +0,80  - (+0,15)  = 0,65 V  (4)
11.2.1 Magnesium becomes smaller./Brown solid forms.  (1)
11.2 2 Cu is a stronger oxidising agent (than Mg ) and will be reduced to Cu. 
2+ 2+
(3)
OR Mg is a stronger reducing agent (than Cu) and will reduce Cu2+ to Cu. [15]
QUESTION 12
12.1.1 Galvanic cell/Voltaic cell  (1)
12.1.2 Indicates phase boundary./Interphase /phase separator (1)
12.1.3 Fe 2+
→ Fe 3+
+ e 
-
(2)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 120 FS/2019

12.1.4 
E cell 
 E reduction 
 E oxidation   0,03  = E X / X2 - (0,77)   E X / X2 = 0,80 (V) 
X = Silver / Ag  (5)
12.2.1 Pt  (1)
12.2.2 Iron(III) ions  (1)
12.2.3 2Fe 3+
+ Cu → 2Fe 2+
+ Cu 2+
Bal.  (3)
[14]
QUESTION 13
13.1.1 Loss of electrons.  (2)
13.1.2 Fe → Fe 3+
+ 3e 
-
(2)
13.1.3 Reducing agent  (1)
13.1.4 Fe is a stronger reducing agent  than Cu  and (Fe) will be oxidised (to Fe ). 3+

OR Cu is a weaker reducing agent  than Fe and (Cu) will not be oxidised.  (3)
13.1.5 Zinc/Zn  Stronger reducing agent than Fe.  (2)
13.2.1 3Cu 2+
+ 2Fe  → 3Cu + 2Fe 3+
 Bal.  (3)
  
13.2.2 E cell E reduction E oxidation  = 0,34  – (-0,06)  = 0,40 V  (4)
[17]

ELECTROLYTIC CELLS
QUESTION 1
1.1 Electrolytic  (1)
1.2 Q& T Cu 2+
+ 2e → Cu  (4)
1.3.1 Cℓ2 / chlorine gas  (1)
1.3.2 Cu 2+
ions / copper(II) ions / CuCℓ2 / copper(II) chloride  (1)
1.4 Cu is a stronger reducing agent  than Cℓ ions  and Cu will be oxidised  to Cu .
- 2+
(3)
OR Cℓ- ions is a weaker reducing agent  than Cu  and Cu will be oxidised  to Cu2+. [10]
QUESTION 2
2.1 A solution that conducts electricity through the movement of ions.  (2)
2.2 2H2O + 2e → H2 + 2OH 
- -
(2)
2.3 Chlorine gas / Cℓ2  (1)
2.4 H2O is a stronger oxidising agent  than Na and will be reduced  to H2.
+
(2)
[7]
QUESTION 3
3.1 A solution that conducts electricity through the movement of ions.  (2)
3.2 Plastic is a non-conductor of electricity. / Graphite is a conductor.  (1)
3.3 Ni (aq) + 2e  Ni(s) 
2+ -
(2)
3.4 Ni / nickel  Ni is oxidised. 
OR: Ni loses electrons. OR: Ni is the anode. OR: Ni is the positive electrode. (2)
3.5 Ring 
Reduction takes place at the cathode.  OR: Negative electrode. (2)
3.6 Decreases  (2)
Ni2+ ions from the electrolyte will be reduced (to Ni).  OR Ni2+ changes to Ni. [11]
QUESTION 4
4.1 The chemical process in which electrical energy is converted to
chemical energy. 
OR: The use of electrical energy to produce a chemical change. (2)
4.2 To keep the polarity of the electrodes constant. 
OR: DC provides a one way flow of electrons ensuring that the same chemical reaction occurs
all the time at the same electrodes. (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 121 FS/2019

4.3 Cu2+ (aq) + 2e-  Cu(s)  (2)

4.4 Cu is a stronger oxidising agent  than Zn .  Cu will be reduced to Cu. 
2+ 2+ 2+

OR: Zn is a stronger reducing agent than Cu. Cu2+ will be reduced to Cu. (3)
4.5 m m 1,81
n  2,85 x 10-2 =   m = 1,81 g AND %purity =  = 90,49%  (4)
M 63,5 2 [12]
QUESTION 5
5.1 Electrolytic cell  (1)
5.2 The substance/species which loses electrons.  (2)
5.3 P (1)
5.4 Cu(s) → Cu (aq) + 2e 
2+ -
(2)
5.5 A (3)
Cℓ- ions move to the positive electrode / anode where they are oxidised to Cℓ 2 .  [12]

QUESTION 6
6.1.1 Electrolyte  (1)
6.1.2 Electrolytic cell  (1)
6.2 A to B  (1)
6.3.1 B (1)
6.3.2 A (1)
6.4 Decreases  (2)
Copper (Cu) is oxidised to Cu2+ / Oxidation takes place at A.  [7]
QUESTION 7
7.1 Endothermic  (1)
7.2 Anode 
Connected to the positive terminal of the battery.  (2)
7.3.1 Chlorine gas / Cℓ2  (1)
7.3.2 Hydrogen gas /H2  (1)
7.3.3 2H2O(ℓ) + 2e  H2(g) + 2OH (aq) 
- -
(2)
7.4 Basic / alkaline 
OH− ions form / NaOH forms  (2)
[9]
QUESTION 8
8.1 Electrolytic cell  (1)
8.2 P (1)
8.3.1 Au(s) → Au (aq) + 3e 
3+ -
(2)
8.3.2 +3  (1)
8.3.3 Electrical energy (is converted) to chemical energy  (1)
8.3.4 Becomes smaller/thinner/eroded.  (1)
8.4 Increase in value.  OR Protection against rust. (1)
8.5 ANY ONE: (1)
Replace Au3+(aq) / electrolyte with Ag+(aq) / silver(I) solution.; Replace P/anode with Ag(s). [9]
QUESTION 9
9.1 Bauxite  (1)
9.2 Oxidation  (1)
9.3 Reduce melting point./To lower the temperature or energy needed to melt the Aℓ2O3.  (1)
9.4 Aℓ3+(aq) + 3e- → Aℓ(s)  (2)
9.5 C + O2  → CO2  Bal  OR: 2Aℓ2O3 + 3C  → 4Aℓ + 3CO2  Bal  (3)
[8]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 122 FS/2019

QUESTION 10
10.1 DC/GS  (1)
10.2 Cathode  Cu2+(aq) + 2e- → Cu  (3)
10.3 Cu2+ ions is a stronger oxidising agent  than Zn2+ ions  and therefore Zn2+ ions will not be
reduced (to Zn). 
OR Zn2+ ions is weaker oxidising agent than Cu2+ ions and therefore Zn2+ ions will not be
reduced (to Zn). (3)
10.4.1 (Chlorine) gas/bubbles is/are formed.  (1)
10.4.2 Decreases  (1)
[9]
QUESTION 11
11.1 The chemical process in which electrical energy is converted to chemical energy. 
OR The use of electrical energy to produce a chemical change. (2)
11.2 B (1)
11.3 Cu (aq) + 2e → Cu 
2+ -
(2)

11.4 % purity = m(Cu)
 100 = 4,4
 100 = 88%  (4)
m(Cu)impure / onsuiwer 5
[9]
QUESTION 12
12.1.1 Electrolyte  (1)
12.1.2 Conduct electricity/Carry charges  (1)
12.2 Cu(NO3)2  (1)
12.3 Iron rod  Reduction takes place.  (2)
12.4 Cu → Cu 2+
+ 2e  -
(2)
12.5.1 Copper(II) (ions)/Cu 2+
and silver (ions)/Ag 
+
(2)
12.5.2 Ag /silver(I) ions is a stronger oxidising agent  than Cu /Copper(II) ions and will be reduced
+ 2+
(2)
(more readily)  to form silver/Ag on the iron rod. [11]
QUESTION 13
13.1 A cell in which electrical energy is converted to chemical energy.  (2 or 0)
OR A cell in which electrical energy/electricity is used to obtain a chemical change/reaction. (2)
13.2 Any soluble copper(II) salt e.g. CuSO4/Cu(NO3)2/CuCℓ2  (1)
13.3 B Cu 2+
+ 2e → Cu 
-
(3)
13.4 Platinum/Pt  AND silver/Ag  (2)
[8]

FERTILISERS
QUESTION 1
1.1.1 Nitrogen / N2  and hydrogen / H2  (2)
1.1.2 NH3 + HNO3  → NH4NO3  Bal.  (3)
1.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3
3 m(nutrients): m(N):
%N=  (x 36)  = 12 %  
36 3   36
9  (x 20) = 7,2 kg  20  = 2,4k g 
12  100 9 100
m(N) :  20 kg = 2,4 kg  3
20  m(N) =  x 7,2 = 2,4 kg  (4)
9 [9]
QUESTION 2
2.1 Contact process  (1)
2.2.1 Vanadium pentoxide / Vanadium(V) oxide / V2O5  (1)
2.2.2 H2S2O7(ℓ) + H2O(ℓ)  → 2H2SO4(ℓ)  Bal.  (3)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 123 FS/2019

2.3.1 H2SO4 + 2NH3  → (NH4)2SO4  Bal.  (3)

2.3.2 Ammonium sulphate  (1)
2.4.1 Total percentage of fertiliser  (1)
2.4.2

(4)
[14]
QUESTION 3
3.1.1 2SO2(g) + O2(g)  → 2SO3(g)  Bal.  (3)
3.1.2 Catalyst  OR Increase the reaction rate (1)
3.2 Exothermic  The temperature increases (2)
3.3  An exothermic reaction is favoured by a decrease in temperature. 
 The forward reaction is favoured. 
 Higher yield (of SO3).  (3)
3.4.1 H2S2O7  (1)
3.4.2 A mist will form (which is difficult to collect).  OR The reaction is too exothermic. (1)
3.5 H2SO4 + 2NH3 → (NH4)2SO4  Bal.  (3)
[14]
QUESTION 4
4.1.1 Haber process  (1)
4.1.2 N2 + 3H2 ⇌ 2NH3  bal  (3)
4.1.3 Air  (1)
4.2.1 40%  (1)
4.2.2 High yield  and high rate due to higher concentration.  (2)
4.2.3 Low reaction rate  (1)
OPTION 1 OPTION 2
28 28
% N in NH4NO3 =  x 100 = 35% m(N in NH4NO3) =  x 50 
80 80
35 = 17,5 kg 
m(N) in 50 kg:  50  = 17,5 kg 
100 (3)
QUESTION 5
5.1 Ostwald process  (1)
5.2 NO / nitrogen monoxide  AND water / H2O  (2)
5.3 NH3 + HNO3  → NH4NO3  bal  (3)
5.4 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
17 g NH3 forms 80 g NH4NO3 m 6,8 × 107
6,8 x 104 kg forms x g NH4NO3 n(NH3) = = = 4 x 106 mol
M 17
80 n(NH4NO3) = n(NH3) = 4 x 106 mol
x = 6,8 x 104 x = 3,2 x 105 kg
17 m(NH4NO3) = nM = (4 x 106)(80) = 3,2 x 108 g (3)
5.5 To make a NPK fertiliser./To make fertilisers which contain all three primary nutrients.  (1)
[10]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 124 FS/2019

QUESTION 6
6.1.1 Air  (1)
6.1.2 Natural gas / methane / oil / coal  (1)
6.1.3 Sulphur / iron pyrite / iron sulphide  (1)
6.2.1 Haber process  (1)
6.2.2 Ammonia  (1)
6.2.3 H2SO4  (1)
6.2.4 SO3+ H2SO4 → H2S2O7  Bal.  (3)
6.3.1 28
%N[NH4NO3] =  x 100 = 35%
80
28
%N[(NH4)2SO4] =  x 100 = 21,21%
132
Ammonium nitrate (has the highest percentage of nitrogen).  (4)
6.3.2 Ostwald process  (1)
[14]
QUESTION 7
7.1.1 Haber process  (1)
7.1.2 Contact process / Catalytic oxidation of SO2  (1)
7.1.3 Sulphur trioxide / SO3  (1)
7.1.4 SO3 + H2SO4   H2S2O7  Bal.  (3)
7.1.5 H2SO4  + 2NH3   (NH4)2SO4  Bal.  (4)
7.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
36 36
m(fertiliser) =  20  = 7,2 kg m(fertiliser) =  20 = 7,2 kg
100 100
4,11
%N =  100 = 57,08% m(K) = 7,2 –  (4,11 + 0,51)  = 2,58 kg
7,2
0,51 4,11 : 0,51 : 2,58
%P =  100 = 7,08%
7,2
%K = 100 –  (57,08 + 7,08)  = 35,84% 8 : 1 : 5 (4)
57,08 : 7,08 : 35,84  8 : 1 : 5  [14]
QUESTION 8
8.1.1 B&C (2)
8.1.2 Nitric acid/HNO3  (1)
8.1.3 A (1)
8.1.4 2NH3(g) + H2SO4  → (NH4)2SO4  Bal.  (3)
8.1.5 D (1)
8.2.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
3 3
%P = x 22%  = 9,43% m(P)   (0,44) 
7 7
9,43 = 0,19 kg 
 m(P) =  2 kg  = 0,19 kg 
100 (3)
8.2.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
22 %filler = 100 – 22  = 78%
m(fertiliser) = x 2  = 0,44 kg 78 
100 m(filler) = x 2 = 1,56 kg  (3)
m(filler) = 2 – 0,44  = 1,56 kg  100 [14]

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 125 FS/2019

QUESTION 9
9.1.1 Ostwaldprocess  (1)
9.1.2 Catalyst/Speeds up the rate of the reaction  (1)
9.1.3 Nitrogen dioxide  (1)
9.1.4 3NO2 + H2O ⇌ 2HNO3(aq) + NO  Bal.  (2)
9.1.5 Decrease pressure / Increase volume  & Decrease temperature  (2)
9.2.1 (Ratio of the) nitrogen, phosphorous and potassium in the fertiliser.  (1)
9.2.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3
3 m(nutrients): m(K):
%K =  (x 25)  25 
8  (x 50) = 12,5 kg 3  25 
= 9,38% 100  ( 50) ( )  4,69 kg
9,38 3 8 100
m(K) = ( 50 kg)   m(K)   x 12,5
100 8
= 4,69 kg = 4,69 kg

m 4,69  103
n(K )    120 mol
M 39  (6)
m(KCℓ) = nM = (120)(74,5) = 8940 g = 8,94 kg  [14]
QUESTION 10
10.1.1 Ammonia (1)
10.1.2 NO2  (1)
10.1.3 Catalytic oxidation of ammonia  (1)
10.1.4 Platinum/Pt  (1)
10.1.5 Ostwald process  (1)
10.1.6 Haber process  (1)
10.1.7 NH3 + HNO3  → NH4NO3  Bal.  (3)
10.2.1 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
N : P : K  10 : 5 : 15 N :P:K
30 10 : 5 : 15
m(fertiliser) = x 15 = 4,5 kg 5
100 m(P) = x 15 
5 1 100
m(P) = x 4,5  OR ( x 4,5) = 0,75 kg  = 0,75 kg 
30 6 (2)
10.2.2 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
10% + 5% + 15% = 30%
%fertiliser = 10 + 5 + 15 = 30% 30 1
%filler = 100 – 30 = 70%  m= x 15  OR ( x 15)
100 6
70 = 4,5 kg (3)
m(filler) = x 15  = 10,5 kg 
100 m(filler) = 15 – 4,5 = 10,5 kg  [14]
QUESTION 11
11.1.1 N2(g) + 3H2(g)  → 2NH3(g)  bal  (3)
11.1.2 (NH4)2SO4  (1)
11.1.3 Ostwald process  (1)
11.1.4 Ammonium nitrate  (1)
11.2.1 The ratio of nitrogen (N), phosphorous (P) and potassium (K) in a certain fertiliser. (1)
11.2.2 Percentage fertiliser in the bag.  (1)

Terms, definitions, questions and answers

Physical Sciences P2 (Chemistry) Gr 12 126 FS/2019

11.2.3 OPTION 1 OPTION 2

5 m(nutrients):
% K =  x 22%  = 9,17% 22
12  x 10 = 2,2 kg
100
 m(N) = 9,17  10 kg  = 0,92 kg 
100  m(K)  5  (2,2)  = 0,92 kg  (4)
12 [12]
QUESTION 12
12.1.1 (Catalytic) oxidation (of ammonia)  (1)
12.1.2 Neutralisation/acid-base reaction  (1)
12.2.1 Nitrogen/N2  (1)
12.2.2 NO2/nitrogen dioxide  (1)
12.2.3 Nitric acid/HNO3  (1)
12.3.1 2NH3 + H2SO4  → (NH4)2SO4  Bal.  (3)
12.3.2 4NH3 + 5O2  → 4NO + 6H2O  Bal.  (3)
12.4 % N = 28  
100 = 35%  (3)
80  [14]
QUESTION 13
13.1.1 Haber process  (1)
13.1.2 Ostwald process  (1)
13.2.1 Ammonium nitrate/NH4NO3  (1)
13.2.2 Iron/iron oxide/Fe/FeO  (1)
13.3 2NH3 + H2SO4  → (NH4)2SO4  Bal  (3)
10.4 OPTION 1 OPTION 2
NH4NO3: 80 g → 28 g N m 20 000 = 250 mol
20 kg → 28 x 20  m(N) = 7 kg 
n(NH4NO3) = =
M 80 
80 
n(N) = 2n(NH4NO3) = 500 mol
Na3PO4: 164 g → 31 g P
m(N) = 500 x 14 = 7 000 g = 7 kg 
12 kg → 31 x 12
164 n(Na3PO4) = 12 000 = 73,17 mol
 m(P) = 2,27 kg 
164
m(P) = 73,17 x 31 = 2 268 g = 2,27 kg 
KCℓ: 74,5 g → 39 g K
18 000
x 18  m(K) = 9,42 kg 
39 n(KCℓ) = = 241,61 mol
18 kg → 74,5
74,5
m(K) = 241,61 x 39 = 9 423 g = 9,42 kg 
 N : P : K
 N : P : K
7 : 2,27 : 9,42
7 : 2,27 : 9,42 (5)
3 : 1 : 4 
3 : 1 : 4  [12]

BIBLIOGRAPHY
Department of Basic Education, National Senior Certificate Physical Sciences Question Papers,
2014 – 2018, Pretoria

Terms, definitions, questions and answers